Mitsubishi Heavy Industries 00-GHP-T-055A GHP

Manual No.
'00 GHP -T-055A
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Collection data
GAS ENGINE DRIVEN

MULTI-INDOOR UNIT
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
(OUTDOOR UNIT)
Alternative refrigerant R407C use models
GHCP450HMTE4
GHCP560HMTE4
(INDOOR UNIT)
FDTJ28HKXE2
FDTWJ28HKXE2B
36HKXE2
45HKXE2B
45HKXE2
56HKXE2B
56HKXE2
71HKXE2B
71HKXE2
90HKXE2B
112HKXE2B
90HKXE2
112HKXE2
140HKXE2B
140HKXE2
FDUMJ36HKXE2
FDEJ36HKXE2B
45HKXE2
45HKXE2B
56HKXE2
56HKXE2B
71HKXE2
71HKXE2B
112HKXE2B
90HKXE2
112HKXE2
140HKXE2B
140HKXE2
FDTSJ22HKXE2B
28HKXE2B
36HKXE2B
45HKXE2B
71HKXE2B
FDKJ22HKXE2
28HKXE2
36HKXE2
45HKXE2
56HKXE2
71HKXE2
FDRJ22HKXE2
28HKXE2
45HKXE2
56HKXE2
71HKXE2
90HKXE2
112HKXE2
140HKXE2
FDFLJ28HKXE2
45HKXE2
71HKXE2
FDFUJ28HKXE2
45HKXE2
56HKXE2
71HKXE2
CONTENTS
1. GENERAL INFORMATION ...........................................................................
1.1 Specific features ....................................................................................
1.2 How to read the model name ................................................................
1.3 Table of models ......................................................................................
1.4 Table of indoor units panel (Optional) .................................................
2. SELECTION DATA .......................................................................................
2.1 Specifications ........................................................................................
2.2 Range of usage & limitations ............................................................... 28

2.3 Exterior dimensions ............................................................................. 29
2.4 Exterior appearance ............................................................................. 54
2.5 Inside view ............................................................................................. 57
2.6 Piping system ........................................................................................ 58
2.7 Coolant, Fuel - Intake/Exhaust gas system diagram ......................... 59
2.8 Selection chart ...................................................................................... 61
2.9 Characteristics of fan ........................................................................... 76
2.10 Noise level ............................................................................................. 81
3. ELECTRICAL DATA ..................................................................................... 87
3.1 Electrical wiring ..................................................................................... 87
4. OUTLINE OF OPERATION CONTROL BY MICROCOMPUTER ................ 96
5. APPLICATION DATA .................................................................................... 126
5.1 Installation of indoor unit ...................................................................... 128
5.2 Installation of the remote controller (Optional Parts)......................... 169
5.3 Installation of outdoor unit ................................................................... 171
5.4 Refrigerant piping .................................................................................. 174
5.5 Electrical wiring ..................................................................................... 181
5.6 Test run ................................................................................................... 188
6. MAINTENANCE DATA.................................................................................. 190
6.1 Diagnosis of Microcomputer circuit ..................................................... 190
7. PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ......................................................................... 223
8. REPLACING PROCEDURE OF MAJOR ENGINE PARTS.......................... 229
1. GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1 Specific features
(1) Powerful heating - even in cold regions.
The GHP efficiently recovers exhaust heat from the gas engine to provide powerful heating. It can continue to provide powerful
heating even in cold regions that have below zero temperatures and snow accumulation.
(2) Instant heating comfort.
The highly heat efficient gas engine and the efficient utilization of engine exhaust heat means that heat will be produced quickly
after the unit is turned on and provide fast heating response for warming up chilly mornings.
(3) Can perform continuous heating operations.
Since engine exhaust heat is used for on-going defrosting, it does not have to be performed separately, even in cold regions. Since
there is no stopping for defrosting, there will always be continuous, even heating.
(4) Substantial reduction in energy consumption
The gas engine for the compressor dramatically reduces energy consumption.
(5) Inverter provides both comfort and reduced energy consumption.
A microcomputer controlled inverter system is used to efficiently control the engine speed. Not only does this help to maintain a
comfortable room temperature, the reduced energy loss contributes to lower energy consumption.
(6) Super lynk system
Non polar 2-core signal wires for indoor, outdoor units by means of the automatic polarity selection.
In addition, the max. 48 units can be controlled with a pair of signal wires. The high speed transmission method same as the
computer network system [start up of 48 units can be completed within a few seconds by the determination of operation mode
and the start of operation].
As separate power supplies for the indoor and the outdoor units are employed, a pair of 2 signal wires only are required for the
inter connecting wiring of indoor and outdoor uniits regardless of the number of units so that the installation work can be
simplified, the cost of wiring work can be curtailed and causes of wiring error can be minimized.
(7) Connectable indoor capacity
Capacity from 50% to 130% is possible.
GHCP450 HMTE4
Number of connectable units : 1 to 20 units
Connectable capacity : 22500 ~ 58500 W
GHCP560 HMTE4
Number of connectable units : 1 to 20 units
Connectable capacity : 28000 ~ 72800 W
(8) Long piping design offeres One way piping length of 100 m
Indoor and outdoor units can have a level difference of up to 50 m, with a one way piping length of up to 100 m. This is the top-class
long piping design in the industry. A level difference of as much as 15 m between indoor units ensures that the system can meet a
wide variety of air conditioning requirements in any building.
1-
1.2 How to read the model name

Example:
GHC P
450 H
4
Model No.
Export model
Gas type
Multi series
Heat pump type
Nominal capacity
R407C models
Model name
Indoor unit
: FDT, FDTW, FDTS, FDR, FDUM

FDE, FDK, FDFL, FDFU
Outdoor unit : GHC
1.3 Table of models

Capacity
Model
22
28
36
45
56
71
90
112
Ceiling recessed type

(FDT)
2-way outlet ceiling recessed type
(FDTW)
1-way outlet ceiling recessed type
(FDTS)
Cassetteria type
(FDR)
Stellite ducted type
(FDUM)
Ceiling suspension type
(FDE)
Wall mounted type
(FDK)
Floor standing exposed type
(FDFL)
Floor standing hidden type
(FDFU)
Outdoor units tobe combined
FDC
GHCP450HMTE4
(16 Horse Power)
GHCP560HMTE4
(20 Horse Power)
1.4 Table of indoor units panel (Optional)

Model
FDT
FDTW
(Standard type)
FDTW
(Attachment of ceiling material type)
FDTS
FDR
(Silent type)
FDR
(Canvas duct type)
Parts Model
Capacity:28,36,45,56,
71,90,112,140
Capacity:28,45,56
Capacity:71,90
Capacity:112,140
Capacity:28,45,56
Capacity:71,90
Capacity:112,140
Capacity:22,28,36,45
Capacity:71
Capacity:71,90
Capacity:112,140
Capacity:71,90
Capacity:112,140
2-
T-PSA-32W-E
TW-PSA-22W-E
TW-PSA-32W-E
TW-PSA-42W-E
TW-PSB-28W-E
TW-PSB-38W-E
TW-PSB-48W-E
TS-PSA-26W-E
TS-PSA-36W-E
R-PNLS-26W-E
R-PNLS-36W-E
R-PNLS-46W-E
R-PNLC-26W-E
R-PNLC-36W-E
R-PNLC-46W-E
140
2. SELECTION DATA
2.1 Specifications
(1) Indoor unit
(a) Ceiling recessed type (FDT)
Models FDTJ28HKXE2, 36HKXE2
Models
Item
FDTJ28HKXE2(3)
FDTJ36HKXE2(3)
Nominal cooling capacity*1
2800
3600
Nominal heating capacity*2
3200
4000
Power source
1 Phase 220/240V 50Hz

dB(A)
Noise level
Exterior dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
Net weight
Hi: 36 Me: 34 Lo: 32
mm
Unit:260
840
840
Panel:30
950
950
Unit:24 Panel:7
kg
Refrigerant equipment
Heat exchanger
Louver fine & inner grooved tubing
Refrigerant control
Electronic Expansion Valve +Capillary tube
Air handling equipment

Fan type & Q'ty
Turbo fan 1
Motor
17 1
Starting method
Line starting
Air flow(Standard)
CMM
Hi: 12 Me: 10 Lo: 9
Fresh air intake
Possible
Air filter, Q'ty
Long life filter
Shock & vibration absorber
1(Washable)
Rubber sleeve(for fan motor)
Insulation (noise & heat)
Polyurethane foam
Operation control
Operation switch
Remote control switch (Optional:RCD-HKX-S-E2)
Room temperature control
Thermostat by electronics
Internal thermostat for fan motor.
Frost protection thermostat
Safety equipment
Installation data
Refrigerant piping size
mm(in)
Liquid line: 6.35(1/4"), Gas line: 12.7(1/2")

Flare piping
Connecting method
Connectable with VP25
Drain hose
Necessary (both Liquid & Gas line)
Insulation for piping
Mounting kit
Accessories
Decorative Panel
Optional parts
GHCP450HMTE4, 560HMTE4
Outdoor units to be combined

Notes (1) The data are measured at the following conditions.
Item
Indoor air temperature
Outdoor air temperature
DB
WB
DB
WB
Cooling*1
27
19
35
24
Heating*2
20
Operation
Standards
ISO-T1,JIS B8627
(2) This packaged air-conditioner is manufactured and tested in conformity with the following standard.
ISO-T1"UNITARY AIR-CONDITIONERS"
Decorative Panel model (Optional)
Item
Model
FDTJ28,36 type
Panel Part No.

T-PSA-32W-E
(3) The number "2", following the type of each model, represents"CE-marked model" especially for European Union, and for European nations which
require CE marking.
3-
Models FDTJ45HKXE2, 56HKXE2, 71HKXE2

Models
Item
FDTJ45HKXE2(3)
FDTJ56HKXE2(3)
FDTJ71HKXE2(3)
Nominal cooling capacity*
4500
5600
7100
5000
6300
8000
Power source
1 Phase 220/240V 50Hz

dB(A)
Noise level
Exterior dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
Net weight
Hi: 37 Me: 35 Lo: 34
mm
Unit:260
kg
Hi: 38 Me: 36 Lo: 34
840
840
Panel:30
950
950
Unit:24 Panel:7
Heat exchanger
Refrigerant control

Fan type & Q'ty
Turbo fan
W
20 1
CMM
Hi: 15 Me: 12 Lo: 10
Motor
1
25 1
Starting method
Line starting
Air flow(Standard)
Fresh air intake
Hi: 16 Me: 13 Lo: 11

Possible
Air filter, Q'ty
Long life filter
1(Washable)
Polyurethane foam
Operation control
Operation switch
Safety equipment
Installation data
Liquid line: 6.35(1/4")

Gas line: 12.7(1/2")
mm(in)

Gas line: 15.88(5/8")
Flare piping
Connecting method
Drain hose
Necessary (both Liquid & Gas lines)
Mounting kit
Accessories
Decorative Panel
Optional parts

Item
DB
WB
DB
WB
Cooling*1
27
19
35
24
Heating*2
20
Operation
Standards
ISO-T1,JIS B8627
Item
Model
FDTJ45,56,71 type
Panel Part No.

T-PSA-32W-E
require CE marking.
4-
Models FDTJ90HKXE2, 112HKXE2, 140HKXE2

Models
FDTJ90HKXE2(3)
FDTJ112HKXE2(3)
9000
11200
14000
10000
12500
16000
dB(A)
Hi: 42 Me: 40 Lo: 38
Item
1

Power source
FDTJ140HKXE2(3)
1 Phase 220/240V 50Hz
Noise level
Exterior dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
Net weight
Unit: 260
Panel:30
mm
kg
840
950
Hi: 47 Me:43 Lo: 38
840
950
Unit: 320
Panel:30
Unit:24 Panel:7
Hi: 49 Me: 46 Lo: 43

840
950
Unit:28 Panel:7
Heat exchanger
Louver fins & inner grooved tubing
Refrigerant control

Fan type & Q'ty
Turbo fan
50 1
80 1
CMM
Hi: 21 Me: 15 Lo: 12
Hi: 28 Me: 24 Lo: 21
Starting method
Unit:30 Panel:7
Motor
840
950
130 1
Line starting
Air flow(Standard)
Fresh air intake
Hi: 30 Me: 26 Lo: 22
Possible
Air filter, Q'ty
Long life filter
1(Washable)
Polyurethane foam
Operation control
Operation switch
Safety equipment
Installation data

Gas line: 15.88(5/8")
mm(in)

Gas line: 19.05(3/4")
Flare piping
Connecting method
Drain hose
Mounting kit
Accessories
Decorative Panel
Optional parts

Item
DB
WB
DB
WB
Cooling*1
27
19
35
24
Heating*2
20
Operation
Standards
ISO-T1,JIS B8627
Item
Model
FDTJ90,112,140 type
Panel Part No.

T-PSA-32W-E
require CE marking.
5-
(b) 2-way outlet ceiling recessed type (FDTW)

Models FDTWJ28HKXE2B, 45HKXE2B, 56HKXE2B
Models
Item
FDTWJ28HKXE2B(3)
FDTWJ45HKXE2B(3)
FDTWJ56HKXE2B(3)
2800
4500
5600
3200
5000
6300
Power source
1 Phase 220/240V 50Hz
Noise level
Hi: 39 Me:36 Lo: 33
dB(A)
Exterior dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
Net weight
mm
Unit:280 817 620
kg
Panel:8
1055
680
Unit:19 Panel:7
Heat exchanger
Refrigerant control

Fan type & Q'ty
Turbo fan
Motor
30 1
Starting method
Line starting
Air flow(Standard)
CMM
Hi: 14 Me: 12 Lo: 10
Fresh air intake
Possible
Air filter, Q'ty
Long life filter
2(Washable)
Polyurethane foam
Operation control
Operation switch
Safety equipment
Installation data

Gas line: 12.7(1/2")
mm(in)

Gas line: 15.88(5/8")
Flare piping
Connecting method
Drain hose
Mounting kit
Accessories
Decorative Panel
Optional parts

Item
DB
WB
DB
WB
Cooling*1
27
19
35
24
Heating*2
20
Operation
Standards
ISO-T1,JIS B8627
Item
Model
FDTWJ28,45,56 type
Panel Part No.

Standard type
Attachment of ceiling material type
TW-PSA-22W-E
TW-PSB-28W-E
require CE marking.
6-
Models FDTWJ71HKXE2B, 90HKXE2B

Models
FDTWJ71HKXE2B(3)
Item
FDTWJ90HKXE2B(3)
7100
9000
8000
10000
dB(A)
Hi: 41 Me: 38 Lo: 35
Power source
1 Phase 220/240V 50Hz
Noise level
Exterior dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
Net weight
mm
Hi: 41 Me: 39 Lo: 36
Unit:330
1054
kg
620
Panel:8
1300
680
Unit:26 Panel:9
Heat exchanger
Refrigerant control
Electronic Expansion Valve +Capillay tube

Fan type & Q'ty
Turbo fan 1
Motor
35 1
40 1
Starting method
Line starting
Air flow(Standard)
CMM
Hi: 16 Me: 13 Lo: 11
Hi: 19 Me: 16 Lo: 12
Fresh air intake
Possible
Air filter, Q'ty
Long life filter
2(Washable)
Polyurethane foam
Operation control
Operation switch
Safety equipment
Installation data
Liquid line: 9.52(3/8"),Gas line: 15.88(5/8")
mm(in)
Flare piping
Connecting method
Drain hose
Mounting kit
Accessories
Decorative Panel
Optional parts

Item
DB
WB
DB
WB
Cooling*1
27
19
35
24
Heating*2
20
Operation
Standards
ISO-T1,JIS B8627
Item
Model
FDTWJ71,90 type
Panel Part No.

Standard type
TW-PSA-32W-E
TW-PSB-38W-E
require CE marking.
7-

Models
FDTWJ112HKXE2B(3)
Item
FDTWJ140HKXE2B(3)
11200
14000
12500
16000
dB(A)
Hi: 44 Me: 41 Lo: 38
Power source
1 Phase 220/240V 50Hz
Noise level
Exterior dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
Net weight
mm
Hi: 45 Me: 42 Lo: 39
Unit:345
1524
kg
620
Panel:8
1770
Heat exchanger
Refrigerant control

Fan type & Q'ty
Turbo fan
Motor
680
Unit:38 Panel:11
40
50
Starting method
Line starting
Air flow(Standard)
Hi: 28 Me: 25 Lo: 23
CMM
Hi: 32 Me: 28 Lo: 24
Fresh air intake
Possible
Air filter, Q'ty
Long life filter
2(Washable)
Polyurethane foam
Operation control
Operation switch
Safety equipment
Installation data
mm(in)
Flare piping
Connecting method
Drain hose
Necessary (both Liquid & Gas linse)
Mounting kit
Accessories
Decorative Panel
Optional parts

Item
DB
WB
DB
WB
Cooling*1
27
19
35
24
Heating*2
20
Operation
Standards
ISO-T1,JIS B8627
Item
Model
FDTWJ112,140 type
Panel Part No.

Standard type
TW-PSA-42W-E
TW-PSB-48W-E
require CE marking.
8-
(c) 1-way outlet ceiling recessed type (FDTS)

Models FDTSJ22HKXE2B, 28HKXE2B, 36HKXE2B
Model
Item
FDTSJ22HKXE2B(3)
FDTSJ28HKXE2B(3)
FDTSJ36HKXE2B(3)
2200
2800
3600
2500
3200
4000
dB(A)
Hi: 39 Lo: 38
Power source
1 Phase 220/240V 50Hz
Noise level
Exterior dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
mm
Net weight
Kg
Hi: 40 Me: 39 Lo: 38

Unit:194
1040
650
Panel:10
1290
Unit:26 Panel:6
Heat exchanger
Refrigerant control

Fan type & Q'ty
Centrifugal fan
Motor
770
35
Starting method
Line starting
Air flow(Standard)
Hi: 11 Lo: 8
CMM
Hi: 12 Me: 11 Lo: 10
Fresh air intake
Possible
Air filter, Q'ty
Long life filter
1(Washable)
Polyurethane foam
Operation control
Operation switch
Safety equipment
Installation data
mm(in)
Flare piping
Connecting method
Drain hose
Mounting kit
Accessories
Decorative Panel
Optional parts

Item
DB
WB
DB
WB
Cooling*1
27
19
35
24
Heating*2
20
Operation
Standards
ISO-T1,JIS B8627
Item
Model
FDTSJ22,28,36 type
Panel Part No.

With Auto Swing
TS-PSA-26W-E
(3) The number "2", following the type of each model, represents"CE-marked model" especially for European Union, and for Europern nations which
require CE marking.
9-
Models FDTSJ45HKXE2B, 71HKXE2B

Model
FDTSJ45HKXE2B(3)
Item
FDTSJ71HKXE2B(3)
4500
7100
5000
8000
dB(A)
Hi: 43 Me: 40 Lo: 38
Power source
1 Phase 220/240V 50Hz
Noise level
Exterior dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
Net weight
Unit:194
Panel:10
mm
kg
1040
1290
Hi: 44 Me: 40 Lo: 38

Unit:194
Panel:10
650
770
Unit:26 Panel:6
650
790
Unit:30 Panel:7
Heat exchanger
Refrigerant control

Fan type & Q'ty
1300
1500
Centrifugal fan 2
Centrifugal fan 4
40 1
25 2
CMM
Hi: 14 Me: 12 Lo: 10
Motor
Starting method
Line starting
Air flow(Standard)
Hi: 18 Me: 15 Lo: 12
Fresh air intake
Possible
Air filter, Q'ty
Long life filter
1(Washable)
Polyurethane foam
Operation control
Operation switch
Safety equipment
Installation data

Gas line: 12.7(1/2")
mm(in)

Gas line: 15.88(5/8")
Flare piping
Connecting method
Drain hose
Mounting kit
Accessories
Decorative Panel
Optional parts

Item
DB
WB
DB
WB
Cooling*1
27
19
35
24
Heating*2
20
Operation
Standards
ISO-T1,JIS B8627
Item
Panel Part No.

With Auto Swing
Model
FDTSJ45 type
TS-PSA-26W-E
FDTSJ71 type
TS-PSA-36W-E
require CE marking.
10 -
(d) Cassetteria type (FDR)

Models FDRJ22HKXE2, 28HKXE2
Models
FDRJ22HKXE2(4)
Item
Air inlet panel
Panel model (Option)
FDRJ28HKXE2(4)
Silent panel
Canvas panel
Silent panel
Canvas panel
R-PNLS-26W-E
R-PNLC-26W-E
R-PNLS-26W-E
R-PNLC-26W-E
2200
2800
2500
3200
Power source
1 Phase 220/240V 50Hz
Noise level
Exterior dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
Net weight
dB(A)
Hi: 41 Me: 39 Lo: 36
Hi: 42 Me: 40 Lo: 37
Hi: 42 Me: 40 Lo: 37
Hi: 43 Me: 41 Lo: 38
mm
Unit:355 750 635

Panel:10 1040 750
Unit:(299+a) 750 635

Panel:10 864 585
Unit:355 750 635

Panel:10 1040 750
Unit:(299+a) 750 635

Panel:10 864 585
kg
Unit:30
Panel:7
Unit:30
Panel:5
Unit:30
Panel:7
Unit:30
Panel:5
Heat exchanger
Refrigerant control

Fan type & Q'ty
Centrifugal fan
Motor
40 1
50 1
Starting method
Line starting
Air flow(Standard)
CMM
Hi: 10 Me: 9 Lo: 8
Pa
(mmAq)
Available static pressure

( at Me)
Hi: 12 Me: 11 Lo: 10
Standard:45(4.5), Hi speed:85(8.5)
Fresh air intake
Side or back
Air filter Q'ty
Long life filter
1(Washable)
Polyurethane foam
Operation control
Operation switch
Remote control switch (Optional:RCD-HKX-E2)
Safety equipment
Installation data
mm(in)
Flare piping
Connecting method
Drain hose
Mounting kit
Accessories
Silent panel, Canvas panel, Canvas duct
Optional parts

Notes (1)The data are measured at the following conditions.
Item
DB
WB
DB
WB
Cooling*
27
19
35
24
Heating*2
20
Operation
Standards
ISO-T1,JIS B8627
(2)This packaged air-conditioner is manufactured and tested in conformity with the following standard.
(3)Canvas panel is used in combination with following canvas duct
Canvas duct: HA01503
(4)The number "2",following the type of each model,represents"CE-marked model"especially for European Union, and for European nations which
require CE marking.
(5)Indoor unit height of canvas specification type is higher than the other type for canvas duct portion.
11 -

Models
FDRJ45HKXE2(4)
Item
Air inlet panel
FDRJ56HKXE2(4)
Silent panel
Canvas panel
Silent panel
Canvas panel
R-PNLS-26W-E
R-PNLC-26W-E
R-PNLS-26W-E
R-PNLC-26W-E
4500
5600
5000
6300
Power source
1 Phase 220/240V 50Hz
Noise level
Exterior dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
Net weight
dB(A)
Hi: 43 Me: 40 Lo: 37
Hi: 44 Me: 41 Lo: 38
Hi:43 Me: 40 Lo: 37
Hi: 44 Me: 41 Lo: 38
mm
Unit:355 750 635

Panel:10 1040 750
Unit:(299+a) 750 635

Panel:10 864 585
Unit:355 750 635

Panel:10 1040 750
Unit:(299+a) 750 635

Panel:10 864 585
kg
Unit:30
Panel:7
Unit:30
Panel:5
Unit:30
Panel:7
Unit:30
Panel:5
Heat exchanger
Refrigerant control

Fan type & Q'ty
Centrifugal fan
Motor
55 1
Starting method
Line starting
Air flow(Standard)
( at Me)
CMM
Hi: 14 Me: 12 Lo: 11
Pa
(mmAq)
Fresh air intake
Side or back
Air filter Q'ty
Long life filter
1(Washable)
Polyurethane foam
Operation control
Operation switch
Safety equipment
Installation data

Gas line: 15.88(5/8")

Gas line: 12.7(1/2")
mm(in)
Flare piping
Connecting method
Drain hose
Mounting kit
Accessories
Optional parts

Item
DB
WB
DB
WB
Cooling*1
27
19
35
24
20
Operation
Heating*
Standards
ISO-T1,JIS B8627
(4)The number "2",following the type of each model,represents"CE-marked model"especially for European Union, and for Europearn nations which
require CE marking.
12 -

Models
FDRJ71HKXE2(4)
Item
Air inlet panel
FDRJ90HKXE2(4)
Silent panel
Canvas panel
Silent panel
Canvas panel
R-PNLS-36W-E
R-PNLC-36W-E
R-PNLS-36W-E
R-PNLC-36W-E
7100
9000
8000
10000
Power source
1 Phase 220/240V 50Hz
Noise level
Exterior dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
Net weight
dB(A)
Hi: 43 Me: 40 Lo: 37
Hi: 44 Me: 41 Lo: 38
Hi: 44 Me: 40 Lo: 37
Hi: 44 Me: 41 Lo: 38
mm
Unit:355 950 635

Panel:10 1240 750
Unit:(299+a) 950 635

Panel:10 1064 585
Unit:355 950 635

Panel:10 1240 750
Unit:(299+a) 950 635

Panel:10 1064 585
kg
Unit:35
Panel:8
Unit:35
Panel:6
Unit:35
Panel:8
Unit:35
Panel:6
Heat exchanger
Refrigerant control

Fan type & Q'ty
Centrifugal fan
Motor
2
100 1
90 1
Starting method
Line starting
Air flow(Standard)
Hi: 18 Me: 16 Lo: 14
CMM
Pa
(mmAp)

( at Me)
Hi: 20 Me: 18 Lo: 15
Fresh air intake
Side or back
Air filter Q'ty
Long life filter
1(Washable)
Polyurethane foam
Operation control
Operation switch
Safety equipment
Installation data
mm(in)

Flare piping
Connecting method
Drain hose
Mounting kit
Accessories
Optional parts

Item
DB
WB
DB
WB
Cooling*1
27
19
35
24
20
Operation
Heating*
Standards
ISO-T1,JIS B8627
require CE marking.
13 -

Models
FDRJ112HKXE2(4)
Item
Air inlet panel
FDRJ140HKXE2(4)
Silent panel
Canvas panel
Silent panel
Canvas panel
R-PNLS-46W-E
R-PNLC-46W-E
R-PNLS-46W-E
R-PNLC-46W-E
11200
14000
12500
16000
Power source
1 Phase 220/240V 50Hz
Noise level
Exterior dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
Net weight
dB(A)
Hi: 45 Me: 42 Lo: 38
Hi: 46 Me: 43 Lo: 39
Hi: 46 Me: 43 Lo: 39
Hi: 47 Me: 44 Lo: 40
mm
Unit:406 1370 635

Panel:10 1660 750
Unit:(350+a) 1370 635

Panel:10 1484 585
Unit:406 1370 635

Panel:10 1660 750
Unit:(350+a) 1370 635

Panel:10 1484 585
kg
Unit:50
Panel:9
Unit:50
Panel:7
Unit:52
Panel:9
Unit:52
Panel:7
Heat exchanger
Refrigerant control

Fan type & Q'ty
Centrifugal fan
Motor
45 1,
90 1
50 1,
Starting method
100 1
Line starting
Air flow(Standard)
Hi: 28 Me: 25 Lo: 22
CMM
Pa
(mmAq)

( at Me)
Hi: 34 Me: 31 Lo: 27
Fresh air intake
Side or back
Air filter Q'ty
Long life filter
2(Washable)
Polyurethane foam
Operation control
Operation switch
Safety equipment
Installation data
mm(in)

Flare piping
Connecting method
Drain hose
Mounting kit
Accessories
Optional parts

Item
DB
WB
DB
WB
Cooling*1
27
19
35
24
20
Operation
Heating*
Standards
ISO-T1,JIS B8627
require CE marking.
14 -
(e) Satellite ducted type (FDUM)

Models FDUMJ36HKXE2, 45HKXE2
Models
FDUMJ36HKXE2(3)
Item
FDUMJ45HKXE2(3)
3600
4500
4000
5000
dB(A)
Hi: 34 Me: 32 Lo: 29
Power source
1 Phase 220/240V 50Hz
Noise level
Exterior dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
Net weight
Hi: 35 Me: 32 Lo: 29
mm
299
kg
750
635
34
Heat exchanger
Refrigerant control

Fan type & Q'ty
Centrifugal fan
Motor
50 1
55 1
Starting method
Line starting
Air flow(Standard)
CMM
Hi: 12 Me: 11 Lo: 10
Pa
(mmAq)

( at Me)
Hi: 14 Me: 12 Lo: 11
Standard:50(5), Hi speed:85(8.5)
Fresh air intake
Side
_
Air filter, Q'ty

Polyurethane foam
Operation control
Operation switch
Safety equipment
Installation data
mm(in)
Flare piping
Connecting method
Drain hose
Mounting kit
_
Accessories
Optional parts

Item
DB
WB
DB
WB
Cooling*1
27
19
35
24
Heating*2
20
Operation
Standards
ISO-T1,JIS B8627
require CE marking.
15 -
Models FDUMJ56HKXE2, 71HKXE2, 90HKXE2

Models
Item
FDUMJ56HKXE2(3)
FDUMJ71HKXE2(3)
FDUMJ90HKXE2(3)
5600
7100
9000
6300
8000
10000
dB(A)
Hi: 35 Me: 32 Lo: 29
Power source
1 Phase 220/240V 50Hz
Noise level
Exterior dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
Net weight
mm
299
750
kg
Hi: 35 Me: 32 Lo: 29
635
299
34
Hi: 36 Me: 33 Lo: 30

950
Heat exchanger
Refrigerant control

Fan type & Q'ty
Centrifugal fan
Motor
635
40
90 1
55 1
Starting method
100 1
Line starting
Air flow(Standard)
CMM

( at Me)
Hi: 14 Me: 12 Lo: 11
Pa
(mmAq)
Hi: 18 Me: 16 Lo: 14
Hi: 20 Me: 18 Lo: 15
Fresh air intake
Side
_
Air filter, Q'ty

Polyurethane foam
Operation control
Operation switch
Safety equipment
Installation data
mm(in)
Flare piping
Connecting method
Drain hose
Mounting kit
_
Accessories
Optional parts

Item
DB
WB
DB
WB
Cooling*1
27
19
35
24
Heating*2
20
Operation
Standards
ISO-T1,JIS B8627
require CE marking.
16 -

Models
Item
FDUMJ112HKXE2(3)
FDUMJ140HKXE2(3)
14000
11200
12500
16000
Power source
1 Phase 220/240V 50Hz

dB(A)
Noise level
Exterior dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
Net weight
Hi: 38 Me: 35 Lo: 32
Hi: 39 Me: 37 Lo: 34
mm
350
kg
1370
635
57
59
Heat exchanger
Refrigerant control

Fan type & Q'ty
Centrifugal fan 3
Motor
45 1,
50 1, 100 1
90 1
Starting method
Line starting
Air flow(Standard)
( at Me)
CMM
Hi: 28 Me: 25 Lo: 22
Hi: 34 Me: 31 Lo: 27
Pa
(mmAq)
Standard:60(6), Hi speed:90(9)
Fresh air intake
Side
_
Air filter, Q'ty

Polyurethane foam
Operation control
Operation switch
Safety equipment
Installation data
mm(in)
Flare piping
Connecting method
Drain hose
Mounting kit
_
Accessories
Optional parts

Item
DB
WB
DB
WB
Cooling*1
27
19
35
24
Heating*2
20
Operation
Standards
ISO-T1,JIS B8627
require CE marking.
17 -
(f) Ceiling suspension type (FDE)

Models FDEJ36HKXE2B, 45HKXE2B
Models
Item
FDEJ36HKXE2B(3)
FDEJ45HKXE2B(3)
4500
3600
4000
5000
Power source
1 Phase 220/240V 50Hz

dB(A)
Noise level
Exterior dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
Net weight
Hi: 43 Me:40 Lo: 38
mm
184
kg
1000
650
22
Heat exchanger
Refrigerant control
Electronic Expansion Valve + Capillary tube

Fan type & Q'ty
Centrifugal fan 2
Motor
40 1
Starting method
Line starting
Air flow(Standard)
CMM
Hi: 14 Me: 12 Lo: 10
Fresh air intake
Not possible
Air filter, Q'ty
Polypropylene net
2(Washable)
Polyurethane foam
Operation control
Operation switch
Safety equipment
Installation data
mm(in)

Flare piping
Connecting method
Drain hose
Mounting kit
_
Accessories
Optional parts

Item
DB
WB
DB
WB
Cooling*1
27
19
35
24
Heating*2
20
Operation
Standards
ISO-T1,JIS B8627
require CE marking.
18 -

Models
FDEJ56HKXE2B(3)
Item
FDEJ71HKXE2B(3)
5600
7100
6300
8000
dB(A)
Hi: 43 Me:40 Lo: 38
Power source
1 Phase 220/240V 50Hz
Noise level
Exterior dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
Net weight
mm
184
kg
1000
Hi: 44 Me:40 Lo: 38
650
184
1260
22
Heat exchanger
Refrigerant control

Fan type & Q'ty
650
27
Centrifugal fan 2
Centrifugal fan 4
40 1
25 2
CMM
Hi: 14 Me: 12 Lo: 10
Motor
Starting method
Line starting
Air flow(Standard)
Fresh air intake
Hi: 18 Me: 15 Lo: 12

Not possible
Air filter, Q'ty
Polypropylene net
2(Washable)
Polyurethane foam
Operation control
Operation switch
Safety equipment
Installation data
mm(in)

Flare piping
Connecting method
Drain hose
Mounting kit
_
Accessories
Optional parts

Item
DB
WB
DB
WB
Cooling*1
27
19
35
24
Heating*2
20
Operation
Standards
ISO-T1,JIS B8627
require CE marking.
19 -

Models
FDEJ112HKXE2B(3)
Item
FDEJ140HKXE2B(3)
11200
14000
12500
16000
dB(A)
Hi: 49 Me:46 Lo: 42
Power source
1 Phase 220/240V 50Hz
Noise level
Exterior dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
Net weight
mm
239
kg
1260
Hi: 50 Me:47 Lo: 42
650
239
1470
Heat exchanger
Refrigerant control

Fan type & Q'ty
650
40
34
Centrifugal fan 3
Centrifugal fan 4
35 1 + 55 1
55 2
CMM
Hi: 28 Me: 25 Lo: 22
Motor
Starting method
Line starting
Air flow(Standard)
Fresh air intake
Hi: 34 Me: 30 Lo: 26

Not possible
Polypropylene net
Air filter, Q'ty

2(Washable)
Polyurethane foam
Operation control
Operation switch
Safety equipment
Installation data
mm(in)

Flare piping
Connecting method
Drain hose
Mounting kit
_
Accessories
Optional parts

Item
DB
WB
DB
WB
Cooling*1
27
19
35
24
Heating*2
20
Operation
Standards
ISO-T1,JIS B8627
require CE marking.
20 -
(g) Wall mounted type (FDK)

Models FDKJ22HKXE2, 28HKXE2, 36HKXE2, 45HKXE2
Models
Item
FDKJ22HKXE2(3)
FDKJ28HKXE2(3)
FDKJ36HKXE2(3)
FDKJ45HKXE2(3)
2200
2800
3600
4500
2500
3200
4000
5000
dB(A)
Hi: 40 Lo: 37
Power source
1 Phase 220/240V 50Hz
Noise level
Exterior dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
Net weight
Hi: 42 Me:40 Lo: 37
mm
375
kg
950
Hi: 44 Me:41 Lo: 37
194
19
Heat exchanger
Refrigerant control

Fan type & Q'ty
Tangential fan 1
Motor
30 1
35 1
Starting method
Line starting
Air flow(Standard)
CMM
Hi: 9 Lo: 8
Hi: 10 Me: 9 Lo: 8
Fresh air intake
Hi: 11.5 Me: 10 Lo: 8
Not possible
Air filter, Q'ty
Polypropylene net
2(Washable)
Polyurethane foam
Operation control
Operation switch
Safety equipment
Installation data
mm(in)

Flare piping
Connecting method
Connectable with I.D. 16mm
Drain hose
Mounting kit
Accessories
Optional parts

Item
DB
WB
DB
WB
Cooling*1
27
19
35
24
Heating*2
20
Operation
Standards
ISO-T1,JIS B8627
require CE marking.
21 -
Models FDKJ56HKXE2, 71HKXE2

Model
Item
FDKJ56HKXE2(3)
FDKJ71HKXE2(3)
7100
5600
6300
8000
Power source
1 Phase 220/240V 50Hz

dB(A)
Noise level
Exterior dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
Net weight
Hi: 46 Me:43 Lo: 39
mm
375 1148
kg
Hi: 47 Me:44 Lo: 40
194
375
Refrigerant control

Fan type & Q'ty
Tangential fan 1
W
194
22
Heat exchanger
Motor
1436
20
Tangential fan 2
40 1
45 1
Starting method
Line starting
Air flow(Standard)
CMM
Hi: 17 Me: 15 Lo: 13
Fresh air intake
Hi: 21 Me: 18 Lo: 15

Not possible
Air filter, Q'ty
Polypropylene net
2(Washable)
Polyurethane foam
Operation control
Operation switch
Safety equipment
Installation data
mm(in)

Flare piping
Connecting method
Connectable with I.D. 16mm
Drain hose
Mounting kit
_
Accessories
Optional parts

Item
DB
WB
DB
WB
Cooling*1
27
19
35
24
Heating*2
20
Operation
Standards
ISO-T1,JIS B8627
require CE marking.
22 -
(h) Floor standing exposed type (FDFL)

Models FDFLJ28HKXE2, 45HKXE2, 71HKXE2
Model
Item
FDFLJ28HKXE2(3)
FDFLJ45HKXE2(3)
FDFLJ71HKXE2(3)
2800
4500
7100
3200
5000
8000
dB(A)
Hi: 41 Me:38 Lo: 36
Power source
1 Phase 220/240V 50Hz
Noise level
Exterior dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
Net weight
mm
630
kg
Hi: 43 Me:41 Lo: 40

1196
225
630
1481
225
40
32
Heat exchanger
Refrigerant control

Fan type & Q'ty
Centrifugal fan 2
Motor
30 1
40 1
Starting method
Line starting
Air flow(Standard)
CMM
Hi: 12 Me: 11 Lo: 10
Hi: 14 Me: 12 Lo: 10
Fresh air intake
Hi: 18 Me: 15 Lo: 12
Not possible
Air filter, Q'ty
Polypropylene net
2(Washable)
Polyurethane foam
Operation control
Operation switch
Remote control switch (Optional:RCD-HKXFL-E2)
Safety equipment
Installation data

Gas line: 12.7(1/2")
mm(in)

Gas line: 15.88(5/8")
Flare piping
Connecting method
Drain hose
Mounting kit
_
Accessories
Optional parts

Item
DB
WB
DB
WB
Cooling*1
27
19
35
24
Heating*2
20
Operation
Standards
ISO-T1,JIS B8627
require CE marking.
23 -
(i) Floor standing hidden type (FDFU)

Models FDFUJ28HKXE2, 45HKXE2, 56HKXE2, 71HKXE2
Model
Item
FDFUJ28HKXE2(3)
FDFUJ45HKXE2(3)
FDFUJ56HKXE2(3)
FDFUJ71HKXE2(3)
2800
4500
5600
7100
3200
5000
6300
8000
dB(A)
Hi: 41 Me:38 Lo: 36
Power source
1 Phase 220/240V 50Hz
Noise level
Exterior dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
Net weight
Hi: 43 Me:41 Lo: 40
mm
630
1077
kg
225
630
Refrigerant control

Centrifugal fan
Motor
225
32
25
Heat exchanger

Fan type & Q'ty
1362
30 1
40 1
Starting method
Line starting
Air flow(Standard)
CMM
Hi: 12 Me: 11 Lo: 10
Hi: 14 Me: 12 Lo: 10
Fresh air intake
Hi: 18 Me: 15 Lo: 12
Not possible
Air filter, Q'ty
Polypropylene net
2(Washable)
Polyurethane foam
Operation control
Operation switch
Remote control switch (Optional:RCD-HKXFL-E2)
Safety equipment
Installation data
Liquid line: 6.35(1/4"),

Gas line: 12.7(1/2")
mm(in)

Gas line: 15.88(5/8")
Flare piping
Connecting method
Drain hose
Mounting kit
_
Accessories
Optional parts

Item
DB
WB
DB
WB
Cooling*1
27
19
35
24
Heating*2
20
Operation
Standards
ISO-T1,JIS B8627
require CE marking.
24 -
(2) Outdoor unit

Models GHCP450HMTE4, 560HMTE4
Models
Item
1
GHCP450HMTE4
GHCP560HMTE4
Capacity
45000
56000
53000
67000
Height
Width
(1)
Depth
Net weight
mm
2135
3 Phase, 400V, 50Hz
Inrush current
Cooling
Running
Operation current
(1)
data
Power
consumption
19
2.6
Heating
1.9
Cooling
KW
1.62
Heating
KW
1.18
Cooling : 90 Heating : 90
Power factor
Type
NATURAL GAS
Consumption
Cooling
KW
44.3
Heating
KW
41.5
54.6
51.9
Type
Water-cooled 4-cycle 4-cylinder OHV
Gross displacement
cc
2237
Type
Lubrication
Quantity
Engine
MGO-X oil
r
48
Rated output
KW
12.1
15.0
Speed range
min-1
890~2375
890~2375
Starter
AC/DC variable type DC stator

Vibration resistant rubber
Vibration control
Piping
system
Refrigerant liquid piping
mm
15.88
1.0 (Flare connections)
19.05
1.2 (Flare connections)
Refrigerant gas piping
mm
34.92
1.6 (Brazed connection)
38.1
1.8 (Brazed connection)
Combustion gas piping

Exhaust drain
R1(25A)
mm
Speed range
CompresCompression volume
sor
Refrigerant oil
Outer diameter 18.2 x inner diameter 12.2 (rubber hose)

CR5445HVR
CR5453HVR
min-1
890~2375
890~2375
cc
454
Type
528
1.7 (Compressor) + 2.1 (Accumulator) (MA32)

Direct-connection flexible coupling
Engine cooling water
Power transmission method
Coolant for GHP (Ethylene glycol)
Type
Quantity
Density
(Freezing temperature)
50
-22
Pump
26
Magnetic coupling over-winding pump (Type: PMD-2543BJU4)
Type
Rated output
0.22
KW
Engine cooling method
Water cooled
Engine room cooling method

Refrigerant
950
920
Power source
Fuel
1750
910
kg
Ventilator fan (Shaft flow fan)
Type
Quantity(3)
R407C
17.5
Kg
18.0
Air intake port
Front surface / Rear surface
Air outlet port
Upper surface
Refrigerant control method
Expansion valve + Capillary tube
Capacity control
Noise level(2)
Engine speed control, Compressor cylinder control

dB
60
61
Propeller fan
Type x No. of units

Air hanRated air flow
dling equipModel (No. of poles)
ment
Motor
Rated output
m3/min
252
315
3-phase inductance motor (6-pole)
KW
0.25
No. of connectable units

Capacity control range
0.45
1 to 20 units (Models 22 to 140)

%
4.8~123
3.9~121
Notes (1) Cooling and heating performance values and fuel consumption values are based on ISO-T1 rating conditions.
(2) Noise level was measured at a point 1 meter in front of the unit at a height of 1.5 meters. (Anechoic chamber calculation).
(3) The additional charge is not included for the piping portion and when 9 or more units are connected. Provide additional charge on site.
25 -
(3) Operation chart

(a) Operating characteristic of outdoor unit
Models
Item
Cooling power consumption
(400 V)
GHCP450HMTE4
GHCP560HMTE4
1.62
kW
Heating power consumption

Cooling running current
1.18
2.6
Heating running current

Inrush current (MAX.)
1.9
19
Cooling power factor
90
Heating power factor
90
Note (1) This packaged air-conditioner is manufactured and tested in conformity with the following standard.
ISO-T1 UNITARY AIR-CONDITIONERS
(b) Operating characteristic of indoor unit

FDT Series
(220 V/240 V)
Models
FDT Series
71
90
112
140
Power input (kW)
28
0.09/0.10
0.10/0.12
0.10/0.12
0.11/0.13
0.17/0.20
0.21/0.24
Running current (A)
0.40/0.44
0.45/0.49
0.47/0.50
0.50/0.55
0.75/0.81
0.93/1.02
Item
36
45
56
FDTW Series
(220 V/240 V)
Models
Item
FDTW Series
28
Power input (kW)
45
56
0.09/0.10
Running current (A)
0.43/0.44
0.43/0.43
71
90
112
140
0.10/0.11
0.12/0.13
0.18/0.20
0.20/0.24
0.48/0.50
0.57/0.59
0.86/0.89
0.90/0.98
FDTS Series
(220 V/240 V)
Models
FDTS Series
22
Item
Power input (kW)
Running current (A)
45
71
0.071
0.90/0.11
0.12/0.15
0.33/0.36
0.43/0.46
0.58/0.63
28
36
FDR, FDUM Series
(220 V/240 V)
Models
FDR, FDUM Series

22
28, 36
Power input (kW)
0.09/0.11
0.11/0.13
Running current (A)
0.41/0.46
0.51/0.56
Item
45
56
71
90
112
140
0.14/0.16
0.15/0.17
0.16/0.19
0.24/0.28
0.28/0.32
0.63/0.67
0.68/0.71
0.73/0.79
1.07/1.17
1.28/1.32
FDE Series
(220 V/240 V)
Models
FDE Series
71
112
140
Power input (kW)
0.10/0.11
0.12/0.15
0.20/0.24
0.24/0.29
Running current (A)
0.43/0.46
0.58/0.63
0.90/0.98
1.10/1.20
Item
36
45
56
Notes (1) This packaged air-conditioner is manufactured and tested in conformity with the following standard.
(2) The values shown in the above table are common to both cooling and heating operations.
26 -
FDK, FDFL, FDFU Series
(220 V/240 V)
Models
Item
FDK Series
22
28
36
FDFL, FDFU Series
45
56
71
28
45, 56
71
Power input (kW)
0.05/0.06
0.06/0.07
0.08/0.09
0.09/0.11
0.09/0.10
0.09/0.10
0.09/0.10
Running current (A)
0.26/0.28
0.31/0.33
0.36/0.39
0.41/0.48
0.41/0.42
0.40/0.41
0.40/0.41
Notes (1) This packaged air-conditioner is manufactured and tested in conformity with the following standard.
(2) The values shown in the above table are common to both cooling and heating operations.
27 -
2.2 Range of usage & limitations

System
GHCP450HMTE4
GHCP560HMTE4
Item
Indoor intake air temperature
(Upper, lower limits)
Refer to the selection chart.

(Upper, lower limits)
Indoor units
that can be
used in
combination
1 to 20 units
Number of connected units

Total capacity
22500 to 58500w
Single direction piping lenght
28000 to 72800w
Indoor unit MAX 100m
Outdoor unit to first branching (main piping)
MAX 70m
Piping length after first division
MAX 40m
Difference in
height between
indoor and outdoor
units
When above outdoor unit
MAX 50m
When below outdoor unit
MAX 40m
MAX 15m
Difference in height between indoor units

Indoor unit atmosphere (behind ceiling)
temperrature and humidity
Compressor
stop/start
frequency
Dew point temperature 28
1 cycle time
6 min or more(from stop to stop or from start to start)
Stop time
Power source
voltage
or less, relative humidity 80% or less
3 min or more
Voltage fluctuation
_ 10% of rated voltage

Within +
Voltage drop during start
+ 15% of rated voltage

Within _
Interval unbalance
_ 3% of rated voltage
Within +
Specifications
NATURAL GAS
Combustion: Gas
Pressure change
1.47~2.45kPa
Allowable length of refrigerant piping, Height difference between indoor and outdoor unit
Branch pipe method (using branch pipe)
Outdoor unit
(Max 70m )
Indoor unit
Max 40m
Max 15m
50m
(Outdoor unit is lower : 40m)
(Highest indoor unit)
First branch
Max 40m
(Lowest indoor unit)
Between the outdoor unit and first branch (main piping): Max 70m (actual length)
Between the first branch and each indoor unit : Max 40m (each indoor unit) (actual length)
28 -
2.3 Exterior dimensions

(1) Indoor unit
Models FDTJ28HKXE2, 36HKXE2, 45HKXE2, 56HKXE2, 71HKXE2, 90HKXE2
Unit : mm
Decorative Panel
Holes for
suspension bolts
(M10 to M8 4pcs.)
860~890 (Ceiling hole size)
Fresh air
opening for ducting
780 (Suspension bolts pitch )
950
630
400
Liquid piping
28, 36, 45 type: 6.35(1/4")
56, 71, 90 type: 9.52(3/8")
Gas piping
28, 36, 45 type: 12.7(1/2")
56, 71, 90 type: 15.88(5/8")
267
Drain hose (Accessories)

(Local setting)
332
420
637
422
675 (Suspension bolts pitch)
Exhaust air
opening for ducting
310
Air outlet
Air inlet grille
VIEW A
840
Suspension bolts
Hole for wiring

Control box
260
30
187
137
95
VIEW B
Holes for
tapping screws
6-4.0
Holes for
tapping screws
4-4.0
55
140
25
Space for installation and service
80
VIEW C
1000
42
140
112
100
113
140
160
33
60
Obstacle
VIEW D
29 -
or more
210
45 or more
Lug for
suspension bolts
700 or less
(Max. Drain up)
295~325
Drain
(Connectable with VP25)
1000
or more
Models FDTJ112HKXE2, 140HKXE2
Unit : mm
Decorative Panel
Holes for
suspension bolts
(M10 to M8 4pcs.)
860~890 (Ceiling hole size)
Fresh air
opening for ducting
780 (Suspension bolts pitch )
950
630
400
Liquid piping
9.52(3/8")
267

(Local setting)
332
420
637
422
Exhaust air
opening for ducting
Air outlet
310
Air inlet grille
VIEW A
Gas piping
19.05(3/4")
840
Drain
Lug for
suspension bolts
700 or less
(Max. Drain up)
320
A
Control box
VIEW B
Holes for
tapping screws
6-4.0
Holes for
tapping screws
4-4.0
187
Hole for wiring
30
55
140
25
Obstacle
80
VIEW C
1000
42
140
112
100
113
140
160
33
60
VIEW D
30 -
or more
45 or more
95
137
270
295~325
1000
or more

Models FDTWJ28HKXE2B, 45HKXE2B, 56HKXE2B
Unit : mm
1015 (Ceiling hole size)
90
Air inlet
680
160
360
97
50
160
70
Center of
panel
640
446
Control
box
(Ceiling hole size)
97
417
468
1055
Air outlet
(Suspension bolts pitch)
40
Decorative Panel
Drain hose
(Accessories)
(Local setting)
965
817
460
200
200
130
295~
325
750 or less
280
Hole Hole
364
310
230
Hole Hole
74
20
Holes for
tapping screws
8 4
124
Hole for wiring
20
Drain(VP20)
(Natural drainage)
Exhaust air opening for ducting

(knock out)
310
64
264
91
Suspension bolts
(M10 4 pcs.)
47
Holes of
tapping screws
5 - 4
278
98
95
120
Hole
Suspension
fitting
100
or more
Fresh air opening for ducting

(knock out)
1000or more
169
140
100
130
Liquid piping
28, 45 tipe :
6.35(1/4")
56 type :
9.52(3/8")
148
240
20
Gas piping
28, 45type:
12.7(1/2")
56 type:
15.88(5/8")
Drain(VP25)
(condensate
pump drain)
405
178
240
10
620
207
178
10
20
56
(Max. Drain up)
56
45
227
45
100
or more
Obstruction
VIEW A
31 -
1500
or more
1500
or more

Unit : mm
40
Decorative Panel
Drain hose
(Accesories)
(Local setting)

90
1300
Air outlet
Air inlet
680
160
360
160
97
50
640
70
Center of
panel
446
Control
box
(Ceiling hole size)
97
540
590
45
620
240
200
200
295~
325
310
750 or less
Hole
Liquid piping
9.52(3/8")
Hole for wiring
20
Drain (VP20)
(Natural drainage)

(knock out)
310
Holes of
taping screws
5 4
50
264
100
or more
64
278
Suspension bolts
(M10 4 pcs.)
Hole
1000or more
Holes for
tapping screws
8 4
128
100
or more
Suspension
fitting
Fresh air opening
for ducting
(knock out)
88
95
120
Obstruction
95
240
78
Drain (VP25)
(condensate
pump drain)
230
20
Gas piping
15.88(5/8")
364
330
Hole
20
148
240
10
410
382
100
140
10
219
460
(Max. Drain up)
212
20
66
277
1054
66
45
1210
VIEW A
32 -
1500
or more
1500
or more

310
64
50
110
Suspension
fitting
103
Hole
130
70
50
Fresh air opening

for ducting
(knock out)
97
Center of
panel
Control
box
Holes for
tapping
screws
5-4
Suspension bolts
(M10 4 pcs.)
97
775
264
(Local setting)
446
Suspension bolts pitch)
825
90
95

40
278
Drain hose
(Accessories)
VIEW A
200
345
255
Hole
20
128
(knock out)
78
Holes for
tappingscrews
8-4
20
10 20
620
Gas piping
19.05(3/4")
Drain(VP25)
(condensate
pump drain)
410
364
Liquid piping
9.52(3/8")
310
230
Drain(VP20)
(Natural
drainage)
140
Hole
10
234
240
200
295~
325
100
240
Max. drain up
672
Hole for wiring
160
1770
Air outlet
Air inlet
100
or more
1000or more
680
360
100
or more
160
Obstruction
32
1706
32
Decorative Panel
33 -
292
20
66
240
750 or less
612
163
1524
66
1500
or more
1500
or more
(c) 1-Way outlet ceiling recessed type (FDTS)

Models FDTSJ22HKXE2B, 28HKXE2B, 36HKXE2B, 45HKXE2B
70
35
50
25
383
25
168
Panel center
200
45
250
150
60
285
315
180
435
90

(Local setting)
VIEW A
295~325
235
940
115
194
10
165
100
600 or less
Max. Drain up
70
Suspension bolts
(M104 pcs.)
30
30
205
85
Air outlet
920
245
Fresh air
opening for ducting
(Knock out)
85
125
40
90
290
140
60
50
100
35
Air inlet grille
770
70
45
45
1200
45
70
140
1290
Holes for
tapping screws
(4.0 6 pcs.)
VIEW B
Decorative Panel
30
45
15
650
30
415
275
100 or
more
215
1000 or more
370
Liquid piping
6.35(1/4")
100 or
more
110
Obstacle
155
105
600 (Suspension bolts pitch) 40
555
Holes for tapping screws

(4-6pcs.)
290
70
60

Unit : mm
140
Fresh air
opening for ducting
(Knock out)
Fresh air
opening for ducting
(knock out)
100
50
Fresh air
opening for ducting
(Knock out)
Gas piping
12.7(1/2")
Drain (VP25)
(Condensate pump drain)
Hole for wiring
(35)
VIEW C
34 -
100 or
more
Model FDTSJ71HKXE2B
Unit : mm

675
70
200
60
Drain hose(Accessories)
(Local setting)
295~325
1200
200
165
170
30
10 194
100
600 or less Max. Drain up
Suspension bolts
(M104pcs.)
150
VIEW A
90
100
45
250
140
35
50
25
168
Panel center
30
70
Fresh air
opening for ducting
(Knock out)
Air outlet
1180
210
35
60
100
Air inlet grille
140
50
40
90
85
110
770
70
290
45
70
140
Holes for
tapping screws
(4-6pcs.)
VIEW B
45
1410
45
1500
Decorative Panel
30 45
15 30
650
415
275
100 or
more
110
215
Gas piping
15.88(5/8")
1000 or more
370
Liquid piping
9.52(3/8")
155
105
145
575
Fresh air
opening for ducting
(Knock out)
290
(4-6pcs.)
383
70 600 (Suspension bolts pitch) 40

285
315
25
Fresh air
opening for ducting
(knock out)
70
Fresh air
opening for ducting
45
(knock out)
100
50
100 or
more
Obstacle
Drain (VP25)
(Condensate pump drain)
Hole for wiring
(35)
VIEW C
35 -
100 or
more
(d)
Cassetteria type (FDR)
Model FDRJ22HKXE2
Silent Panel (Model: R-PNLS-26W-E)
Unit : mm

433
353
71
45
Panel center
70
465
405
213
MIN95
40
MIN156
MIN81
650 or less
MIN320
480
A
Drain(VP25)
(Natural drainage)
460
Holes for
tapping screws
4-4.0
150
1040
45
170
950
Air inlet
170
45
75
149
90
Fresh air
opening for ducting
(Knock out)
Air inlet
50 or more
Obstacle
VIEW A
36 -
75
100 or
more
45
1000
or more
750
510
Exhaust air
opening for ducting
(Knock out)
VIEW B
100 or
more
Hole for
wiring
(35)
250
45
205
635
510
355~369
00
MIN225
80
MIN206
295~325
405
VIEW C
Liquid piping
6.35(1/4")
Max. Drain up
Gas piping
12.7(1/2")
345
405
Drain
Supply air duct
750
150
59
690(Ceiling hole size)
45
545(Suspension bolts pitch)
275
69
Control box
Suspension bolts
(M104pcs.)
Fresh air
opening for ducting
(Knock out)
284
270

(Local setting)
137
75
57
Model FDRJ22HKXE2
Canvas Panel (Model: R-PNLC -26W-E)
9

353
433
45
150
193
69
Drain
(Connectable
with VP25)
Liquid piping
6.35(1/4")
Gas piping
12.7(1/2")
Control box
Panel center
352
45
545 (Suspension bolt pitch) 70
Fresh air opening

for ducting
(Knock out)
284
69
90

(Load setting)
Unit : mm
405
59
VIEW C
71
Supply air duct
Max. Drain up
Drain (VP20)
(Natural drainage)
Canvas duct
(Optional parts)
480
465
260
149
199
40
405
274
35
130
345
510
299
405
635
150~300
295~325
750
600 or less
Suspension bolts
(M104pcs.)
80
Hole for
wiring
(35)
250
460
213
150
Holes for
tapping screws
864
170
170
(Knock out)
Air inlet
45
75
774
45
45
205
90
345

(Knock out)
Air inlet
100
or more
1000 or more
100
or more
VIEW A
50
or more
Obstacle
37 -
75
45
VIEW B
585
149
Models FDRJ28HKXE2, 45HKXE2, 56HKXE2

Unit : mm

786 (Suspension bols pitch)
137
Fresh air
opening for ducting
(Knock out)
(Local setting)
353
284
45
Supply air duct
405
75
panel center
150
59
71
45
545 (Suspension bolt pitch)
275
Control box
VIEW C
Drain
Gas piping
28, 45 type: 12.7 (1/2")
56 type: 15.88 (5/8")
Liquid piping
28, 45 type: 6.35 (1/4")
56 type: 9.52 (3/8")
635
A
Drain (VP20)
(Natural drainage)
205
213
MIN95
40
MIN156
Hole for wiring

(35)
250
460
Holes for
tapping screws
149
405
MIN81
MIN320
20
1040
150
45
45
950
Air inlet
45
170
170
90
Fresh air opening

for ducting
(Knock out)
510

(Knock out)
100 or
more
or more
100 or
more
Air inlet
VIEW A
50 or
more
Obstacle
38 -
45
VIEW B
1000
MIN225
465
MIN206
245
320
480
355~369
185
510
650 or less
295~325
750
Suspension bolts
(M10 4pcs.)
Max. Drain up
80
750
270
70
69
75
433
75
57
Models FDRJ28HKXE2, 45HKXE2, 56HKXE2

Canvas Panel (Model: R-PNLC-26W-E)
Unit : mm

9
284

(Knock out)
45
Control box
150
193
69
Drain
Panel center
Liquid piping
28, 45 type: 6.35 (1/4")
56 type: 9.52 (3/8")
Gas piping
28, 45 type: 12.7 (1/2")
56 type: 15.88 (5/8")
352

90
(Local setting)
353
45
545 (Suspension bole pitch) 70
433
59
Supply air duct
405
VIEW C
71
149
40
405
260
35
465
199
245
130
320
480
274
185
635
510
299
295~325
750
600 or less
Suspension bolts
(M10 4pcs.)
Max. Drain up
80
00
A
205
Hole for
wiring
(35)
150~
300
Canvas duct
(Optional parts)
Drain (VP20)
(Natural drainage)
250
460
213

4-4.0
864
75
Air inlet
170
45
75
774
45
45
45
150
149
170
Fresh air
opening for ducting
(Knock out)
345

(Knock out)
VIEW B
more
1000
100 or
or more
100 or
more
Air inlet
VIEW A
50 or
more
Obstacle
39 -
585
90
Unit : mm

533

(Local setting)
137
453

(Knock out)
45
Panel center
71
Drain
Drain (VP20)
(Natural drainage)
MIN95
MIN320
Hole
for wiring
(35)
250
460
213
205
Holes for
tapping screws
(4-4.0)
1240
150
149
1150
45
45
Air inlet
170
170
Fresh air opening

for ducting
(Knock out)
45
90
VIEW B
or more
1000 or
100
more
100 or
more
Air inlet
50 or
more
Obstacle
VIEW A
40 -
45
750
510

(Knock out)
75
MIN225
405
40
20
465
MIN156
215
480
MIN81
285
635
510
355~369
285
80
MIN206
295~325
950
165
Liquid piping
9.52(3/8")
Max. Drain up
Gas piping
15.88(5/8")
Suspension bolts
(M104pcs.)
500
VIEW C
650 or less
Supply air duct
150
45
59
75
275
270
Control box
69
70
284
75
57
Unit : mm
(Local setting)
1004 (Ceilinghole hole size)

453
Drain
(Connectable
with VP25)
Control box
Liquid piping
9.52(3/8")
59
71
Supply air duct
950
510
480
465
405
215
260
35
40
285
635
80
149
285
295~325
130
165
VIEW C
199
Suspension bolts
(M10 4pcs.)
500
Gas piping
15.88(5/8")
274
352
Panel center
299
193
69
150
45

(Knock out)
284
Max. Drain up
90
45 545 (Suspension bolts pitch)
70
533
600 or less
Drain (VP20)
(Natural drainage)
Canvas duct
(Optional Parts)
150~300
20
Hole
for wiring
(35)
250
460
1064
45
Holes of tapping screws

(4-4)
974
Air inlet
45
170
90
Air inlet
VIEW B
VIEW A
or more
100
or more
1000
100
or more
50
or more
Obstacle
41 -
75

(Knock out)
45

(Knock out)
345
170
585
150
149
75
213
45
205
Unit : mm
663
270
58
45
Panerl center
Supply air duct
70
Liquid piping
9.52(3/8")
320
320
295~325
320
80
235
510
480
465
405
20
MIN 96
MIN206
MIN156
Drain (VP20)
(Natural drainage)
MIN81
406~420
650 or less
MIN320
MIN276
635
40
175
VIEW C
(Max. Drain up)
1370
495
Drain
76
Gas piping
19.05(3/4")
Suspension bolts
(M10 4pcs.)
Fresh air
opening for ducting
(Knock out)
150
Control box
69
45
287
75
275
545
743
57

(Local setting)
137
Hole
for wiring
(I.D.35)
155
460
1660
Air inlet
45
75
1570
45

4-4
150
149
45
45
213
75
205
170
510
750
170
Fresh air opening

for ducting
(Knock out)
90
Exhaust air opening for dacting
(Knock out)
VIEW B
Air inlet
100
or more
1000
or more
100
or more
VIEW A
50
or more
Obstacle
42 -
Unit : mm
743
663
150
Drain
(Connecteble with VP25)
495
Liquid piping
9.52(3/8")
59
71
1370
235
465
405
86
250
200
295~325
325
320
510
350
320
635
480
600 or less
320
130
175
80
Max. Drain up
Supply air duct
VIEW C
Gas piping
19.05(3/4")
310
352
Panel center
40
70
45
69
Control box
Suspension bolts
(M10 4pcs.)

(Knock out)
284
193

(Local setting)
45
90
20
Hole
for wiring
(35)
150~300
Canvas duct
(Optional parts)
A
205
155
Drain (VP20)
(Natural drainage)
213

(4-4)
150
149
460
1484
1394
45
45
45
Air inlet
170
170
Fresh air opening
for ducting
(Knock out)
75
1000
100
or more
or more
345
VIEW A
100
or more
50
or more
Obstacle
43 -
75
Air inlet
45
VIEW B
585
90

(Knock out)

Models FDUMJ36HKXE2, 45HKXE2, 56HKXE2
Unit : mm

750
18
80
205
Hole of
tapping screws
(4-4)

(Local setting)
Drain
284
213
149
Control box
170
Liquid piping
36, 45 type: 6.35(1/4")
56 type: 9.52(3/8")
118
472
45
18
59
Fresh air opening

for ducting
(Knock out)
Gas piping
36, 45 type: 12.7(1/2")
56 type: 15.88(5/8")
71
Supply air duct
170
90

(Knock out)
295~325
750
185
Max.Drain up
VIEW A
320
245
Suspension bolts
(M104pcs.)
80
30
635
510
480
465
20
40
149
199
274
299
600 or less
35
130
405
460
Drain (VP20)
(Natural drainage)
45
50
45
660
200
200
Hole for wiring
200
50
170
620

(12-4)
Return air duct
VIEW B
44 -
1100
100
35
59
630
200
35
Inspection space
Unit : mm
950
18
472
(Suspension bolts pitch) 45
18
80
205

(Local setting)
Drain
170
Liquid piping
9.52(3/8")
Fresh air opening
Gas piping
for ducting
15.88(5/8")
(Knock out)
284
118
59
71
213
Holes of
tapping screws
4-4
149
Control box
170
90
(Knock out)
Supply air duct
VIEW A
295~325
80
635
510
480
465
405
40
30
149
35
130
Suspension bolts
(M104pcs.)
199
215
299
274
285
Max.Drain up
285
600 or less
950
165
20
460
Drain (VP20)
(Natural drainage)
860
45
4200=800
45
50
1300
35
620
830
200
170
59
35
50
Hole for wiring
Return air duct
100
VIEW B
45 -
Inspection
space
Unit : mm
1370
18
205
80
Holes of
tapping screws
(4-4)
213
149
Control box
(Local setting)
Drain
284
Liquid piping
9.52(3/8")
58
Supply air duct
320
320
295~325
235
170
Fresh air opening
for ducting
(Knock out)

(Knock out)
635
80
30
510
480
465
405
200
250
325
350
20
600 or less
86
130
40
Suspension
bolts
(M104pcs.)
90
VIEW A
Max.Drain up
1370
320
170
Gas piping
19.05(3/4")
76
175
150
472
118 (Suspension bolts pitch) 45
18
460
Drain (VP20)
(Natural drainage)
1280
45
6200=1200
60
1250
620
1720
210
35

(18-4)
Return air duct
100
240
70
35
45
60
Holes for wiring
VIEW B
46 -
Inspection
space
(f)
Ceiling suspension type (FDE)
Models FDEJ36HKXE2B, 45HKXE2B, 56HKXE2B

Unit : mm
15
15
Holes for suspension bolts

(M8 to M10 4 pcs. Not included)
The brackets face out

When the unit is half
recesed a bove
the ceiling
195
275
135
46
94
191
150
50
184
50
The brackets face interior

When the unit is
suspended beneath
the ceiling
Liquid piping
Gas piping
605
45
940
30
650
30
185
1000
Air outlet
Drain hole
connection (1)
225
248
10
290
Drain hole
connection
46
Note (1) The slope of drain piping inside the unit is

Liquid piping
able to take incline of 10 mm
36, 45 type: 6.35 (1/4")
56 type: 9.52 (3/8")
Drain piping
connection
Air inlet grille

30
55
35
Gas piping
36, 45 type: 12.7(1/2")
56 type: 15.88(5/8")
100
or more
300
30
or more
20
150
or more
or more
Obstacles
Model FDEJ71HKXE2B
15
15

recesed a bove
the ceiling

(M8 to M10 4 pcs. Not included)
Liquid piping
605
135
Gas piping
275
45
195
50
46
94
184
150

When the unit is
suspended beneath
the ceiling
191
50
650
30
1200
30
185
1260
Drain hole
connection (1)
225
Air outlet
Air inlet grille
248
290
35
55
30
Gas piping
15.88(5/8")
100
or more
300
20
30
150
or more
Obstacles
47 -
Drain piping
connection
or more
Drain hole
connection
10
Liquid piping
9.52 (3/8")
46

or more
Model FDEJ112HKXE2B
Unit : mm
15
15

(M8 to M10 4pcs. Not included)

recesed a bove
the ceiling
66
50
1200
30
Liguid piping
584
275
174
Gas piping
135
94
46
30
246
150

When the unit is
suspended beneath
the ceiling
239
50
1160 (Suspension bolt pitch)
650
1260
Drain hole connection (1)
185
225
Air outlet
266
290
Drain hole
connection
10
Liquid piping
9.52 (3/8")
46
Note (1) The slope of drain hose inside the unit is

Air inlet grille
Drain piping connection

(VP20)

35
55
Gas piping
19.05 (3/4")
30
100
or more
300
30
or more
20
150 or more
5
or more
Obstacles
Model FDEJ140HKXE2B
Unit : mm
15
15

(M8 to M10 4pcs. Not included)
66
1410
1470
30
275
Liquid piping
135
Gas piping
94
246
150

When the unit is
suspended beneath
the ceiling
584
174
50
239
50
650
30
46

recesed a bove
the ceiling
Drain hole connection (1)
185
225
Air outlet
266
290
30
Gas piping
19.05 (3/4")
100
or more
300
55
150 or more
Obstacles
48 -
Drain hose connection

(VP20)
20
35
or more
Drain hole
connection
30
10
Liquid piping
9.52 (3/8")
46

Air inlet grille
5
or more

Models FDKJ22HKXE2, 28HKXE2, 36HKXE2, 45HKXE2
Unit : mm
950
23
387
387
130
23
194
7.7
820
155 77.5
25 25
20 20 25 20 20
77.5
65
155
165
200
Mounting plate
8 48 pcs.
(Holes on
mounting plate)
150
200
or
more
or
more
Available space
for rear connection
45
Hole on wall for

rear connection 55
105
70
or more
155
Detail of mounting plate
Outlet for piping

(On both side)
10 38 50
165
10 64
59
65
710
65
58
90
Outlet for
electric wiring
375
280
Piping cover
Gas piping 12.7 (1/2")
Liquid piping
608 6.35 (1/4")
60 55
Drain hose
0.7 m
712
VIEW A (Rear side)
Model FDKJ56HKXE2
Unit : mm
1148
23
486
486
130
23
7.7
194
65
155
144
200
Mounting plate
8 48 pcs.
(Holes on
mounting plate)
Available space
for rear connection
45
Piping cover
Hole on wall for
rear connection 55 Gas piping 15.88 (5/8")
105
70
Liquid piping
608 9.52 (3/8")
712
260
55
Drain hose
0.7 m
VIEW A (Rear side)
49 -
or more
155
Outlet for piping

(On both side)
65
10 38 50
144
1018
197.5
155
197.5
25 25
20 20 25 20 20
10 64
59
908
65
58
90
Outlet for
electric wiring
375
280
150
200
or
more
or
more
Model FDKJ71HKXE2
23
Unit : mm
1436
486
387
387
130
23
194
4
7.7
Outlet for piping

(On both side)
65
377.5
155
108

Mounting plate
200
10 38 50
377.5
150
200
or
more
or
more
45
8 48 pcs.
(Holes on
mounting
plate)
or more
155
108
1306
155
25 25
20 20 25 20 20
10 64
59
65
1196
65
58
90
Outlet for
electric wiring
375
280
Piping cover
Hole on wall for 55 Gas piping 9.52 (3/8")
rear connection
105
Liquid piping
70
608 15.88(5/8")
550
Drain hose
0.7 m
55
Available space for rear connection
712
VIEW A (Rear side)

Models FDFLJ28HKXE2, 45HKXE2, 71HKXE2
Note (1) Value in (
) indicates 71 type
Unit : mm
205
180
23
600
177
Remote-controller
mounting part
225
150 or more
166
1000 or more
786
(1071)
150 or
more
205
10
126
Slotted hole for

wall mounting
4-1224
Floor piping space
or
more
1196
(1481)
600
or more
Floor
Control box
80
220
184
234
315
630
250
Expansion valve box
Level adjusting screw

(Accessory)
197
223
Drain piping
Flexible tube
PT20A female screw
Air filter
750
(1035)
Gas piping (Accessory)

28,45 type:12.7(1/2")
71 type:15.88(5/8")
98
197
225
32
Floor fixing metal brakcet

(Accessory)
1030 long hole
93
148
223
195
806
(1091)
50 -
195
Liquid piping
28,45 type:6.35(1/4")
71 type:9.52(3/8")

Models FDFUJ28HKXE2, 45HKXE2, 56HKXE2, 71HKXE2
Note (1) Value in (
Unit : mm
) indicates 71 type
Slotted hole for
wall mounting
4-12 x 24
110
167
600
1000
126
166
786
(1071)
45
Peri cover Peri cover
100
600
B
100
100
810(1095)
722(1007)
20
225
105 110
Expansion valve box
Control box
80
220
184
234
315
630
250
Drain piping Flexible tube

PT20A female screw
Air filter
30
197
Level adjusting
screw
(Accessory)
750(1035)
Gas piping (Accessory)

28,45type : 12.7(1/2")
56,71type : 15.88(5/8")
Liquid piping
28,45type : 6.35(1/4")
56,71type : 9.52(3/8")
98
32
Floor fixing metal braket

(Accessory)
10 x 30 long hole
806(1091)
51 -
(2) Remote controller (Optional parts)
Wall
0.3mm2, 3cores (O.D.5.6)
Wire
(Recessed)
LCD display
Electrical box
(Locally Purchased)
120
16
Remote controller mounting dimensions
120
60
46
47
Notes (1) Allowable length of remote controller

cable: 600 m
17
Allowable rang of wire thickness and length
Standard Within 0.3 mm2

0.5 mm2
0.75 mm2
1.25 mm2
2 mm2
120
89
83.5
For the passage

after wiring
Remote controller outline
52 -
Within 100 m
Within 200 m
Within 300 m
Within 400 m
Within 600 m
(3) Outdoor unit

53 -
2.4 Exterior appearance

(1) Indoor unit
Decorative panel
Pearl white
Air outlet
Air inlet
Decorative panel
(i) Standard type
Panel part No.
Type
Panel color
With Auto swing
Pearl white
TW-PSA-22W-E
TW-PSA-32W-E
Applicable model
FDTW28, 45, 56 type
TW-PSA-42W-E
FDTW71, 90 type
FDTW112, 140 type
(ii) Attachment of ceiling material type

Panel part No.
Type
Panel color
TW-PSB-38W-E
Applicable model
FDTW28, 45, 56 type
TW-PSB-28W-E
With Auto swing
Misty white
FDTW71, 90 type
FDTW112, 140 type
TW-PSB-48W-E
54 -
Panel
Ceramic white
Air inlet grille

Ceramic white
Decorative panel
Panel part No.
TS-PSA-26W-E
TS-PSA-36W-E
Type
Panel color
With Auto swing
Ceramic white
Applicable model
FDTS22, 28, 36, 45 type
FDTS71 type

Silent panel type
Canvas-duct panel type
Ceramic white
Ceramic white
(e) Satellite ducted type (FDUM) .......................................... Zinc steel plate

(f)
Ceiling suspension type (FDE)

Gray
(Vertical fins)
Gray
(Frame)
Ceramic white
(Front panel)
Ceramic white
(Air inlet louver)
55 -
Ceramic white
(Side panel)
Ceramic white
(Front panel)
No.
Parts name
Side plate
Front panel
Inlet grill
Outlet grill
Bottom plate
Right and Left

louvers
Color
1
1
Ceramic white
Light gray
Dark gray
(Outlet grill)
Ceramic white
(Body)
Black
(Bottom plate)
(i)
Floor standing hidden type (FDFU) ........................ Zinc steel plate
(2) Outdoor unit

Polar white
56 -
2.5 Inside view

Fan motor
Intake port
Fan
Exhaust port
Exhaust muffler
Air cleaner
Oil filter
Compressor
Starter motor
Water pump
Front view
Right side view
Control unit
Coolant air
bleeder valve
Expansion
valve
Reserve tank
Service valve
(Gas)
4-way
valve
Receiver
Regulator
Gas solenoid
valve
Combustion gas
supply port
Service valve
(Liquid)
Accumulator Oil separator

Engine oil filler port
Oil sub-tank 2
Oil sub-tank 1
Rear view
Left side View
57 -
Accumulator
58 -
Regulator
Engine water circuit
Gas engine
SV4
SV3
SV2
Discharge-pipe thermistor
Capacity control
63H1
Refrigerant circuit
Compressor
Oil separator
Gas plug
Coolingwater
thermistor
Reserve tank
Exhaust-gas
heat exchanger
Cooling-water
pump
HP sensor
Air heat
exchangers
Radiators
SV7
Temperature-type
expansion valve
Constant-pressure
type expansion valve
Four-way valve
Plate-type
heat exchanges
Water heatexchanger
outlet's
refrigerant
thermistor
SV1
SV8
63L
Receiver
Gas connection
port
Gas plug Gas valves
Flow-volume
control valve
Flow-volume
control valve
Cooling cycle
Heating cycle
Service valve
(gas)
Service valve (liquid)
Strainer
Indoor unit
Check valve
Expansion valve
Capillary tube
Detailed drawing of indoor unit section
2.6 Piping system
Accumulator
Accumulator
Dischargepipe thermistor
2.7 Coolant, Fuel Intake/Exhaust gas system diagram

Cooling water: The engine's cooling water returns heat both from the gas engine itself and from the exhaust gas. When
the temperature of this cooling water is higher than the flow-volume control valve's temperature setting,
delivery to the engine is commenced. When the temperature is high, cooling is performed using the
outdoor air which is delivered to the outdoor unit's radiator (integrated with the compressor). The
cooling water which has been cooled in this way is returned once again to the gas engine, where it
repeats the same cycle. Cooling water which has risen to a high temperature during heating operation is
used for refrigerant heating.
Fuel The fuel gas passes through the gas solenoid valve, flows to the gas mixer which is maintained at the
required pressure by the zero governor, and is then supplied to the gas engine.
Intake air and exhaust gas The intake air enters the mixer via the intake air box and the air cleaner, it is mixed with the fuel, and this
mixture enters the engine cylinder. The resulting exhaust gas gives up its heat in the exhaust-gas heat
exchanger and is then discharged via the muffler.
Flow-volume
control valve
Water heatexchanger
outlet's refrigerant
thermistor
Air heat
exchangers
Radiators
Plate-type
heat exchanges
Temperature-type
expansion valve
Constant-pressure
type expansion valve
Flow-volume
control valve
M
Service valve (liquid)

SV7
SV8
Receiver
Reserve tank
SV2
Four-way valve
SV3
HP sensor
SV1
SV4
Service
valve (gas)
63H1
Coolingwater
thermistor
Gas connection
port
Gas
plug
Gas engine
Dischargepipe
thermistor
63L
Capacity control
Compressor
Regulator
Engine water circuit
Refrigerant circuit
59 -
Accumulator
Gas Gas
plug valves
Indoor unit
Accumulator
Exhaust-gas
heat exchanger
Oil
separator
Cooling-water
pump
Intake and Exhaust System Diagram
Gas
engine
Meaning of marks
Mark
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Parts name
Intake-air duct (1)
Intake-air hose
Intake-air chamber
Intake-air duct (2)
Air cleaner
Intake-air hose
Mixer
Mark
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Parts name
Exhaust-gas pipe
Exhaust-gas heat exchanger
Exhaust-gas hose
Muffler
Exhaust-gas hose
Exhaust-gas top
Exhaust-gas drain hose (1)
60 -
Mark
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Parts name
Exhaust-gas drain pipe
Exhaust-gas drain filter
Hose (1)
2.8 Selection chart

(1) Correct the cooling and heating capacity in accordance with the conditions as follows.The net cooling and heating capacity can
be, obtained in the following way.
Indoor unit
Each indoor unit = System performance
Indoor unit capacity

Indoor unit capacity when operating simultaneously.
Outdoor unit
Performance from connected capacity correction coefficient from indoor and outSystem performance = door temperature conditions (correction coefficient from piping distance correction coefficient from mounting height difference between outdoor and indoor units)
Note (1) Refer to page 61 and 62 for the correction coefficient.
(a) Coefficient of cooling and heating capacity in relation to temperatures
Coefficient of cooling &

Heating capacity in
relation to temperature
1.3
1.2
Cooling
1.1
Heating
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
Outdoor air D.B.

temperature
CD.B
20
43
40
35
30
25
20
0
-5
Indoor air D.B.

temperature
CD.B
Cooling operation
Heating operation
Applicable range
0.6
27
25
20
15
10
22
24
26
14
16
Indoor air W.B. temperature (CWB)
18
20
26
24
22
ISO-T1
18.5
-15
-10
-5
10
15
Outdoor air W.B. temperature (CWB) ISO-T1
(b) Correction of cooling and heating capacity in relation to one way length of refrigerant piping.
Equivalent piping length [m] (1)
Cooling
Heating
7.5
1.0
1.0
10
0.995
1.0
15
0.98
1.0
20
0.97
1.0
25
0.955
1.0
30
0.945
1.0
35
0.93
0.995
40
0.92
0.995
45
0.905
0.99
50
0.895
0.99
Equivalent piping length [m]

Cooling
Heating
55
0.88
0.985
60
0.87
0.985
65
0.855
0.98
70
0.845
0.98
75
0.83
0.975
80
0.82
0.975
85
0.805
0.97
90
0.795
0.97
95
0.78
0.965
100
0.77
0.965
Equivalent piping length [m]

Cooling
Heating
105
0.75
0.96
110
0.745
0.96
115
0.73
0.955
120
0.72
0.955
125
0.705
0.95
Note (1) Equivalent piping length can be obtained by calculating as follows.

Equivalent piping length = Real gas piping length + Number of bends in gas piping Equivalent piping length of bends.
Equivalent length of each joint
Gas piping size
12.7
Joint (90elbow)
0.10
Unit : m/one part

15.88
0.10
19.05
0.15
61 -
25.4
0.15
28.58
0.20
31.8
0.25
34.92
0.28
38.1
0.30
(c) When the outdoor unit is located at a lower height than the indoor unit in cooling operation and when
the outdoor unit is located at a higher height than the indoor unit in heating operation, the following
values should be subtracvted from the values in the above table.
Height difference between the indoor unit and
outdoor unit in the vertical height difference
Adjustment coefficient
Height difference between the indoor unit and
outdoor unit in the vertical height difference
Adjustment coefficient
5m
10 m
15 m
20 m
25 m
30 m
0.01
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.06
35 m
40 m
45 m
50 m
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.10
(2) Correction of outdoor unit capacity according to capacity of indoor unit to be operated simultaneously
GHCP450HMTE4
60
55
[Rated capacity] 53.0
50
Heating (MAX)
40
35
Cooling (MAX)
30
Capacity
[kW]
25
20
Heating (MIN)
15
Cooling (MIN)
10
5
22
36
100
200 220
300
400
450
500
(Rating)
Total capacity of indoor units operating simultaneously
62 -
585
80
75
70
65
60
Heating (MAX)
50
45
40
Cooling (MAX)
Capacity
[kW]
35
30
25
Heating (MIN)
20
15
Cooling (MIN)
5
22
36
100
200
280 300
400
500
560 600
700 730
(Rating)
Total capacity of indoor units operating simultaneously
Capacity Correction Calculations (The procedure for both cooling and heating is the same.)
Example Conditions
Unit
Outdoor unit GHCP450HMTE4 1 unit
Indoor unit FDTJ56HKXE2 - 1 unit
FDTJ71HKXE2 - 4 unit
GHTWJ112HKXE2B - 4 unit
Piping length (Shall be common among units) .......... 60 m (suitable length)
Difference in height between indoor and ........... 15 m
outdoor units
(Outdoor unit is lower)
Air conditions .......... Outdoor air temperature 33CDB
Indoor temperature 26CDB 19 CWB
Corrction when
cooling?
Outdoor unit performance correction

1 Total connection capacity from indoor unit ... 56 +714 unit + 112 = 452
. . 45kW (Obtain from table on previous page.)
=
2 Performance correction from indoor and outdoor temperatures
. . 45.9kW
45 1.02 =
3 Performance correction from piping length and difference in height between indoor and outdoor units
45.9 (0.865 - 0.03) .=. 38.3kW (Actual performance)
Performance correction of indoor unit
Performance correction of indoor unit = System performance
[Example] FDTJ56HKXE2
56 .
38.3
=. 4.74kW
452
Performance of indoor unit
FDTJ56HKXE2 .................. 4.74kW (Actual performance)
FDTJ71HKXE2 .................. 6.01kW (Actual performance)
FDTWJ112HKXE2B .......... 9.49kW (Actual performance)
63 -
Indoor unit capacity

Total capacity of indoor units
operating simultaneously
(3) Gas consumption correction coefficient

(a) Gas consumption correction coefficient by indoor unit operating capacity.
Heating
Cooling
Gas-consumption correction coefficient
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
100
50
Indoor unit operating capacity (%)
130
(b) Gas-consumption correction coefficient by air-conditioner condition
1.3
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
Outdoor-air dry-bulb
temperature
Cooling operation
(CDB)
18
43
40
35
30
25
20
16
14
14
0
5
26
24
22
20
18
16
JIS
Indoor-air wet-bulb temperature (CWB)
Heating operation
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
Indoor-air
dry-bulb
temperature
1.3
(CDB)
10
15
20
25
27
18.5
-15
-10
-5
0
5
10
15
JIS
Outdoor-air wet-bulb temperature (CWB)
64 -
(4) Sensible heat capacity

(a) FDT Series
Model FDTJ28HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
12
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
17.0CWB
TC
2.89
2.83
2.76
2.68
2.60
2.53
2.46
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
SHC
2.58
2.55
2.52
2.49
2.46
2.43
2.40
18.0CWB
TC
2.98
2.91
2.85
2.77
2.70
2.63
2.56
SHC
2.60
2.57
2.55
2.52
2.49
2.46
2.43
19.0CWB
TC
3.05
2.99
2.92
2.86
2.80
2.72
2.64
SHC
2.61
2.59
2.56
2.54
2.52
2.49
2.46
20.0CWB
TC
3.13
3.07
3.01
2.95
2.88
2.81
2.74
SHC
2.63
2.61
2.58
2.56
2.54
2.51
2.49
21.0CWB
TC
3.21
3.15
3.09
3.02
2.95
2.89
2.83
SHC
2.64
2.62
2.60
2.58
2.55
2.53
2.51
22.0CWB
TC
3.28
3.22
3.16
3.10
3.04
2.98
2.91
SHC
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
Model FDTJ36HKXE2
Outdoor
Air flow
3
(m /min)
air temp.
12
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
17.0CWB
(CDB)
TC
3.72
3.64
3.55
3.45
3.35
3.25
3.16
SHC
3.19
3.16
3.12
3.08
3.04
3.00
2.96
18.0CWB
TC
3.83
3.75
3.66
3.57
3.47
3.38
3.29
SHC
3.22
3.19
3.15
3.11
3.08
3.04
3.00
19.0CWB
TC
3.93
3.84
3.76
3.68
3.60
3.50
3.40
SHC
3.24
3.20
3.17
3.14
3.11
3.07
3.04
20.0CWB
TC
4.02
3.95
3.87
3.79
3.71
3.61
3.52
SHC
3.25
3.22
3.20
3.17
3.14
3.10
3.07
21.0CWB
TC
4.12
4.05
3.97
3.88
3.80
3.72
3.64
SHC
3.27
3.24
3.21
3.18
3.15
3.13
3.10
22.0CWB
TC
4.21
4.14
4.06
3.99
3.91
3.83
3.75
SHC
3.2
3.2
3.2
3.2
3.1
3.1
3.1
Model FDTJ45HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
15
Outdoor
air temp.
17.0CWB
(CDB)
TC
4.65
4.55
4.44
4.31
4.19
4.07
3.95
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
SHC
3.99
3.95
3.90
3.85
3.80
3.75
3.71
18.0CWB
TC
4.78
4.68
4.58
4.46
4.34
4.23
4.11
SHC
4.02
3.98
3.94
3.89
3.85
3.80
3.76
19.0CWB
TC
4.91
4.80
4.70
4.60
4.50
4.37
4.25
SHC
4.05
4.01
3.97
3.93
3.89
3.84
3.80
20.0CWB
TC
5.03
4.93
4.83
4.73
4.64
4.52
4.40
SHC
4.07
4.03
3.99
3.96
3.92
3.88
3.84
21.0CWB
TC
5.15
5.06
4.96
4.86
4.75
4.65
4.55
SHC
4.09
4.05
4.02
3.98
3.94
3.91
3.87
22.0CWB
TC
5.27
5.18
5.08
4.98
4.88
4.78
4.68
SHC
4.1
4.0
4.0
4.0
3.9
3.9
3.9
Model FDTJ56HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
15
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

17.0CWB
TC
5.78
5.66
5.52
5.36
5.21
5.06
4.92
SHC
4.48
4.43
4.36
4.30
4.23
4.17
4.10
18.0CWB
TC
5.95
5.83
5.70
5.55
5.40
5.26
5.11
SHC
4.51
4.46
4.40
4.34
4.28
4.22
4.16
19.0CWB
TC
6.11
5.98
5.85
5.72
5.60
5.44
5.29
SHC
4.53
4.47
4.42
4.37
4.32
4.26
4.19
Note (1) Symbols are as follows :

TC
: Total cooling capacity (kW)
SHC
: Sensible heat capacity (kW)
65 -
20.0CWB
TC
6.26
6.14
6.01
5.89
5.77
5.62
5.48
SHC
4.54
4.49
4.44
4.40
4.35
4.29
4.24
21.0CWB
TC
6.41
6.30
6.18
6.04
5.91
5.78
5.66
SHC
4.55
4.51
4.46
4.41
4.36
4.32
4.27
22.0CWB
TC
6.55
6.44
6.32
6.20
6.08
5.95
5.83
SHC
4.5
4.5
4.4
4.4
4.3
4.3
4.2
Model FDTJ71KHXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
16
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

17.0CWB
TC
7.33
7.18
7.00
6.80
6.60
6.42
6.23
SHC
5.31
5.24
5.15
5.06
4.97
4.89
4.81
18.0CWB
TC
7.55
7.39
7.22
7.04
6.85
6.67
6.48
SHC
5.34
5.27
5.19
5.11
5.03
4.95
4.87
19.0CWB
TC
7.75
7.58
7.41
7.26
7.10
6.90
6.70
SHC
5.35
5.28
5.21
5.14
5.07
4.99
4.91
20.0CWB
TC
7.94
7.78
7.63
7.47
7.31
7.13
6.94
SHC
5.36
5.29
5.23
5.16
5.10
5.02
4.95
21.0CWB
TC
8.13
7.99
7.83
7.66
7.49
7.33
7.16
SHC
5.36
5.30
5.24
5.17
5.11
5.04
4.98
22.0CWB
TC
8.31
8.17
8.02
7.86
7.70
7.55
7.39
SHC
5.3
5.3
5.2
5.1
5.1
5.0
5.0
Model FDTJ90HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
21
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

17.0CWB
TC
9.30
9.10
8.87
8.62
8.37
8.14
7.90
SHC
6.82
6.72
6.62
6.51
6.39
6.29
6.19
18.0CWB
TC
9.57
9.37
9.15
8.92
8.69
8.45
8.22
SHC
6.85
6.76
6.67
6.56
6.46
6.36
6.26
19.0CWB
TC
9.82
9.60
9.40
9.20
9.00
8.75
8.50
SHC
6.87
6.78
6.69
6.61
6.52
6.42
6.31
20.0CWB
TC
10.06
9.86
9.67
9.47
9.27
9.04
8.80
SHC
6.88
6.80
6.72
6.64
6.56
6.46
6.37
21.0CWB
TC
10.31
10.13
9.93
9.71
9.50
9.30
9.10
SHC
6.89
6.82
6.74
6.65
6.57
6.49
6.42
22.0CWB
TC
10.53
10.35
10.16
9.96
9.77
9.57
9.37
SHC
6.8
6.8
6.7
6.6
6.5
6.5
6.4
Model FDTJ112HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
28
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

17.0CWB
TC
11.57
11.32
11.04
10.73
10.42
10.12
9.83
SHC
8.71
8.60
8.47
8.33
8.20
8.07
7.94
18.0CWB
TC
11.91
11.66
11.39
11.10
10.81
10.52
10.23
SHC
8.76
8.65
8.54
8.41
8.29
8.16
8.04
19.0CWB
TC
12.22
11.95
11.69
11.45
11.20
10.89
10.57
SHC
8.79
8.68
8.57
8.47
8.37
8.24
8.11
20.0CWB
TC
12.52
12.28
12.03
11.78
11.54
11.24
10.95
SHC
8.81
8.71
8.61
8.51
8.42
8.30
8.19
21.0CWB
TC
12.82
12.60
12.35
12.08
11.82
11.57
11.32
SHC
8.82
8.74
8.64
8.54
8.44
8.34
8.25
22.0CWB
TC
13.10
12.88
12.64
12.40
12.15
11.91
11.66
SHC
8.8
8.7
8.6
8.5
8.4
8.3
8.2
Model FDTJ140HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
30
Outdoor
air temp.
17.0CWB
(CDB)
TC
14.46
14.15
13.80
13.41
13.02
12.66
12.29
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
SHC
10.29
10.15
9.98
9.80
9.62
9.45
9.28
18.0CWB
TC
14.88
14.57
14.24
13.87
13.51
13.15
12.78
SHC
10.34
10.20
10.04
9.88
9.72
9.55
9.40
19.0CWB
TC
15.27
14.94
14.62
14.31
14.00
13.61
13.22
SHC
10.36
10.21
10.07
9.94
9.81
9.64
9.47

TC
SHC
66 -
20.0CWB
TC
15.65
15.34
15.04
14.73
14.42
14.06
13.69
SHC
10.37
10.24
10.11
9.98
9.85
9.70
9.55
21.0CWB
TC
16.03
15.75
15.44
15.11
14.77
14.46
14.15
SHC
10.37
10.26
10.13
10.00
9.86
9.74
9.62
22.0CWB
TC
16.38
16.10
15.81
15.50
15.19
14.88
14.57
SHC
10.3
10.2
10.1
10.0
9.8
9.7
9.6
(b) FDTS Series

Model FDTSJ22HKXE2B
Air flow
3
(m /min)
11
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
17.0CWB
TC
2.27
2.22
2.17
2.11
2.05
1.99
1.93
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
SHC
2.04
2.02
2.00
1.98
1.95
1.93
1.91
18.0CWB
TC
2.34
2.29
2.24
2.18
2.12
2.07
2.01
SHC
2.06
2.04
2.02
2.00
1.98
1.95
1.93
19.0CWB
TC
2.40
2.35
2.30
2.25
2.20
2.14
2.08
SHC
2.08
2.06
2.04
2.02
2.00
1.98
1.95
20.0CWB
TC
2.46
2.41
2.36
2.31
2.27
2.21
2.15
SHC
2.09
2.07
2.05
2.03
2.02
2.00
1.98
21.0CWB
TC
2.52
2.48
2.43
2.37
2.32
2.27
2.22
SHC
2.10
2.08
2.07
2.05
2.03
2.01
2.00
22.0CWB
TC
2.57
2.53
2.48
2.44
2.39
2.34
2.29
SHC
2.11
2.09
2.08
2.06
2.04
2.03
2.01
Model FDTSJ28HKXE2B
Air flow
3
(m /min)
12
Outdoor
air temp.
17.0CWB
(CDB)
TC
2.90
2.83
2.77
2.69
2.60
2.54
2.45
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
SHC
2.58
2.55
2.52
2.49
2.46
2.43
2.40
18.0CWB
TC
2.98
2.92
2.85
2.78
2.72
2.63
2.55
SHC
2.60
2.57
2.55
2.52
2.49
2.46
2.43
19.0CWB
TC
3.06
3.00
2.93
2.87
2.80
2.73
2.65
SHC
2.62
2.59
2.57
2.54
2.52
2.49
2.46
20.0CWB
TC
3.12
3.07
3.02
2.95
2.88
2.82
2.75
SHC
2.63
2.61
2.59
2.56
2.54
2.52
2.49
21.0CWB
TC
3.21
3.14
3.09
3.04
2.97
2.90
2.83
SHC
2.64
2.62
2.60
2.58
2.56
2.54
2.51
22.0CWB
TC
3.29
3.23
3.16
3.10
3.05
2.98
2.92
SHC
2.66
2.64
2.61
2.59
2.58
2.55
2.53
Model FDTSJ36HKXE2B
Air flow
3
(m /min)
12
Outdoor
air temp.
17.0CWB
(CDB)
TC
3.73
3.64
3.56
3.46
3.35
3.26
3.15
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
SHC
3.20
3.16
3.13
3.09
3.04
3.01
2.96
18.0CWB
TC
3.84
3.75
3.66
3.58
3.49
3.38
3.28
SHC
3.22
3.19
3.15
3.12
3.08
3.04
3.00
19.0CWB
TC
3.94
3.86
3.77
3.69
3.60
3.51
3.41
SHC
3.24
3.21
3.18
3.15
3.11
3.08
3.04
20.0CWB
TC
4.02
3.95
3.88
3.79
3.71
3.62
3.54
SHC
3.25
3.23
3.20
3.17
3.14
3.11
3.07
21.0CWB
TC
4.13
4.04
3.97
3.90
3.82
3.73
3.64
SHC
3.27
3.24
3.21
3.19
3.16
3.13
3.10
22.0CWB
TC
4.23
4.15
4.06
3.98
3.92
3.84
3.75
SHC
3.28
3.26
3.23
3.20
3.18
3.15
3.12
Model FDTSJ45HKXE2B
Air flow
3
(m /min)
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
14
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

17.0CWB
TC
4.66
4.55
4.45
4.33
4.19
4.08
3.94
SHC
3.86
3.82
3.77
3.72
3.66
3.62
3.56
18.0CWB
TC
4.80
4.69
4.58
4.47
4.37
4.22
4.10
SHC
3.89
3.85
3.80
3.76
3.71
3.66
3.61
19.0CWB
TC
4.92
4.82
4.72
4.61
4.50
4.39
4.26
SHC
3.91
3.87
3.83
3.79
3.75
3.70
3.65

TC
SHC
67 -
20.0CWB
TC
5.02
4.94
4.85
4.74
4.64
4.53
4.42
SHC
3.92
3.89
3.85
3.81
3.77
3.73
3.69
21.0CWB
TC
5.16
5.05
4.96
4.88
4.77
4.66
4.55
SHC
3.94
3.90
3.87
3.84
3.80
3.76
3.72
22.0CWB
TC
5.28
5.18
5.08
4.98
4.91
4.80
4.69
SHC
3.95
3.92
3.88
3.85
3.82
3.78
3.75
Model FDTSJ71HKXE2B
Air flow
3
(m /min)
18
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
17.0CWB
TC
7.36
7.19
7.01
6.83
6.60
6.43
6.22
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
SHC
5.56
5.49
5.41
5.33
5.23
5.15
5.06
18.0CWB
TC
7.57
7.40
7.23
7.06
6.89
6.66
6.48
SHC
5.59
5.52
5.45
5.37
5.30
5.21
5.13
19.0CWB
TC
7.77
7.61
7.44
7.27
7.10
6.93
6.72
SHC
5.61
5.55
5.48
5.41
5.34
5.27
5.18
20.0CWB
TC
7.92
7.80
7.65
7.48
7.31
7.14
6.97
SHC
5.61
5.56
5.50
5.44
5.37
5.30
5.24
21.0CWB
TC
8.14
7.97
7.82
7.70
7.53
7.36
7.19
SHC
5.63
5.57
5.51
5.46
5.40
5.33
5.27
22.0CWB
TC
8.34
8.18
8.01
7.85
7.74
7.57
7.40
SHC
5.64
5.58
5.52
5.46
5.42
5.36
5.30
(c) FDR Series

Model FDRJ22HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
10
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
17.0CWB
TC
2.28
2.23
2.17
2.12
2.05
1.99
1.93
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
SHC
2.05
2.02
2.00
1.98
1.95
1.93
1.90
18.0CWB
TC
2.35
2.29
2.24
2.19
2.13
2.06
2.01
SHC
2.06
2.04
2.02
2.00
1.98
1.95
1.93
19.0CWB
TC
2.41
2.36
2.31
2.25
2.20
2.15
2.08
SHC
2.08
2.06
2.04
2.02
2.00
1.98
1.96
20.0CWB
TC
2.46
2.42
2.37
2.32
2.27
2.21
2.16
SHC
2.09
2.07
2.06
2.04
2.02
2.00
1.98
21.0CWB
TC
2.52
2.47
2.42
2.38
2.33
2.28
2.23
SHC
2.10
2.08
2.06
2.05
2.03
2.01
2.00
22.0CWB
TC
2.58
2.53
2.48
2.43
2.40
2.35
2.29
SHC
2.11
2.09
2.08
2.06
2.05
2.03
2.01
Model FDRJ28HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
12
Outdoor
air temp.
17.0CWB
(CDB)
TC
2.90
2.83
2.77
2.69
2.60
2.54
2.45
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
SHC
2.58
2.55
2.52
2.49
2.46
2.43
2.40
18.0CWB
TC
2.98
2.92
2.85
2.78
2.72
2.63
2.55
SHC
2.60
2.57
2.55
2.52
2.49
2.46
2.43
19.0CWB
TC
3.06
3.00
2.93
2.87
2.80
2.73
2.65
SHC
2.62
2.59
2.57
2.54
2.52
2.49
2.46
20.0CWB
TC
3.12
3.07
3.02
2.95
2.88
2.82
2.75
SHC
2.63
2.61
2.59
2.56
2.54
2.52
2.49
21.0CWB
TC
3.21
3.14
3.09
3.04
2.97
2.90
2.83
SHC
2.64
2.62
2.60
2.58
2.56
2.54
2.51
22.0CWB
TC
3.29
3.23
3.16
3.10
3.05
2.98
2.92
SHC
2.66
2.64
2.61
2.59
2.58
2.55
2.53
Model FDRJ45HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
14
Outdoor
air temp.
17.0CWB
(CDB)
TC
4.66
4.55
4.45
4.33
4.19
4.08
3.94
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
SHC
3.86
3.82
3.77
3.72
3.66
3.62
3.56
18.0CWB
TC
4.80
4.69
4.58
4.47
4.37
4.22
4.10
SHC
3.89
3.85
3.80
3.76
3.71
3.66
3.61
19.0CWB
TC
4.92
4.82
4.72
4.61
4.50
4.39
4.26
SHC
3.91
3.87
3.83
3.79
3.75
3.70
3.65

TC
SHC
68 -
20.0CWB
TC
5.02
4.94
4.85
4.74
4.64
4.53
4.42
SHC
3.92
3.89
3.85
3.81
3.77
3.73
3.69
21.0CWB
TC
5.16
5.05
4.96
4.88
4.77
4.66
4.55
SHC
3.94
3.90
3.87
3.84
3.80
3.76
3.72
22.0CWB
TC
5.28
5.18
5.08
4.98
4.91
4.80
4.69
SHC
3.95
3.92
3.88
3.85
3.82
3.78
3.75
Model FDRJ56HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
14
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

17.0CWB
TC
5.80
5.67
5.53
5.39
5.21
5.07
4.91
SHC
4.36
4.30
4.24
4.18
4.10
4.04
3.97
18.0CWB
TC
5.97
5.84
5.70
5.57
5.43
5.25
5.11
SHC
4.39
4.33
4.27
4.21
4.16
4.08
4.02
19.0CWB
TC
6.13
6.00
5.87
5.73
5.60
5.47
5.30
SHC
4.40
4.35
4.29
4.24
4.18
4.13
4.06
20.0CWB
TC
6.25
6.15
6.04
5.90
5.77
5.63
5.50
SHC
4.40
4.36
4.32
4.26
4.21
4.16
4.10
21.0CWB
TC
6.42
6.28
6.17
6.07
5.94
5.80
5.67
SHC
4.41
4.36
4.32
4.28
4.23
4.18
4.13
22.0CWB
TC
6.57
6.45
6.32
6.19
6.10
5.97
5.84
SHC
4.42
4.37
4.32
4.28
4.25
4.20
4.15
Model FDRJ71HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
18
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

17.0CWB
TC
7.36
7.19
7.01
6.83
6.60
6.43
6.22
SHC
5.56
5.49
5.41
5.33
5.23
5.15
5.06
18.0CWB
TC
7.57
7.40
7.23
7.06
6.89
6.66
6.48
SHC
5.59
5.52
5.45
5.37
5.30
5.21
5.13
19.0CWB
TC
7.77
7.61
7.44
7.27
7.10
6.93
6.72
SHC
5.61
5.55
5.48
5.41
5.34
5.27
5.18
20.0CWB
TC
7.92
7.80
7.65
7.48
7.31
7.14
6.97
SHC
5.61
5.56
5.50
5.44
5.37
5.30
5.24
21.0CWB
TC
8.14
7.97
7.82
7.70
7.53
7.36
7.19
SHC
5.63
5.57
5.51
5.46
5.40
5.33
5.27
22.0CWB
TC
8.34
8.18
8.01
7.85
7.74
7.57
7.40
SHC
5.64
5.58
5.52
5.46
5.42
5.36
5.30
Model FDRJ90HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
20
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

17.0CWB
TC
9.32
9.11
8.89
8.66
8.37
8.15
7.88
SHC
6.71
6.61
6.51
6.40
6.27
6.17
6.05
18.0CWB
TC
9.59
9.38
9.16
8.95
8.73
8.44
8.21
SHC
6.74
6.64
6.55
6.45
6.36
6.23
6.13
19.0CWB
TC
9.85
9.65
9.43
9.22
9.00
8.78
8.51
SHC
6.76
6.67
6.58
6.49
6.39
6.30
6.19
20.0CWB
TC
10.04
9.88
9.70
9.49
9.27
9.05
8.84
SHC
6.75
6.68
6.60
6.52
6.43
6.34
6.25
21.0CWB
TC
10.31
10.10
9.92
9.76
9.54
9.32
9.11
SHC
6.76
6.67
6.60
6.54
6.45
6.37
6.28
22.0CWB
TC
10.57
10.37
10.15
9.95
9.81
9.59
9.38
SHC
6.76
6.69
6.60
6.53
6.47
6.39
6.31
Model FDRJ112HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
28
Outdoor
air temp.
17.0CWB
(CDB)
TC
11.60
11.33
11.07
10.77
10.42
10.15
9.81
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
SHC
8.72
8.60
8.48
8.35
8.20
8.08
7.93
18.0CWB
TC
11.94
11.67
11.40
11.13
10.86
10.51
10.21
SHC
8.77
8.66
8.54
8.42
8.31
8.16
8.04
19.0CWB
TC
12.25
12.01
11.74
11.47
11.20
10.93
10.60
SHC
8.80
8.70
8.59
8.48
8.37
8.26
8.12

TC
SHC
69 -
20.0CWB
TC
12.50
12.30
12.07
11.80
11.54
11.27
11.00
SHC
8.80
8.72
8.63
8.52
8.42
8.31
8.20
21.0CWB
TC
12.84
12.57
12.34
12.14
11.87
11.60
11.33
SHC
8.83
8.72
8.64
8.56
8.46
8.36
8.26
22.0CWB
TC
13.15
12.90
12.63
12.39
12.21
11.94
11.67
SHC
8.84
8.75
8.65
8.56
8.49
8.39
8.30
Model FDRJ140HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
34
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

17.0CWB
TC
14.50
14.17
13.83
13.47
13.02
12.68
12.26
SHC
10.78
10.63
10.48
10.31
10.12
9.97
9.78
18.0CWB
TC
14.92
14.59
14.25
13.92
13.58
13.13
12.77
SHC
10.84
10.69
10.55
10.40
10.26
10.07
9.91
19.0CWB
TC
15.32
15.01
14.67
14.34
14.00
13.66
13.24
SHC
10.88
10.75
10.60
10.46
10.32
10.19
10.01
20.0CWB
TC
15.62
15.37
15.09
14.76
14.42
14.08
13.75
SHC
10.87
10.77
10.65
10.52
10.38
10.25
10.12
21.0CWB
TC
16.04
15.71
15.43
15.18
14.84
14.50
14.17
SHC
10.90
10.77
10.66
10.56
10.43
10.30
10.18
22.0CWB
TC
16.44
16.13
15.79
15.48
15.26
14.92
14.59
SHC
10.91
10.80
10.67
10.56
10.47
10.35
10.23
(d) FDUM Series

Model FDUMJ36HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
12
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

17.0CWB
TC
3.73
3.64
3.56
3.46
3.35
3.26
3.15
SHC
3.20
3.16
3.13
3.09
3.04
3.01
2.96
18.0CWB
TC
3.84
3.75
3.66
3.58
3.49
3.38
3.28
SHC
3.22
3.19
3.15
3.12
3.08
3.04
3.00
19.0CWB
TC
3.94
3.86
3.77
3.69
3.60
3.51
3.41
SHC
3.24
3.21
3.18
3.15
3.11
3.08
3.04
20.0CWB
TC
4.02
3.95
3.88
3.79
3.71
3.62
3.54
SHC
3.25
3.23
3.20
3.17
3.14
3.11
3.07
21.0CWB
TC
4.13
4.04
3.97
3.90
3.82
3.73
3.64
SHC
3.27
3.24
3.21
3.19
3.16
3.13
3.10
22.0CWB
TC
4.23
4.15
4.06
3.98
3.92
3.84
3.75
SHC
3.28
3.26
3.23
3.20
3.18
3.15
3.12
Model FDUMJ45HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
14
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

17.0CWB
TC
4.66
4.55
4.45
4.33
4.19
4.08
3.94
SHC
3.86
3.82
3.77
3.72
3.66
3.62
3.56
18.0CWB
TC
4.80
4.69
4.58
4.47
4.37
4.22
4.10
SHC
3.89
3.85
3.80
3.76
3.71
3.66
3.61
19.0CWB
TC
4.92
4.82
4.72
4.61
4.50
4.39
4.26
SHC
3.91
3.87
3.83
3.79
3.75
3.70
3.65
20.0CWB
TC
5.02
4.94
4.85
4.74
4.64
4.53
4.42
SHC
3.92
3.89
3.85
3.81
3.77
3.73
3.69
21.0CWB
TC
5.16
5.05
4.96
4.88
4.77
4.66
4.55
SHC
3.94
3.90
3.87
3.84
3.80
3.76
3.72
22.0CWB
TC
5.28
5.18
5.08
4.98
4.91
4.80
4.69
SHC
3.95
3.92
3.88
3.85
3.82
3.78
3.75
Model FDUMJ56HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
14
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

17.0CWB
TC
5.80
5.67
5.53
5.39
5.21
5.07
4.91
SHC
4.36
4.30
4.24
4.18
4.10
4.04
3.97
18.0CWB
TC
5.97
5.84
5.70
5.57
5.43
5.25
5.11
SHC
4.39
4.33
4.27
4.21
4.16
4.08
4.02
19.0CWB
TC
6.13
6.00
5.87
5.73
5.60
5.47
5.30
SHC
4.40
4.35
4.29
4.24
4.18
4.13
4.06

TC
SHC
70 -
20.0CWB
TC
6.25
6.15
6.04
5.90
5.77
5.63
5.50
SHC
4.40
4.36
4.32
4.26
4.21
4.16
4.10
21.0CWB
TC
6.42
6.28
6.17
6.07
5.94
5.80
5.67
SHC
4.41
4.36
4.32
4.28
4.23
4.18
4.13
22.0CWB
TC
6.57
6.45
6.32
6.19
6.10
5.97
5.84
SHC
4.42
4.37
4.32
4.28
4.25
4.20
4.15
Model FDUMJ71HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
18
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

17.0CWB
TC
7.36
7.19
7.01
6.83
6.60
6.43
6.22
SHC
5.56
5.49
5.41
5.33
5.23
5.15
5.06
18.0CWB
TC
7.57
7.40
7.23
7.06
6.89
6.66
6.48
SHC
5.59
5.52
5.45
5.37
5.30
5.21
5.13
19.0CWB
TC
7.77
7.61
7.44
7.27
7.10
6.93
6.72
SHC
5.61
5.55
5.48
5.41
5.34
5.27
5.18
20.0CWB
TC
7.92
7.80
7.65
7.48
7.31
7.14
6.97
SHC
5.61
5.56
5.50
5.44
5.37
5.30
5.24
21.0CWB
TC
8.14
7.97
7.82
7.70
7.53
7.36
7.19
SHC
5.63
5.57
5.51
5.46
5.40
5.33
5.27
22.0CWB
TC
8.34
8.18
8.01
7.85
7.74
7.57
7.40
SHC
5.64
5.58
5.52
5.46
5.42
5.36
5.30
Model FDUMJ90HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
20
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

17.0CWB
TC
9.32
9.11
8.89
8.66
8.37
8.15
7.88
SHC
6.71
6.61
6.51
6.40
6.27
6.17
6.05
18.0CWB
TC
9.59
9.38
9.16
8.95
8.73
8.44
8.21
SHC
6.74
6.64
6.55
6.45
6.36
6.23
6.13
19.0CWB
TC
9.85
9.65
9.43
9.22
9.00
8.78
8.51
SHC
6.76
6.67
6.58
6.49
6.39
6.30
6.19
20.0CWB
TC
10.04
9.88
9.70
9.49
9.27
9.05
8.84
SHC
6.75
6.68
6.60
6.52
6.43
6.34
6.25
21.0CWB
TC
10.31
10.10
9.92
9.76
9.54
9.32
9.11
SHC
6.76
6.67
6.60
6.54
6.45
6.37
6.28
22.0CWB
TC
10.57
10.37
10.15
9.95
9.81
9.59
9.38
SHC
6.76
6.69
6.60
6.53
6.47
6.39
6.31
Model FDUMJ112HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
28
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

17.0CWB
TC
11.60
11.33
11.07
10.77
10.42
10.15
9.81
SHC
8.72
8.60
8.48
8.35
8.20
8.08
7.93
18.0CWB
TC
11.94
11.67
11.40
11.13
10.86
10.51
10.21
SHC
8.77
8.66
8.54
8.42
8.31
8.16
8.04
19.0CWB
TC
12.25
12.01
11.74
11.47
11.20
10.93
10.60
SHC
8.80
8.70
8.59
8.48
8.37
8.26
8.12
20.0CWB
TC
12.50
12.30
12.07
11.80
11.54
11.27
11.00
SHC
8.80
8.72
8.63
8.52
8.42
8.31
8.20
21.0CWB
TC
12.84
12.57
12.34
12.14
11.87
11.60
11.33
SHC
8.83
8.72
8.64
8.56
8.46
8.36
8.26
22.0CWB
TC
13.15
12.90
12.63
12.39
12.21
11.94
11.67
SHC
8.84
8.75
8.65
8.56
8.49
8.39
8.30
Model FDUMJ140HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
34
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

17.0CWB
TC
14.50
14.17
13.83
13.47
13.02
12.68
12.26
SHC
10.78
10.63
10.48
10.31
10.12
9.97
9.78
18.0CWB
TC
14.92
14.59
14.25
13.92
13.58
13.13
12.77
SHC
10.84
10.69
10.55
10.40
10.26
10.07
9.91
19.0CWB
TC
15.32
15.01
14.67
14.34
14.00
13.66
13.24
SHC
10.88
10.75
10.60
10.46
10.32
10.19
10.01

TC
SHC
71 -
20.0CWB
TC
15.62
15.37
15.09
14.76
14.42
14.08
13.75
SHC
10.87
10.77
10.65
10.52
10.38
10.25
10.12
21.0CWB
TC
16.04
15.71
15.43
15.18
14.84
14.50
14.17
SHC
10.90
10.77
10.66
10.56
10.43
10.30
10.18
22.0CWB
TC
16.44
16.13
15.79
15.48
15.26
14.92
14.59
SHC
10.91
10.80
10.67
10.56
10.47
10.35
10.23
(e) FDE Series

Model FDEJ36HKXE2B
Air flow
3
(m /min)
14
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
17.0CWB
TC
3.73
3.64
3.56
3.46
3.35
3.26
3.15
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
SHC
3.34
3.30
3.26
3.23
3.18
3.15
3.10
18.0CWB
TC
3.84
3.75
3.66
3.58
3.49
3.38
3.28
SHC
3.36
3.33
3.30
3.26
3.23
3.18
3.15
19.0CWB
TC
3.94
3.86
3.77
3.69
3.60
3.51
3.41
SHC
3.39
3.36
3.32
3.29
3.26
3.23
3.19
20.0CWB
TC
4.02
3.95
3.88
3.79
3.71
3.62
3.54
SHC
3.40
3.38
3.35
3.32
3.29
3.26
3.23
21.0CWB
TC
4.13
4.04
3.97
3.90
3.82
3.73
3.64
SHC
3.42
3.39
3.37
3.34
3.31
3.28
3.25
22.0CWB
TC
4.23
4.15
4.06
3.98
3.92
3.84
3.75
SHC
3.44
3.41
3.38
3.35
3.34
3.31
3.28
Model FDEJ45HKXE2B
Outdoor
Air flow
3
(m /min)
air temp.
14
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
17.0CWB
(CDB)
TC
4.66
4.55
4.45
4.33
4.19
4.08
3.94
SHC
3.86
3.82
3.77
3.72
3.66
3.62
3.56
18.0CWB
TC
4.80
4.69
4.58
4.47
4.37
4.22
4.10
SHC
3.89
3.85
3.80
3.76
3.71
3.66
3.61
19.0CWB
TC
4.92
4.82
4.72
4.61
4.50
4.39
4.26
SHC
3.91
3.87
3.83
3.79
3.75
3.70
3.65
20.0CWB
TC
5.02
4.94
4.85
4.74
4.64
4.53
4.42
SHC
3.92
3.89
3.85
3.81
3.77
3.73
3.69
21.0CWB
TC
5.16
5.05
4.96
4.88
4.77
4.66
4.55
SHC
3.94
3.90
3.87
3.84
3.80
3.76
3.72
22.0CWB
TC
5.28
5.18
5.08
4.98
4.91
4.80
4.69
SHC
3.95
3.92
3.88
3.85
3.82
3.78
3.75
Model FDEJ56HKXE2B
Air flow
3
(m /min)
14
Outdoor
air temp.
17.0CWB
(CDB)
TC
5.80
5.67
5.53
5.39
5.21
5.07
4.91
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
SHC
4.36
4.30
4.24
4.18
4.10
4.04
3.97
18.0CWB
TC
5.97
5.84
5.70
5.57
5.43
5.25
5.11
SHC
4.39
4.33
4.27
4.21
4.16
4.08
4.02
19.0CWB
TC
6.13
6.00
5.87
5.73
5.60
5.47
5.30
SHC
4.40
4.35
4.29
4.24
4.18
4.13
4.06
20.0CWB
TC
6.25
6.15
6.04
5.90
5.77
5.63
5.50
SHC
4.40
4.36
4.32
4.26
4.21
4.16
4.10
21.0CWB
TC
6.42
6.28
6.17
6.07
5.94
5.80
5.67
SHC
4.41
4.36
4.32
4.28
4.23
4.18
4.13
22.0CWB
TC
6.57
6.45
6.32
6.19
6.10
5.97
5.84
SHC
4.42
4.37
4.32
4.28
4.25
4.20
4.15
Model FDEJ71HKXE2B
Air flow
3
(m /min)
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
18
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

17.0CWB
TC
7.36
7.19
7.01
6.83
6.60
6.43
6.22
SHC
5.56
5.49
5.41
5.33
5.23
5.15
5.06
18.0CWB
TC
7.57
7.40
7.23
7.06
6.89
6.66
6.48
SHC
5.59
5.52
5.45
5.37
5.30
5.21
5.13
19.0CWB
TC
7.77
7.61
7.44
7.27
7.10
6.93
6.72
SHC
5.61
5.55
5.48
5.41
5.34
5.27
5.18

TC
SHC
72 -
20.0CWB
TC
7.92
7.80
7.65
7.48
7.31
7.14
6.97
SHC
5.61
5.56
5.50
5.44
5.37
5.30
5.24
21.0CWB
TC
8.14
7.97
7.82
7.70
7.53
7.36
7.19
SHC
5.63
5.57
5.51
5.46
5.40
5.33
5.27
22.0CWB
TC
8.34
8.18
8.01
7.85
7.74
7.57
7.40
SHC
5.64
5.58
5.52
5.46
5.42
5.36
5.30
Model FDEJ112HKXE2B
Air flow
3
(m /min)
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
28
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

17.0CWB
TC
11.60
11.33
11.07
10.77
10.42
10.15
9.81
SHC
8.72
8.60
8.48
8.35
8.20
8.08
7.93
18.0CWB
TC
11.94
11.67
11.40
11.13
10.86
10.51
10.21
SHC
8.77
8.66
8.54
8.42
8.31
8.16
8.04
19.0CWB
TC
12.25
12.01
11.74
11.47
11.20
10.93
10.60
SHC
8.80
8.70
8.59
8.48
8.37
8.26
8.12
20.0CWB
TC
12.50
12.30
12.07
11.80
11.54
11.27
11.00
SHC
8.80
8.72
8.63
8.52
8.42
8.31
8.20
21.0CWB
TC
12.84
12.57
12.34
12.14
11.87
11.60
11.33
SHC
8.83
8.72
8.64
8.56
8.46
8.36
8.26
22.0CWB
TC
13.15
12.90
12.63
12.39
12.21
11.94
11.67
SHC
8.84
8.75
8.65
8.56
8.49
8.39
8.30
Model FDEJ140HKXE2B
Air flow
3
(m /min)
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
34
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

17.0CWB
TC
14.50
14.17
13.83
13.47
13.02
12.68
12.26
SHC
10.78
10.63
10.48
10.31
10.12
9.97
9.78
18.0CWB
TC
14.92
14.59
14.25
13.92
13.58
13.13
12.77
SHC
10.84
10.69
10.55
10.40
10.26
10.07
9.91
19.0CWB
TC
15.32
15.01
14.67
14.34
14.00
13.66
13.24
SHC
10.88
10.75
10.60
10.46
10.32
10.19
10.01
20.0CWB
TC
15.62
15.37
15.09
14.76
14.42
14.08
13.75
SHC
10.87
10.77
10.65
10.52
10.38
10.25
10.12
21.0CWB
TC
16.04
15.71
15.43
15.18
14.84
14.50
14.17
SHC
10.90
10.77
10.66
10.56
10.43
10.30
10.18
22.0CWB
TC
16.44
16.13
15.79
15.48
15.26
14.92
14.59
SHC
10.91
10.80
10.67
10.56
10.47
10.35
10.23
(f) FDFL, FDFU Series

Models FDFLJ28HKXE2, FDFUJ28HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
12
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

17.0CWB
TC
2.90
2.83
2.77
2.69
2.60
2.54
2.45
SHC
2.58
2.55
2.52
2.49
2.46
2.43
2.40
18.0CWB
TC
2.98
2.92
2.85
2.78
2.72
2.63
2.55
SHC
2.60
2.57
2.55
2.52
2.49
2.46
2.43
19.0CWB
TC
3.06
3.00
2.93
2.87
2.80
2.73
2.65
SHC
2.62
2.59
2.57
2.54
2.52
2.49
2.46
20.0CWB
TC
3.12
3.07
3.02
2.95
2.88
2.82
2.75
SHC
2.63
2.61
2.59
2.56
2.54
2.52
2.49
21.0CWB
TC
3.21
3.14
3.09
3.04
2.97
2.90
2.83
SHC
2.64
2.62
2.60
2.58
2.56
2.54
2.51
22.0CWB
TC
3.29
3.23
3.16
3.10
3.05
2.98
2.92
SHC
2.66
2.64
2.61
2.59
2.58
2.55
2.53

Air flow
3
(m /min)
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
14
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

17.0CWB
TC
4.66
4.55
4.45
4.33
4.19
4.08
3.94
SHC
3.86
3.82
3.77
3.72
3.66
3.62
3.56
18.0CWB
TC
4.80
4.69
4.58
4.47
4.37
4.22
4.10
SHC
3.89
3.85
3.80
3.76
3.71
3.66
3.61
19.0CWB
TC
4.92
4.82
4.72
4.61
4.50
4.39
4.26
SHC
3.91
3.87
3.83
3.79
3.75
3.70
3.65

TC
SHC
73 -
20.0CWB
TC
5.02
4.94
4.85
4.74
4.64
4.53
4.42
SHC
3.92
3.89
3.85
3.81
3.77
3.73
3.69
21.0CWB
TC
5.16
5.05
4.96
4.88
4.77
4.66
4.55
SHC
3.94
3.90
3.87
3.84
3.80
3.76
3.72
22.0CWB
TC
5.28
5.18
5.08
4.98
4.91
4.80
4.69
SHC
3.95
3.92
3.88
3.85
3.82
3.78
3.75

Air flow
3
(m /min)
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
18
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

17.0CWB
TC
7.36
7.19
7.01
6.83
6.60
6.43
6.22
SHC
5.56
5.49
5.41
5.33
5.23
5.15
5.06
18.0CWB
TC
7.57
7.40
7.23
7.06
6.89
6.66
6.48
SHC
5.59
5.52
5.45
5.37
5.30
5.21
5.13
19.0CWB
TC
7.77
7.61
7.44
7.27
7.10
6.93
6.72
SHC
5.61
5.55
5.48
5.41
5.34
5.27
5.18
20.0CWB
TC
7.92
7.80
7.65
7.48
7.31
7.14
6.97
SHC
5.61
5.56
5.50
5.44
5.37
5.30
5.24
21.0CWB
TC
8.14
7.97
7.82
7.70
7.53
7.36
7.19
SHC
5.63
5.57
5.51
5.46
5.40
5.33
5.27
22.0CWB
TC
8.34
8.18
8.01
7.85
7.74
7.57
7.40
SHC
5.64
5.58
5.52
5.46
5.42
5.36
5.30
(g) FDK Series

Model FDKJ22HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

17.0CWB
TC
2.27
2.22
2.17
2.11
2.05
1.99
1.93
SHC
2.04
2.02
2.00
1.98
1.95
1.93
1.91
18.0CWB
TC
2.34
2.29
2.24
2.18
2.12
2.07
2.01
SHC
2.06
2.04
2.02
2.00
1.98
1.95
1.93
19.0CWB
TC
2.40
2.35
2.30
2.25
2.20
2.14
2.08
SHC
2.08
2.06
2.04
2.02
2.00
1.98
1.95
20.0CWB
TC
2.46
2.41
2.36
2.31
2.27
2.21
2.15
SHC
2.09
2.07
2.05
2.03
2.02
2.00
1.98
21.0CWB
TC
2.52
2.48
2.43
2.37
2.32
2.27
2.22
SHC
2.10
2.08
2.07
2.05
2.03
2.01
2.00
22.0CWB
TC
2.57
2.53
2.48
2.44
2.39
2.34
2.29
SHC
2.11
2.09
2.08
2.06
2.04
2.03
2.01
Model FDKJ28HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
10
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

17.0CWB
TC
2.90
2.83
2.77
2.69
2.60
2.54
2.45
SHC
2.58
2.55
2.52
2.49
2.46
2.43
2.40
18.0CWB
TC
2.98
2.92
2.85
2.78
2.72
2.63
2.55
SHC
2.60
2.57
2.55
2.52
2.49
2.46
2.43
19.0CWB
TC
3.06
3.00
2.93
2.87
2.80
2.73
2.65
SHC
2.62
2.59
2.57
2.54
2.52
2.49
2.46
20.0CWB
TC
3.12
3.07
3.02
2.95
2.88
2.82
2.75
SHC
2.63
2.61
2.59
2.56
2.54
2.52
2.49
21.0CWB
TC
3.21
3.14
3.09
3.04
2.97
2.90
2.83
SHC
2.64
2.62
2.60
2.58
2.56
2.54
2.51
22.0CWB
TC
3.29
3.23
3.16
3.10
3.05
2.98
2.92
SHC
2.66
2.64
2.61
2.59
2.58
2.55
2.53
Model FDKJ36HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
10
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

17.0CWB
TC
3.73
3.64
3.56
3.46
3.35
3.26
3.15
SHC
2.93
2.89
2.86
2.82
2.77
2.73
2.68
18.0CWB
TC
3.84
3.75
3.66
3.58
3.49
3.38
3.28
SHC
2.95
2.91
2.88
2.84
2.81
2.76
2.72
19.0CWB
TC
3.94
3.86
3.77
3.69
3.60
3.51
3.41
SHC
2.96
2.93
2.90
2.86
2.83
2.79
2.75

TC
SHC
74 -
20.0CWB
TC
4.02
3.95
3.88
3.79
3.71
3.62
3.54
SHC
2.97
2.94
2.91
2.88
2.85
2.81
2.78
21.0CWB
TC
4.13
4.04
3.97
3.90
3.82
3.73
3.64
SHC
2.98
2.95
2.92
2.89
2.86
2.83
2.80
22.0CWB
TC
4.23
4.15
4.06
3.98
3.92
3.84
3.75
SHC
2.98
2.96
2.93
2.90
2.88
2.85
2.82
Model FDKJ45HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
11.5
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
17.0CWB
TC
4.66
4.55
4.45
4.33
4.19
4.08
3.94
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
SHC
3.54
3.49
3.44
3.39
3.33
3.28
3.22
18.0CWB
TC
4.80
4.69
4.58
4.47
4.37
4.22
4.10
SHC
3.56
3.51
3.46
3.42
3.37
3.31
3.26
19.0CWB
TC
4.92
4.82
4.72
4.61
4.50
4.39
4.26
SHC
3.57
3.53
3.48
3.44
3.40
3.35
3.30
20.0CWB
TC
5.02
4.94
4.85
4.74
4.64
4.53
4.42
SHC
3.57
3.54
3.50
3.46
3.42
3.37
3.33
21.0CWB
TC
5.16
5.05
4.96
4.88
4.77
4.66
4.55
SHC
3.58
3.54
3.51
3.47
3.43
3.39
3.35
22.0CWB
TC
5.28
5.18
5.08
4.98
4.91
4.80
4.69
SHC
3.59
3.55
3.51
3.47
3.45
3.41
3.37
Model FDKJ56HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
17
Outdoor
air temp.
(CDB)
17.0CWB
TC
5.80
5.67
5.53
5.39
5.21
5.07
4.91
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
SHC
4.75
4.69
4.64
4.57
4.50
4.44
4.37
18.0CWB
TC
5.97
5.84
5.70
5.57
5.43
5.25
5.11
SHC
4.78
4.73
4.67
4.62
4.56
4.49
4.43
19.0CWB
TC
6.13
6.00
5.87
5.73
5.60
5.47
5.30
SHC
4.81
4.76
4.71
4.65
4.60
4.55
4.48
20.0CWB
TC
6.25
6.15
6.04
5.90
5.77
5.63
5.50
SHC
4.82
4.78
4.74
4.69
4.64
4.59
4.54
21.0CWB
TC
6.42
6.28
6.17
6.07
5.94
5.80
5.67
SHC
4.84
4.79
4.75
4.71
4.66
4.62
4.57
22.0CWB
TC
6.57
6.45
6.32
6.19
6.10
5.97
5.84
SHC
4.86
4.81
4.77
4.72
4.69
4.65
4.60
Model FDKJ71HKXE2
Air flow
3
(m /min)
21
Outdoor
air temp.
17.0CWB
(CDB)
TC
7.36
7.19
7.01
6.83
6.60
6.43
6.22
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
SHC
5.95
5.87
5.80
5.72
5.63
5.56
5.47
18.0CWB
TC
7.57
7.40
7.23
7.06
6.89
6.66
6.48
SHC
5.99
5.92
5.85
5.78
5.71
5.62
5.54
19.0CWB
TC
7.77
7.61
7.44
7.27
7.10
6.93
6.72
SHC
6.02
5.96
5.89
5.82
5.75
5.69
5.61

TC
SHC
75 -
20.0CWB
TC
7.92
7.80
7.65
7.48
7.31
7.14
6.97
SHC
6.03
5.98
5.93
5.86
5.80
5.73
5.67
21.0CWB
TC
8.14
7.97
7.82
7.70
7.53
7.36
7.19
SHC
6.06
5.99
5.94
5.89
5.83
5.77
5.71
22.0CWB
TC
8.34
8.18
8.01
7.85
7.74
7.57
7.40
SHC
6.07
6.02
5.96
5.90
5.86
5.81
5.75
2.9 Characteristics of fan

(1) Cassetteria type (FDR)
How to interpret the blower characteristics table
External static pressure table

Duct specs.
40(4)
45(4.5) 85(8.5) 50(5)
45(4.5) 85(8.5) 45(4.5) 85(8.5)
Static pressure Pa (mmAq)
90(9)
FDR28 type
12
FDR45
56 type
14
FDR71 type
18
30(3) 65(6.5) 45(4.5) 80(8)
50(5)
85(8.5)
FDR90 type
20
25(2.5) 60(6) 45(4.5) 80(8)
50(5)
85(8.5)
FDR112 type
28
40(4)
70(7)
50(5)
80(8) 55(5.5) 85(8.5)
FDR140 type
34
40(4)
70(7)
50(5)
80(8) 55(5.5) 85(8.5)
50(5) 85(8.5) 50(5)
90(9)
20(2)
0(0)
-20(-2)
2 Square duct blowout...........

Internal resistance decreases
more than the standard round duct
(200 3-spot). 3Pa(0.3mmAq) at
17 m 3/nin. (External static pressure increases in reverse.)
m
diu
Me
10
w
Lo
FDR22 type
rd
da
an
St
Stan- High(4) Stan- High(4) Stan- High(4)

dard speed dard speed dard speed
Type
1 2-spot blowout.....................
Internal resistance increases more
than the standard 3-spot blowout.
Approx. 1.4mmAq at 17m3/min
Example : Case of FDRJ71HKXE2
Square duct (3)
rd
da
an h
St Hig
Standard (2)
rd
da
an
St
Air flow
(m3 /min)
1 spot (1)
closing
Unit : Pa(mmAq)
2-spot blower
internal resistance
3 Suction panel.......................
When the suction panel is not
used with the ceiling return type,
the part of internal resistance related to the panel decrease.
3Pa(0.3mmAq) ( = 0.60.3 ) at
17mm3/min.
[Standard]
3-spot blower
internal resistance
Square duct blower
internal resistance
Internal resistance withoutsuction
without suctionpanel
panel
Internal resistance without filter
13 14
Notes (1) 1 spot closing: Round duct flange at center is removed and shield with a
special panel (option).
(2) Standard: 200 duct are installed at all blowout holes.
(3) Square duct: All round ducts are removed and replaced with special
square duct flanges (option).
(4) When operating at a high speed, invert the connection of white and red
connectors on the flank of control box.
16
18
20
Air flow (m3 /min)
Model FDRJ28HKXE2
Model FDRJ22HKXE2
120(12)
100(10)
gh
ard
gh
Hi
ed
M
ium
(0)0
[Standard]
2-spot blower internal resistance
Square duct blower internal resistance
Internal resistance without suction panel

20(2)
0(0)
(0)0
[Standard]
40(4)
d
ee
sp it
h
Hig w lim
Lo
ard
ow
S per
Up
nd
60(6) ndard it
lim
ta
nd
rd
Hi
ed
pe
h s it
g
i
m
H w li
Lo
gh
Sta
20(2)
da
Hi
Sta
an
ee
St
ee
sp
40(4)
80(8)
sp
gh
ard t
nd limi
Sta per
Up
gh
Hi
60(6)
Hi
w
ium
ed
Lo
ed
pe
ard
M
hs
nd
ed
Hig w
Sta
pe
hs
Lo
Hig
d
ee
sp imit
h
l
g
80(8)
Hi per
H
Up
Hi
M igh
Lo gh
e
di sp
w sp
um ee
ee
d
d
h
ig
H
rd
da
m
an
iu
St
ed
M
rd
da
an
St
100(10)
d
ee
sp it
h
m
i
Hig per l
Up
10
(-2)-20
(-2)-20
10
11
12
14
Air flow (m3/min)
Air flow (m3/min)
76 -
15.5
Upper
limit
Lower
limit
Upper
limit
Lower
limit
Model FDRJ71HKXE2
120(12)
120(12)
d
pee
h sr limit
g
i
H pe
Up
sp
ee
Hi
d
gh
ium
ed
a
St
sp
gh
nd
Hi
gh
Hi
d
ar
an
St
gh
ow
w
Lo
ow
L
rd
da
an
da
rd
w
Lo
20(2)
it
e
M
diu
m
(0)0
[Standard]
(-2)-20
12
14
13 14
Lower
limit
15.5
Upper
limit
Air flow (m3/min)
16
18
20
Upper
limit
Air flow (m3/min)
Model FDRJ112HKXE2
120(12)
120(12)
100(10)
100(10)
gh
ee
sp
li
sp
St
ed
an
Hi
60(6)
Hi
gh
sp
ee
rd
nda
t
Sta er limi
p
p
Hi
U
g
sp
ee
d
Hi
gh
Me
diu
sp
ee
w
Lo
ed
St
pe
Lo
s
igh
lim
it
an
da
rd
40(4)
an
da
rd
ed
ow
rd
igh
da
ium
20(2)
igh
St
rd
an
St
da
M
rd
nda
Lo
ard
Sta
nd
20(2)
igh
ium
ed
M
d
ee
sp
gh
ow
t
mi
d
ee
Sta
40(4)
80(8)
H
d
gh
Hi
e
sp
gh
Hi ow
L
ard t
nd limi
a
t
r
S pe
Up
d
ee
sp mit
h
i
l
Hig per
Up
Hi
gh
Hi
d
ee
sp mit
h
i
Hig per l
Up
80(8)
(-2)-20

Model FDRJ90HKXE2
60(6)
(0)0
[Standard] 3-spot blower internal resistance


10
Lower
limit
lim
d
ee
d
ee
sp
40(4)
St
igh
m
diu
Me
rd
nda
Sta
ard
nd
Sta
20(2)
t
mi
r li
e
60(6)
pp
U
ard
d
an
St
gh
Hi
40(4)
sp
H
ard
nd
Sta
ee
h
Hig
lim
Hi
it
o
dL
d
ee
sp
ium
60(6) Sta
gh
ed
nda
gh
limi
it
e
pe
Hi
ed
e
sp
per
p
rdU
dU
80(8)
lim
r
pe
Hi
gh
Hi
d
ee
sp
gh
Hi
gh
Hi
rd
da
an
St w
Lo
80(8)
100(10)
100(10)
um
edi
2-spot blower
internal resistance
(0)0
3-spot blower
internal resistance
0(0)
4-spot blower internal resistance[Standard]
3 - spot blower internal resistance[Standard]

(-2)-20

14
Lower
limit
17
-2(-20)

20
Air flow (m3/min)
21 22
22
Upper
limit
Lower
limit
77 -
25
28
Air flow (m3/min)
31
Upper
limit
Model FDRJ140HKXE2
120(12)
ed
M
d
m
iu
gh
a
St
40(4)
d
ee
sp it
h
g
m
Hi w li
Lo
da
an
St
Lo
d
ee
sp
60(6)
h
ig
H
d
ee
sp
ee
rd t
da limi
n
a r
St ppe
U
Hi
H
rd
igh
20(2)
rd
da
Lo
an
d
ar
St
nd
h
ig
H
sp
80(8)
gh
Hi
ed
pe it
s
m
gh li
Hi per
Up
100(10)
ed
3-spot blower
internal resistance
ium
(0)0
(0)0
[Standard]

24
Lower
limit
26
30
34
3
Air flow (m /min)
(-2)-20
38
Upper
limit
78 -
(2) Satellite ducted type (FDUM)

External static pressure table
Duct specs.
1 spot
closing
Standard
Square duct
How to interpret the blower characteristics table

Example : Case of FDUMJ71HKXE2
40(4)
50(5)
85(8.5)
50(5)
90(9)
50(5)
85(8.5)
50(5)
90(9)
18
35(3.5)
70(7)
50(5)
85(8.5) 55(5.5)
FDUM90 type
20
30(3)
65(6.5)
50(5)
85(8.5) 55(5.5)
FDUM112 type
28
50(5)
80(8)
60(6)
FDUM140 type
34
50(5)
75(7.5)
60(6)
90(9)
90(9)
90(9)
65(6.5)
95(9.5)
85(8.5) 65(6.5)
95(9.5)
Note (1) For high speed operation, insert the white connector and the red
connector beside the control box in other places respectively.
14
rd
da
an um
St edi
M
12
w
Lo
FDUM36 type
FDUM45
56 type
FDUM71 type
rd
da
an
St
Stan- High(4) Stan- High(4) Stan- High(1)

dard speed dard speed dard speed
Type
rd
da
an gh
St Hi
Air flow
(m3 /min)
Unit : Pa (mmAq)
20(2)
2-spot blower
internal resistance
0(0)
-10(-1)
3-spot blower
internal resistance
Square duct blower
internal resistance
-20(-2)
13 14
16
18
20
Air flow (m3/min)

1 2-spot blowout.....................
Internal resistance increases more than
the standard 3-spot blowout. Approx.
14Pa(1.4mmAq) at 17m3/min
2 Square duct blowout...........
Internal resistance decreases more than
the standard round duct (200 3-spot).
3Pa(0.3mmAq) at 17 m3/min. (External
static pressure increases in reverse.)
Model FDUMJ36HKXE2

120(12)
t
imi
er
pp
100(10)
U
d
100(10)
ee
d
Hi
gh
it
diu
r lim
Me
ar
pe
nd
ee
Sta
sp
sp
nd
Sta
d
ee
sp it
h
Hig w lim
Lo
igh
diu
e
M
ard
nd
rd
20(2)
ard
40(4)
Sta
gh
gh
60(6)
p
dU
a
nd
Sta w
Lo
igh
H
ard
nd
ium
Sta
ed
M
ard
nd
Sta
w
Lo
ard
nd
Sta
20(2)
Hi
ed
pe
ow
dL
lim
ee
ium
ed
ed
M
pe
ed
hs
Hig w
Lo
w
Lo
sp
80(8)
it
s
igh
40(4)
gh
pe
hs
Hig
ard
nd limit
a
t
S per
Up
Hi
gh
Hi
d
ee
sp
gh
Hi
80(8)
spe
Hi
ed
spe it
h
m
Hig per li
Up
h
Hig
0(0)
0(0)
-10(-1)
-20(-2)
10
12
14
10
Lower
limit
Air flow (m3/min)
Upper
limit
Lower
limit
79 -
[Standard]
12
Air flow (m3/min)
14
15.5
Upper
limit
Model FDUMJ71HKXE2
Model FDUMJ90HKXE2
120(12)
120(12)
100(10)
100(10)
an
St
Lo
da
rd
gh
Hi
nda
edi
ium
M
rd
Lo
ed
M
ard
rd
nd
Sta
ee
da
20(2)
um
(0)0
[Standard]
40(4)
Sta
d
ee
sp it
gh lim
Hi w
Lo
sp
an
0(0)
h
ig
rd
da
60(6) Stan
gh
m
iu
St
20(2)
mi
r li
e
pp
Hi
ed
M
w
r
da
an
St w
Lo
Lo
d
ee
sp
40(4)
m
iu
ed
M
d
ee
sp
gh
Hi
d
ee
sp it
h
ig lim
H ow
L
gh
Hi
gh
ee
60(6)
H
d
ee
sp
Hi
sp
rd
da limit
n
a
St per
Up
h
ig
d
ee
sp
80(8)
gh
gh
Hi
80(8)
d
ee
sp it
h
m
Hig per li
Up
Hi
d
ee
sp mit
h
i
l
g
Hi per
Up
(-1)-10
0(0)
(-2)-20
-10(-1)
13 14
Lower
limit
16
18
Air flow (m3/min)
20
Upper
limit
14
Lower
limit
Model FDUMJ112HKXE2
22
Upper
limit
Model FDUMJ140HKXE2
120(12)
120(12)
100(10)
100(10)
dH
gh
0(0)
Hi
rd
da
an
20(2)
20(2)
40(4)
ard
ium
Lo
ar
nd
ed
St
h
ig
a
St
rd
d
an
St w
Lo
da
60(6)
d
ee
sp it
h
g
m
Hi w li
Lo
ium
ed
M
rd
da
an
St
an
40(4)
gh
St
Hi
iu
Lo
ar
ed
ee
w
Lo
d
ee
sp
sp
gh
Hi
60(6) S
ed
spe it
h
Hig w lim S
tan
Lo
d
m
diu
ee
Me
it
rd
da limit
n
a
St per
Up
sp
80(8)
d
r lim
ppe
U
d
Hi
dar
gh
tan
ee
gh
igh
sp
ee
sp
ee
sp
ig
gh
Hi
d
ee
sp imit
h
l
g
Hi per
Up
Hi
d
pee
h s limit
g
i
H er
p
Hi
Up
gh
80(8)
17
20
Air flow (m3/min)
0(0)
4-spot blower internal resistance[Standard]

(-1)-10
(-1)-10

24
21
Lower
limit
25
28
Air flow (m3/min)
31
Upper
limit
Lower
limit
80 -
26
30
34
Air flow (m3/min)
38
Upper
limit
2.10 Noise level

Notes (1) The data are based on the following conditions.
Ambient air tempetature: Indoor unit 27C DB, 19C WB. Outdoor unit 35C DB
(2) The data in the chart are measuted in an unechonic room.
(3) The noise levels measured in the field are usually higher than the data because of reflection.
(1) Indoor unit

Measured based on JIS B 8627

Mike position as below
1.5m
Mike (center & low points)
60
60
N 60
50
50
N 50
40
40
N 40
30
30
N2
N 30
20
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
20
8000
4000
70
60
50
40
30
60
N60
50
N50
40
N40
30
30
N2
N30
20
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
30
N2
N 30
20
63
Souud Pressure Level

(standard 0.0002 bar)
Sound pressure level

(Standard 0.0002 bar) dB
70
40
40
N 40
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
70
N 70
60
60
N 60
50
50
N 50
40
40
N40
30
30
N2
N 30
20
20
8000
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
20
8000
Mid Octave Band Frequency (Hz)
Model FDTJ112HKXE2
Model FDTJ140HKXE2
Noise level 47 dB (A) at HIGH
43 dB (A) at MEDIUM
46 dB (A) at MEDIUM
38 dB (A) at LOW
43 dB (A) at LOW
N70
50
50
N 50
70
Model FDTJ90HKXE2
40 dB (A) at MEDIUM
38 dB (A) at LOW
60
60
N 60
70
70
N 70

70
N 70
70
70
N70
60
60
N60
50
50
N50
40
40
N40
30
30
N30
N2
0
20
20
8000
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000

70
Model FDTJ45HKXE2, 56HKXE2

Model FDTJ71HKXE2
35 dB (A) at MEDIUM
36 dB (A) at MEDIUM
34 dB (A) at LOW
34 dB (A) at LOW

Model FDTJ28HKXE2, 36HKXE2

34 dB (A) at MEDIUM
32 dB (A) at LOW
20
8000
70
70
N70
60
60
N60
50
50
N50
40
40
N40
30
30
20
63
Mid octave band frequency (Hz)
N30
N2
0
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
20
8000

Models FDTWJ28HKXE2B, 45HKXE2B Model FDTWJ71HKXE2B
56HKXE2B
36 dB (A) at MEDIUM
38 dB (A) at MEDIUM
33 dB (A) at LOW
35 dB (A) at LOW
70
60
60
N60
50
50
N50
40
40
N40
30
30
N30
N2
20
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
20
8000
81 -

(standard 0.0002bar)

1.5m
70
70
N70
70
N70
60
60
N60
50
50
N50
40
40
N40
30
30
N30
N2
20
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
20
8000
Model FDTWJ90HKXE2B
Model FDTWJ112HKXE2B
Model FDTWJ140HKXE2B
39 dB (A) at MEDIUM
41 dB (A) at MEDIUM
42 dB (A) at MEDIUM
36 dB (A) at LOW
38 dB (A) at LOW
39 dB (A) at LOW
70
70
60
60
N60
50
50
N50
40
40
N40
30
30
N2
125
250
500
1000
2000
60
50
50
N50
40
40
N40
30
30
N2
63
125
250
500
60
N60
50
50
N50
40
40
N40
30
30
1000
2000
4000
N2
N30
20
20
8000
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
20
8000
60
N30
20
20
8000
4000
70
N70
N60
N30
20
63


60
70
70
N70
N70

70

Mike position as right
1.5m
70
N70
60
60
N60
50
50
N50
40
40
N40
30
30
N2
N30
20
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
20
8000

70
Models FDTSJ28HKXE2B,36HKXE2B Model FDTSJ45HKXE2B

39 dB (A) at MEDIUM
40 dB (A) at MEDIUM
38 dB (A) at LOW
38 dB (A) at LOW

Model FDTSJ22HKXE2B
Noise level 39 dB (A) at MEDIUM
38 dB (A) at LOW

Model FDTSJ71HKXE2B
40 dB (A) at MEDIUM
38 dB (A) at LOW
82 -

Unit
1.5m
1.5m


Model FDRJ28HKXE2
Models FDRJ45HKXE2,56HKXE2
41 dB (A) at MEDIUM
41 dB (A) at MEDIUM
38 dB (A) at LOW
38 dB (A) at LOW

(i) Canvas duct Panel type

Model FDRJ22HKXE2
40 dB (A) at MEDIUM
37 dB (A) at LOW



Model FDRJ112HKXE2
Model FDRJ140HKXE2
41 dB (A) at MEDIUM
43 dB (A) at MEDIUM
44 dB (A) at MEDIUM
38 dB (A) at LOW
39 dB (A) at LOW
40 dB (A) at LOW



(ii) Silent Panel type

Model FDRJ22HKXE2
Model FDRJ28HKXE2
39 dB (A) at MEDIUM
40 dB (A) at MEDIUM
40 dB (A) at MEDIUM
36 dB (A) at LOW
37 dB (A) at LOW
37 dB (A) at LOW
83 -



Model FDRJ112HKXE2
Model FDRJ140HKXE2
40 dB (A) at MEDIUM
42 dB (A) at MEDIUM
43 dB (A) at MEDIUM
37 dB (A) at LOW
38 dB (A) at LOW
39 dB (A) at LOW




32 dB (A) at MEDIUM
29 dB (A) at LOW
Models FDUMJ45HKXE2,56HKXE2
71HKXE2
32 dB (A) at MEDIUM
29 dB (A) at LOW


Model FDUMJ112HKXE2
Model FDUMJ140HKXE2
35 dB (A) at MEDIUM
37 dB (A) at MEDIUM
32 dB (A) at LOW
34 dB (A) at LOW
Model FDUMJ90HKXE2
33 dB (A) at MEDIUM
30 dB (A) at LOW
Model FDUMJ36HKXE2
1.5m
84 -
1m
Unit
1m

Model FDEJ71HKXE2B
Model FDEJ112HKXE2B

46 dB (A) at MEDIUM
42 dB (A) at LOW


40 dB (A) at MEDIUM
38 dB (A) at LOW


Models FDEJ36HKXE2B,45HKXE2B
56HKXE2B
40 dB (A) at MEDIUM
38 dB (A) at LOW
Mike (front & low point)

Model FDEJ140HKXE2B
47 dB (A) at MEDIUM
42 dB (A) at LOW
Unit
50
N50
40
40
N40
30
30
N2
N30
20
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
20
8000
Model FDKJ45HKXE2
41 dB (A) at MEDIUM
37 dB (A) at LOW
60
N60
50
Mike
(Center & low points)


70
N70
60
1m
Models FDKJ28HKXE2,36HKXE2
Noise level 40 dB (A) at MEDIUM
37 dB (A) at LOW
Model FDKJ22HKXE2
37 dB (A) at LOW
70
1m

85 -
Model FDKJ56HKXE2
43 dB (A) at MEDIUM
39 dB (A) at LOW


Model FDKJ71HKXE2
44 dB (A) at MEDIUM
40 dB (A) at LOW


Mike (front & at low point)
1m
1m
Models FDFLJ 45HKXE2, 71HKXE2

FDFUJ45HKXE2, 56HKXE2
71HKXE2
41 dB (A) at MEDIUM
40 dB (A) at LOW

Models FDFLJ28HKXE2
FDFUJ28HKXE2
38 dB (A) at MEDIUM
36 dB (A) at LOW
(2) Outdoor unit (FDC)

Note (1) The microphone position is as shown
below.
(JIS - B8627 Coolong)
It is the maximum noise level point
which locates on the vertical face 1 m
apart from unit side face.
Model
GHCP450HMTE4
Noise level 60 dB (A)
45
1m
80
70


1m
Model
GHCP560HMTE4
Noise level 61 dB (A)
80
70
60
60
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
Microphone
position of
noise meter
Elevation
31.5
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
70
60
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
8000
70
60
31.5
63
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000 8000
86 -
TB
A
BL
BL
WH
RD
Y/GN
87 ThI-A
ThI-R
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW6
Trl
Val
LEDR
LEDG
Thermistor
Thermistor
Indoor unit address ten's place
Indoor unit address unit's place
Outdoor unit address ten's place
Outdoor unit address unit's place
Change of heat pume type
Transformer
Varistor
Indication lamp (Red)
Indication lamp (Green)
Parts name
WH
12
X3
CnD
10
OR
X4
CnR
CnI
FS
CnI
WH
Parts name
J5
J6
J2
X5
X4
X3
X2
X1
J7
J3
X6
220/240V
CnW1
Fuse
Connector ( mark)
Terminal block
Terminal (F)
Connector
Operation indication (DC12)
Heating indication (DC12)
ON indication for CM (DC12)
Check indication (DC12)
Distant operation
CnR
DM
F
CnA-Z
TB
mark
mark
XR1
XR2
XR3
XR4
XR5
Mark
CFI
CnF
11
CnF
FMI
(49FI)
13
Y/GN 5 Y/GN
Printed Wiring board
CnJ
LM
CnJ
X2
X6
Val
J4
SW5
SW6
1 2 3
CnB
CnS
CnN
CnH
CnT
CnA
GR
Mark
SW5-3
SW5-2
SW5-1
Color
Red
White
Yellow
Yellow/Green
Mark
Test run of condensate pump motor

Normal
OFF
Normal
ON
OFF
Run Stop
Reverse Invalid
Heating temp. shift + 3
Input
signal
Function
Remote
controller
RD WH BK
Thc
RD
WH
Y
Y/GN
Thl-R
SM
ON
OFF
ON
Option
Thl-A
X Y Z
BK
BK
BK
LS
XR4
BK
Color
Y
Z
BK
BK
CnS2
XR5
Black
Blue
Brown
Gray
Orange
BK
WH
RD
BK
BK
BK
GR
XR2
RD
Y
BK
XR3
OR
RD
Y
XR1
CnA2
OR
Function of switches
BK
BL
BR
GR
OR
Mark
Color mark
ON
OFF 1 2 3 4
ON
OFF
SW4
Check
SW1 SW2 SW3
Normal
LEDG LEDR
HA
CnZ
CnW2
BL
BL
RD
Checker
17V
8V
RD
CnE
Trl
Models All models
Fan motor
Internal thermostat for FMI
Capacitor for FMI
Drain motor
Float switch (For overflow prevention)
Louver motor
Limit switch
Stepping motor (For Exp.v)
Auxiliary relay (For FMI)
Auxiliary relay (For DM)
Auxiliary relay (For LM)
X5
X1
WH
Mark
CnO
CnK2
(1) Indoor unit
FMI
49FI
CFI
DM
FS
LM
LS
SM
X1,2,3,6
X4
X5
Y/GN
CnK
WH
RD
3.1 Electrical wiring
Mark
Parts name
F(3.15A)RD
Meaning of marks
Outdoor
unit
(Signal
line)
Power
source
TB
L
WH
RD
OR
OR
WH
WH
BL
RD
BK
BK
BK
RD
BL
WH
WH
OR
BR
BR
BK
BK
WH
GR
RD
RD
WH
CnU
3. ELECTRICAL DATA
88 -
FMI
49FI
CFI
DM
FS
LM
LS
SM
X1,2,3,6
X4
X5
Mark
BL
BL
Parts name
TB
Y/GN
WH
RD
F(3.15A)
Fan motor
Capacitor for FMI
Drain motor
Louver motor
Limit switch
Meaning of marks
Outdoor unit
(Signal line)
TB
RD
ThI-A
ThI-R
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW6
Trl
Val
LEDR
LEDG
Mark
Y/GN
Y/GN
CnF2
UH
OR
OR
CnF2
WH
CFI2
CnFC2 OR
FMl2
Printed Wiring board
UH
CnF1
X2
10
CnI1
CnFC1 OR
Thermistor
Thermistor
Transformer
Varistor
Parts name
OR
CnF1
OR
14
X6
WH
FMl1
13
X3
12
11
X1
F
CnA-Z
TB
mark
mark
XR1
XR2
XR3
XR4
XR5
Mark
CnD
CnR
Parts name
CnI
SK
CnR
FS DM
CnI
X4
Fuse
Connector ( mark)
Terminal block
Terminal (F)
Connector
Distant operation
1. FMI2 is equipped with only for 112,140
CnO
CnK2
BL
CnK
BL
WH
RD
BK
Power
source
BL
WH
RD
WH
WH
RD
WH
GR
RD
RD
WH
WH
BR
BR
RD
RD
WH
WH
Val
CnJ
LM
CnJ
X5
OR
OR
WH
WH
CnU
J6
J2
J7
J3
J8
J4
ON
OFF 1 2 3 4
SW6
Mark
CnB
CnS
CnN
CnH
CnT
Mark
SW5-3
SW5-2
SW5-1
WH
BK
RD
Mark
Remote
controller
WH
Thc
Color
Red
White
Yellow
Yellow/Green
Option
SM
Reverse Invalid

Normal
ON
OFF

Normal
Run Stop
ON
Input
signal
LS
Z Y X
BK
Function
TB
BK
BK
Thl-R
Thl-A
XR4
XR2
RD
WH
Y
Y/GN
XR5
XR3
XR1
OFF
OFF
ON
BK
RD
WH
BK
GR
OR
RD
Y
28~56H CASES
WH
CnA2
CnS2
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
GR
OR
RD
Y
Color
Black
Blue
Brown
Gray
Orange
Color mark
BK
BL
BR
GR
OR
SW4
SW5
SW3
ON
OFF 1 2 3 4
SW2
Check
HA
Normal
SW1
CnA
Checker
CnW2
BL
BL
RD
RD
LEDR
CNZ
CnE
17V
8V
LEDG
X6
Trl
J6 has 71H ~ 90H

only shorted.
J5
J1
X5
X4
X3
X2
X1
CnW1
WH
220/240V
WH

Models All models
FMI1,2
49FI
CFI1,2
DM
FS
LM
LS
SM
X1,2,3
X4
X5
RD
RD
RD
BL
BL
RD
CnF2
OR
Y/GN
WH
CnW4
CnM
CnB2
RD
WH
RD
CnK2
BL
CnK
BL
CnW3
BL
BL
RD
CnW2
CnO
Y/GN
BL
BL
RD
RD
CnW4
BL
17V
BL
RD
8V
RD
WH
Trl
WH
WH
220/240V
RD
CnL
RD
*1
Val
RD
L
H
OR
X1
CnF3
X2
CnD
CFl2
UH
BR
OR
CnF3
FMl2
(49FI)
Fan motor
Capacitor for FMI
Drain motor
Float switch
Louver motor
Limit switch
Parts name
ThI-A
ThI-R
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW6
Trl
Val
LEDR
LEDG
Mark
Thermistor
Thermistor
Transformer
Varistor
Parts name
(2) *1 FMI2 is equipped with only for FDTSJ71HKXE2B
CFI1
UH
BR
OR
CnF2
FMI1
(49FI)
BL
BK
BK
*1
Meaning of marks
Mark
BL
BL
Y/GN
F(3.15A)
BR
RD
CnF2
CFI1
UH
BR
OR
OR
*2
X3
CnF2
Cn Cn
F6 F5
FMl1
(49FI)
X3
X2
X1
CnI
FS
CnI
X5
X4
F
CnA-Z
TB
mark
mark
XR1
XR2
XR3
XR4
XR5
Mark
Fuse
Connector ( mark)
Terminal block
Terminal (F)
Connector
Distant operation
Parts name
Notes: (1) FDTS22HKXE2B is different from others as indicated with *2 in the diagram below.
TB
A
Y/GN
Outdoor unit
(Signal line)
RD
N Y/GN
TB
BL
BL
RD
RD
Power
source
RD
Y/GN
BK
BK
BL
BL
BL
RD
WH
WH
WH
WH
Y/GN
Y/GN
BK
BR
BR
BK
BK
BK
GR
RD
WH
WH
89 -
Y/GN
WH
CnR
X5
CnJS
CnJS
LM
CnR
X4
DM
WH
WH
RD
WH
BR
RD
RD
OR
OR
WH
WH
CnU
HA
CNZ
J6
J5
J7
J3
J4
BK
RD
BK
Mark
SW5-3
SW5-2
SW5-1
Color
Red
White
Yellow
Yellow/Green

Normal
OFF
Normal
ON
OFF
Run Stop
Reverse Invalid
Input
signal
ON
OFF
ON
Mark
Remote
controller
RD WH BK
Thc
X Y Z
Option
SM
RD
WH
Y
Y/GN
Y
Z
TB
LS
Thl-R
Thl-A
XR4
XR2
Function
CnB2
BK
WH
RD
WH
BK
BL
BK
RD
BL
CnJS
CnN2
BK
BK
CnH2
BK
XR5
BL
BK
BK
XR3
XR1
OR
RD
Y
BK
GR
CnA2
Color
Black
Blue
Brown
Gray
Orange
CnB
CnS
CnN
CnH
CnT
OR
RD
Y
BK
GR
BK
BL
BR
GR
OR
Mark
Color mark
J2
SW6
ON 1 2 3 4
OFF
SW5
SW3 SW4
ON 1 2
3
OFF
SW2
J1
SW1
Normal Check
LEDG LEDR
Checker
CnE
CnA
Printed wiring board

Models All models
90 -
BL
BL
WH
Y/GN
CnS
Y/GN
F(3.15A)
CnO
CnK2
BL
CnK
BL
WH
RD
X1
CnF4
X2
Val

1
OR
OR
WH
Y/GN
CnD
CFl1
UH
CnF4
CnF2
CnF4
FMI1
(49FI)
X3
BL
X3
X2
X1
CnF2
CnF5
OR
OR
CnF5
FMI2
(49FI)
BK
X4
Parts name
Fan motor
Capacitor for FMI
Drain motor
Float switch
Thermistor
Mark
FMI1,2
CFI1,2
DM
FS
SM
X1,2,3
X4
49FI
ThI-A
ThI-R
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW6
Trl
Val
LEDR
LEDG
F
Mark
Thermistor
Transformer
Varistor
Fuse
Parts name
CnA-Z
TB
mark
mark
XR1
XR2
XR3
XR4
XR5
DM
CnRI
CnI
FS
CnI
CnRI
Parts name
CnRI
CnR
CnR
CnRI
X4
Connector ( mark)
Terminal block
Terminal (F)
Connector
Distant operation
CnF3
CFI2
UH
CnF5
*1
CnF3
Mark
Note: *1 FMI2 is equipped with only for FDRJ112HKXE2,140HKXE2
TB
RD
Meaning of marks
Outdoor
unit
(Signal line)
Power
source
TB
L
Y/GN
WH
RD
Y/GN
BL
BK
RD
Y/GN
BK
BK
BK
BL
BL
RD
RD
BR
BR
BL
WH
RD
RD
BL
BL
BL
BR
BK
RD
WH
WH
Y/GN
BK
BK
BK
BR
BR
BR
WH
GR
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
BK
WH
WH
WH
RD
SW6
1 2 3
SW5
J5
J3
J6
J4
OR
RD
Y
BK
GR
BK
Color
Black
Blue
Brown
Gray
Orange
Remote
controller
RD WH BK
Thc
X Y Z
CnA2
TB
BK
Mark
SW5-3
SW5-2
SW5-1
Color
Red
White
Yellow
Yellow/Green

Normal
OFF
Normal
ON
OFF
Run Stop
Reverse Invalid
Input
signal
Function
Mark
RD
WH
Y
Y/GN
SM
ThI-R
ON
OFF
ON
Option
ThI-A
XR4
XR2
Mark
BK
BL
BR
GR
OR
BK
BK
CnN3
BK
BK
CnN2
XR3
XR1
XR5
CnH2
CnB
BK
WH
RD
OR
RD
Y
BK
GR
RD
RD
BK
BK
Color mark
J7
ON 1 2 3 4
OFF
ON
OFF
CnN
SW3 SW4
Check
Normal
SW2
LEDR
LEDG
SW1
HA
CnZ
CnH
CnW2
BL
17V
BL
RD
8V
Checker
TrI
CnE
CnW1
WH
200/240V
WH
CnT
CnA
CnU

Models All models
91 -
FMI1,2
CFI1,2
DM
FS
SM
X1,2,3
X4
49FI
ThI-A
Parts name
Fan motor
Capacitor for FMI
Drain motor
Thermistor
Meaning of marks
Mark
Y/GN
CnM
CnO
CnK2
BL
CnK
BL
BL
TB
A BL
WH
RD
WH
Y/GN
F(3.15A)
X1
CnF4
X2
Val
Y/GN
WH
CnF4
OR
OR
CFI1
UH
ThI-R
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW6
Trl
Val
LED R
LED G
F
Mark
Thermistor
Transformer
Varistor
Fuse
Parts name
X1
X2
BL
BK
CnF2
CnA-Z
TB
mark
mark
XR1
XR2
XR3
XR4
XR5
Mark
X3
X4
OR
OR
CnF5
FMI2
(49FI)
CnF5
CnD
CnF4
CnF2
FMI1
(49FI)
X3
BL
Note: 1 FMI2 is equipped with only for FDUMJ112HKXE2, 140HKXE2
Outdoor
unit
(Signal line)
Power
source
TB
L RD
BL
RD
WH
RD
Y/GN
BK
BK
BK
BR
BR
BK
RD
RD
RD
Y/GN
WH
RD
RD
BL
BL
BL
Y/GN
WH
WH
WH
Y/GN
BL
BL
BK
BK
BK
BR
BR
BR
CnF3
CFI2
UH
CnF5
*1
CnF3
Parts name
CnG
CnRI
CnR
DM
CnR
CnRI
X4
9
Connector ( mark)
Terminal block
Terminal (F)
Connector
Distant operation
WH
BR
BR
BK
RD
RD
BK
WH
WH
GR
RD
RD
RD
RD
WH
CnU
CnRI
CnI
FS
CnI
CnRI
Check
Normal
J5
J3
J6
J4
ON
OFF 1 2 3 4
SW6
SW5
ON
OFF 1 2 3
CnN
CnA
BK
CnB
BK
TB
WH
RD
OR
RD
Y
BK
GR
Mark
BK
BK
OR
RD
Y
BK
GR
Black
Blue
Brown
Gray
Orange
Color
Remote
controller
RD WH BK
Thc
X Y Z
CnA3
OR
RD
Y
BK
GR
SW5-3
SW5-2
SW5-1
Mark
Color
Red
White
Yellow
Yellow/Green
Mark
RD
WH
Y
Y/GN

Normal
OFF
Normal
ON
OFF
Run Stop
Reverse Invalid
Input
signal
Function
SM
Thl-R
Thl-A
Option
ON
OFF
ON
BK
BL
BR
GR
OR
BK
BK
BK
BK
CnH2
CnN2 CnN3
RD/BK
RD/BK
CnA2
RD
RD
BK
XR1
XR2
XR3
XR4
XR5
Color mark
J7
CnT
CnH
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
LEDR
HA
LEDG
CnZ
Checker
CnE
BL
17V
8V
RD
CnW2
Trl
CnW1
WH
220/240V
WH

Models All models
TB
92 -
FMI1,2
CFI1,2
49FI
LM
LS
SM
X1,2,3
X5
ThI-A
Mark
WH
Y/GN
CnW4
WH
200/240V
BL
BL
RD
CnM
Y/GN
CnK2
BL
BL
RD
RD
CnO
CnK2
BL
CnK
BL
CnW3
CnW2
RD
CnW4
BL
17V
BL
8V
RD
WH
RD
VaI
*1
X3
X2
X1
OR
OR
H60
CnF3
FMI2
(49FI)
X5
X4
BR
Y/GN
CnD
CFI2
H50
CnF3
X2
X1
OR
OR
CnF2
FMI1
(49FI)
Cn
F6
X3
ThI-R
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW6
Trl
Val
LEDR
LEDG
F
Mark
Thermistor
Transformer
Varistor
Fuse
Parts name
CnA-Z
TB
mark
mark
XR1
XR2
XR3
XR4
XR5
Mark
CFI1
UH
CnF2
Cn
F5
Connector ( mark)
Terminal block
Terminal (F)
Connector
Distant operation
Parts name
Note: *1 FMI2 is equipped with only for FDEJ71HKXE2B,112HKXE2B,140HKXE2B
Parts name
BL
BL
Fan motor
Capacitor for FMI
Louver motor
Limit switch
Thermistor
Meaning of marks
Outdoor unit
(Signal line)
WH
RD
WH
Tr1 RD
CnL
Y/GN
RD
WH
RD
BL
F(3.15A)
BK
RD
RD
RD
BK
BK
TB
RD
RD
Y/GN
Y/
GN
WH
WH
BL
BL
BK
BR
BR
Power
source
WH
WH
OR
X5
CnJS
CnJS
LM
OR
WH
WH
WH
RD
J5
J1
Mark
J4
Color
Black
Blue
Brown
Gray
Orange
J7
J3
Mark
SW5-3
SW5-2
SW5-1
Mark
CnB2
BK
RD
WH
Y
Y/GN
BK
WH
RD
RD
WH
BK
BL
TB
Color
Red
White
Yellow
Yellow/Green
Remote
controller

Normal
OFF
Normal
X Y Z
RD WH BK
Thc
ON
OFF
Run Stop
SM
LS
ThI-R
ThI-A
XR4
XR2
Reverse Invalid
Input
signal
BK
BK
CnN2
BK
CnH2
BK
XR5
XR3
XR1
GR
CnS CnS2
BL
RD
RD
BK
BK
GR
ON
OFF
ON
Y
BK
RD
BK
OR
RD
OR
Function
CnB
CnN
CnH
CnT
BK
BL
BR
GR
OR
J6
J2
SW6
ON
OFF 1 2 3 4
ON
OFF 1 2 3
SW5
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
Normal Check
LEDG LEDR
HA
CnZ
Color mark
Checker
CnE
CnA
Option
CnU

Models All models
FMI
CFI
49FI
LM
LS
SM
X1,2,3
X5
ThI-A
CnO
CnK2
Y/GN
Y/GN
BL
CnK
BL
WH
RD
BL
BL
WH
Y/GN
CnF1
Parts name
WH
OR
OR
CnF1
CnF2
FMI1
(49FI)
BL
BL
*1
BK
BK
Fan motor
Capacitor for FMI
Louver motor
Limit switch
Thermistor
Meaning of marks
Mark
TB
A
RD
RD
Y/GN
WH
93 -
VaI
CnF1
Y/GN
X2
X1
OR
OR
OR
OR
CnF1
CnF2
CnF1
FMI
(49FI)
X3
CFI
X3
X2
X1
CnD
X5
GR
LM
CnJ
CnJ
X5
CFI
ThI-R
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW6
Trl
Val
LEDR
LEDG
F
Mark
Thermistor
Transformer
Varistor
Fuse
Parts name
CnA-Z
TB
mark
mark
XR1
XR2
XR3
XR4
XR5
Mark
Connector ( mark)
Terminal block
Terminal (F)
Connector
Distant operation
Parts name
Note: (1) FDKJ22HKXE2 is different from others as indicated with *1 in the diagram below.
Outdoor unit
(Signal line)
F(3.15A)
RD
RD
RD
BL
BL
Power
source
WH
BK
BK
TB
L
OR
OR
WH
WH
RD
WH
WH
WH
WH
J5
Normal
Check
LEDR
HA
CnZ
LEDG
J3
J6
J4
J7
SW6
1 2 3 4
CnB
CnN
CnH
CnT
OR
BK
Mark
SW5-3
SW5-2
SW5-1
Mark
RD
WH
Y
Y/GN
Color
Red
White
Yellow
Yellow/Green

Normal
OFF
Normal
ON
OFF
Run Stop
Reverse Invalid
Input
signal
Function
Remote
controller
RD WH BK
Thc
ON
OFF
ON
SM
LS
ThI-R
X Y Z
BK
CnS2
BK
BK
CnN2
XR4
XR2
ThI-A
XR3
XR1
XR5
Color
Black
Blue
Gray
Orange
BK
WH
TB
RD
X
BL
CnS
BL
RD
RD
BK
BK
GR
BK
RD
BK
BL
GR
OR
Mark
Color mark
ON
OFF
ON 1 2 3
OFF
SW5
CnA
CnW2
BL
BL
RD
RD
Checker
17V
8V
CnE
TrI
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
CnW1
WH
220/
240V
WH
Option
CnU

Models All models
94 -
Parts name
Fan motor
Capacitor for FMI
Thermistor
Thermistor
Mark
TB
A
BL
BL
Y/GN
WH
SW3
SW4
SW6
Trl
Val
LEDR
LEDG
F
Mark
Y/GN
Val
Parts name
X1
CnS
X2
Y/GN

Transformer
Varistor
Fuse
CnK2
BL
CnK
BL
WH
RD
Y/GN
WH
BK
BK
CnF
H
CnA-Z
TB
mark
mark
XR1
XR2
XR3
XR4
XR5
Mark
CnD
CnF
FMI
(49FI)
X3
Parts name
J5
Connector ( mark)
Terminal block
Terminal (F)
Connector
Distant operation
WH
CFI
X3
X2
X1
Trl
HA
Checker
CnW2
17V
8V
Check
LEDR
BL
BL
RD
RD
J3
J6
J4
J7
SW6
1 2 3 4
SW5
1 2 3
CnB
CnN
CnH
CnT
CnA
Mark
RD
RD
BK
BK
Black
Blue
Gray
Orange
XR4
XR2
TB
Mark
SW5-3
SW5-2
SW5-1
X Y Z
Color
Red
White
Yellow
Yellow/Green
Mark
RD
WH
Y
Y/GN
Remote
controller
RD WH BK
Thc

Normal
OFF
Normal
ON
OFF
Run Stop
Reverse Invalid
Input
signal
ON
OFF
ON
SM
Function
Thl-R
Thl-A
Color
BK
WH
RD
BK
CnN
BK
BK
CnH2
BK
XR5
XR3
XR1
Y
BK
GR
BK
GR
BK
BL
GR
OR
OR
RD
CnA2
RD
OR
Color mark
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
Normal
LEDG
CnZ
CnE
CnW1
WH
220/
240V
WH
Models All models
FMI
CFI
49FI
SM
X1,2,3
ThI-A
ThI-R
SW1
SW2
Meaning of marks
Outdoor
unit
(Signal line)
RD
RD/Y
RD
Power
source
F (3.15)
BL
BL
BL
RD
RD
BK
BK
BK
TB
L
GR
WH
WH
Option
RD
95 -
BLACK
BLUE
BROWN
GREEM
GRAY
ORANGE
RED
WHITE
YELLOW
Color
20G1,2
20OL1,2
20S
20UF
51F01
51P
52F01
52P
52S
63H
63L
CH
CN
CnE
CNG
CNS
CnV
CWFV1,2
D
ECU
EFL
F
FM01,2
Mark
THS1
H3
H2
THS2
THS3
H1
Parts name
TBH
HDF
STR
OIL
SUBTANK
TS1
51P
52P
TS2
ENGINE
CN11
CNM
PM
IIA
OL2
OL1
OPE
Tho-W
SM
DC12V
FM01
CN8
CN9
CN7
BR
CN10
BK/WH
CN2
RD
3
RD
GN
GN/BK
BR
GN/RD
GN/Y
+
3
22
21
RD
4
6
12
9
19
10
20
13
11
8
CH
LED2
PCB
(ECU)
FMO2
CN4
CN3
CN2
FC
U V W G
F
(5A)
BK
BK
BK
BK
WH
WH
WH
WH
PK
BL
Y
GN
BR
RD
OR
BK
TR2
RD
8
X14
RD
WH
WH 7 XG2 8
EFL
CM
FWD
X1
X2
X3
REV
30B
30C
N TB4
N'
L1 L2
L'
INV
LED1
CNK
52P
CN1
CN1
CN5
XG1
XG2
WH
PCB
5
RD
CN3
RD
CN13
BK/RD
BK CN12
RD
WH
GN
XG3
TR3
51F01
52F01
GN/WH
WH/BK
GN/RD
Cn6
GN/BK
WH
BR
OR
RD
Y
2 R 1
E
G
3
XG3
BK
TR1
52S
BL
WH
WH
BK
ZNR
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
CNR
1
2
3
4
5 CNI
6
7
8
27V
17V
8V
20
UF
25
24
X12
DC24V
Mark
FC
FME
FS
HDF
H1
H2
H3
HPS
IIA
INV
LED1
LED2
LED4~6
LPS (NOTE2)
OL1, 2
OPE
PM
REG
SM
STR
SV1
SV2~4
SV7
Parts name
HIGH PRESSURE SENSOR

IGNITION ASSY
INVERTER(FM02)
RED-INSPECTION DISPLAY
GREEN-NORMAL DISPLAY
SEGMENT(TIME/REVOLUTION/ERROR)
LOW PRESSURE SENSOR
ENGINE OIL LEVEL SW
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SW
MOTOR OF COOLING WATER PUMP
REGULATOR FOR STARTING
STEPPING MOTOR (MIXER)
STARTER MOTOR
SOLENOID VALVE (COOLING COMP)
SOLENOID VALVE (HOT GAS BY-PASS)
SOLENOID VALVE (OUTSIDE UNIT HEAT EXCHANGER INLET)
DRAIN HOSE HEATER
FILTER
FAN
COOLING WATER LEVEL SW
DRAIN FILTER HEATER
Mark
SB8
TB1
TB2
TB6
TBH
THS1
THS2
THS3
Tho-A
Tho-D
Tho-ET
Tho-MO
Tho-PI
Tho-W
TR1
TR2
TR3
TR4
TS1, 2
X1~23
XG1~3
ZNR
Parts name
THERMISTOR (OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE)

THERMISTOR (DELIVERY PIPE TEMPERATURE)
THERMISTOR (MACHINE ROOM)
THERMISTOR (WATER COOLED HEAT EXCHANGER OUTLET)
THERMISTOR (COOLING WATER PUMP INLET)
THERMISTOR (ENGINE OUTLET WATER TEMPERATURE)
TRANSFOMER (STARTER)
TRANSFOMER (CONTROL LINE)
TRANSFOMER (ECU)
TRANSFOMER (400/200V)
THROTTLE SW
RELAY
RELAY (IGNITION)
VARISTOR
BIMETAL SWITCH
SOLENOID VALVE (LIQUID BYPASS)

TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER)
TERMINAL BLOCK (SIGNAL)
TERMINAL BLOCK (INVERTER)
TERMINAL BOX (HEATER)
30
X20
X1
INCASE OF REPLACING THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD, REFER TO THE FOLLOWING BELOW.
1.TAKE OUT IC8 AND CHANGE IC OF NEW PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD.
2.SET SW10-2~4 FOR SPECIFIC MODEL SELECTION.
RD
L3
3-PHASE
200V
50Hz
NFB(1A)
GAS SHUTDOWN VALVE

ENGINE OIL SUPPLY VALVE
SOLENOID VALVE(4 WAY-VALVE)
SOLENOID VALVE(PARTIAL)
OVERCURRENT RELAY(FM01)
OVERCURRENT RELAY(PM)
RELAY(FM01)
RELAY(PM)
RELAY(STR)
HIGH PRESSURE SW(PROTECTION)
LOW PRESSURE SW(PROTECTION)
CRANK CASE HEATER
CONNECTOR( MARK)
RAM CHECKER
COOLING HEATING FORCED OPERATION
EXTERNAL OPERATION INPUT
CHECKER
COOLING WATER FLOW CONTROL VALVE
DIODE(STR)
ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
EFL FILTER
FUSE(5A)
FAN MOTOR
Meaning of marks
BK
BL
BR
GN
GR
OR
RD
WH
Y
Mark
Color mark
GROUND
LEAKAGE
BREAKER
L3
RD
L2
WH
WH
L2
BK
WH
RD
X6
3 2
5 4
17
X13
X16
26
SW3
SW8
IC7
ON
SW10
LED5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LED4
OFF
OUTDOOR No.
SW4
CWFV1
CWFV2
SW6
ERR
CHECK
SW5
OIL
LED6
CNE
CNCWFV
PUMP
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
IC8(OPERATION TIME)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW9
TB2
A B
1 2 3 4
15
13
Mark
SW10-8
SW10-7
SW10-6
SW10-5
SW10-2~4
SW10-1
SW9-4
SW9-3
SW9-2
SW9-1
4
5
6
1
2
3
CNS
1
2
3
4
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
CNTH
7
8
CNPS
18
22
21
20
BK
BK
WH
WH
PK
PK
RD
RD
BL
BL
GN
GN
BL
BL
BL
RD
RD
RD
BL
BL
BK
WH
CnQ2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
HPS
Function
SILENT MODE - YES
SILENT MODE - NO
4000H
8000H
COOLING HEATING FORCED OPERATION
ORDINARY
INTEGRATED OPERATION TIME OF ENGINE - YES
INTEGRATED OPERATION TIME OF ENGINE - NO
EXT.INPUT(PULSE INPUT)
EXT.INPUT(LEVEL INPUT)
CNG
COOLING HEATING
FORCED OPERATION
Tho-ET
(MACHINE ROOM)
Tho-A
(OUTDOOR TEMP.)
Tho-PI
(COOLING WATER
PUMP INLET)
Tho-D
(DELIVERY PIPE TEMP.)
Tho-MO
(WATER COOLED HEAT
EXCHANGER OUTLET)
LPS(NOTE 2)
(LOW PRESSURE SWITCH)
SPARE
SPARE
R22/R407
R407C
R22
COLD YES
AREA NO
MODEL MODEL SWITCHING
EXT.P/L
ENG.
MAINTE
FORCED
MAINTE.
HR
SILENT
LPS
HPS (HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH)
RD
CnQ1
CNS
EXT. IN
63L
RD
RD
FS
51F01
BL
BL
RD
51P
BL
(NOTE1) OPTION
DS4
SIGNAL LINE
(FOR INDOOR UNIT)
CNV
OFF
20
G2
12
20
G1
27
X14
63H 4
ON
RD
Function
OUTDOOR UNIT No.(10TH DIGIT)
OUTDOOR UNIT No.(1ST DIGIT)
ON R.LED INSPECTION LED(RESET)
SW3-1
OFF RESET INSPECTION LED(NORMAL)
ON
SW3-2
SPARE
OFF
ON SNOW YES
SW3-3
OFF PROTECT NO
ON UNMATCH YES
SW3-4
OFF CHECK NO
ON TRIAL TEST-OPERATION
SW3-5
OFF RUN
NORMAL
ON HEAT TEST-OPERATION MODE(COOLING)
SW3-6
/COOL
OFF
TEST-OPERATION MODE(HEATING)
ON EXT.
EXT.INPUT MODE(DEMAND)
SW3-7 OFF MODE EXT.INPUT MODE(NORMAL)
ON
TEST MODE
SHIPMENT
SW3-8
OFF
ORDINARY
SW4 PUMP
COOLING WATER PUMP(PM) MANUAL OPERATION SW
SW5 OIL
ENGINE OIL INSPECTION SW
SW6 ERR CHECK INSPECTION DISPLAY SW
SW7
DATA DISPLAY SELECTOR SW(10TH DIGIT)
DATA SELECT
SW8
DATA DISPLAY SELECTOR SW(1ST DIGIT)
Mark
SW1
SW2
16
X15
X10
X8 X10 X11 X12 X13 X15 X16 X17 X18 X20 X21 X22 X23
XG1
SW7
OFF
ON
X7
DATA SELECT
CNF
LED2
OUTDOOR No.
SW1
14
X11
28
X18
11
X8
10
X7
X6
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD(UNIT)
20
20
52P 20S SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4 SV7 SV8 52S OL1 OL2 FME
X5
X4
X3
X1
SW2
33
32
X5
X23
X22
X4
52
F01
LED1
X3
31
X21
RD
L1
BL
BK/Y
BK
RD
BL
BK
RD
RD
BK
RD
WH
TB3
BK
L1
WH
BK/Y
RD
RD
WH
RD
GN
BK
RD
BL
BK
RD
OR
RD
WH
RD
RD
BR
RD
RD
RD
RD
WH
BK
TR4
RD
RD
WH
RD
TB1
RD
WH
Y
GN
3-PHASE
400V
50Hz
BL
POWER
ON THE OUTDOOR
UNIT SIDE
RD
RD
OPERATION OUTPUT
OR
RD
WH
RD
OUTPUT ERROR
WH
BR
RD
WH
RD
RD
RD
WH
(2) Outdoor unit

4. OUTLINE OF OPERATION CONTROL BY MICROCOMPUTER

(1)
Remote controller (Optional parts)

FDR, FDUM, FDFL and FDFU series are not provided with AUTO SWING switch.
Panel shown below will appear if you open the cover. All contents of display on the LCD are indicated
simultaneously for the purpose of explanation.
Pull the knob on the cover to this side to open it downward.
Filter sign
Operation mode display
When this sign is indicated, clean the filter.
Displays the operation mode that

has been selected.
Remote display
Heating
preparation display
This is displayed when the unit is controlled

with an individual controller during normal operation.
(Also displayed when the air conditioner is stopped.)
Operation/
Inspection indicator lamp
During operation: Green lamp flashes.
In case of error: Red lamp flashes.
Central display
This is displayed when the unit is
controlled with the optional central console.
On/Off switch
Timer operation display
Contents of timer operation are displayed.
(Also displayed when the air conditioner
is stopped.)
CENTER REMOTE F I L T E R
PROGRAM TIMER
FILTER AUTO LIFT
ON
Setting
temperature display
DRYCOOLFANHOT KEEP
SET TEMP
FAN
Hi
Mi
Lo
OFF
A M
P M
Outdoor No.
Return air
temperature display
Displays the temperature

that has been set.
FILTER
RESET
TIMER
TEMP
T I M E
Fan speed display

Displays the fan speed that has been set.
Use this switch to start or stop the

air conditioner. First push on the
switch starts the unit and second
push stops it. (The switch can be
operated without opening the cover.)
CHECK
SET
Filter reset switch
F A N
SPEED
AUTO
SWING
Displays the return air temperature.

MODE
Note
Indicated value may be different
from actual reading on a thermometer
or other instrument but this is
notnecessarily an error.
Auto swing display
Use this switch to reset (erase) the filter

sign display.
(Press the switch after cleaning the air filter.)
Indicates the swing louver condition.
Mode switch
Use this switch to select operation
modes.
Cover
Inspection switch
Fan speed switch
Use this switch when servicing the unit.
Use this switch to set a fan speed.
Timer switch
Auto swing switch
Use this switch when selecting contents of timer operation.
Use this switch to operate or stop

the swing louver.
Set switch
Temperature/
Time setting switch
Use this switch to set a time for the timer.
Use this switch to set the room

temperature or time on the timer.
96 -
(2)
Fuzzy control Fuzzy control depending on the preset temperature and intake air temperature.
Preset temperature
Temperature difference
Calculation
Temperature variation
Room air temperature

detection (thermistor)
Command of engine
revolution speed
Command of opening
degree of expansion valve
Fuzzy calculation
If the thermostat of the indoor unit is turned on once, the thermostat will not be turned off for 4 minutes after the engine is on
even though the fuzzy calculation turns off the thermostat. If the fuzzy calculation turns off the thermostat within 4 minutes
after the engine is on, the lowest required frequency except Hz will be required as specified by the model.
ON
OFF
ON
Engine
ON
ON
Thermostat
4 minutes
3-minute delay
Thermostat ON/OFF depending on the control

Thermostat OFF depending on the fuzzy calculation
4 minutes are not counted in the range a of 3-minute delay but in the range b.
Note (1) Also if the fuzzy calculation turns off the thermostat when the operation is started, the thermostat will not be turned off for 4 minutes but the lowest frequency
will be required.
(3)
Operation of functional parts during cooling/heating operation

Operation mode
Functional part
Cooling
Thermostat
ON
Fan complete
stop
Thermostat
OFF
Engine
Starter (STR)
ignition (XG1)
Cooling water pump (52P)
Outdoor fan motor (FM01)
Outdoor fan motor (FM02)
4-way valve (20S)
Solenoid valve [capacity control] (20UF)
Solenoid valve [cooling] (SV1)
Solenoid valve [bypass] (SV2)
Solenoid valve [capacity control] (SV7)
Solenoid valve [capacity control] (SV8)
Gas shutdown valve (20G1, 2)
Cooling fan (FME)
Solenoid valve [engine oil supply] (20OL1, 2)
Cooling-water flow-control valve (CWFCV1)
Cooling-water flow-control valve (CWFCV2)
Notes (1). When the indoor units are all in the same mode, the output states are shown above.
(2). : ON, : OFF, / : ON or OFF
97 -
Heating
Thermostat
ON
Thermostat
OFF
Dehumidification
Defrosting
Priority rank of operation mode

When the indoor units are connected in the multi-mode, each unit selects the desired operation mode for itself but the operational content is determined in the priority rank of the operation mode as shown below.
If any operation mode is mismatched, the operation mode preset for the other indoor unit shall be changed.
(a) Priority rank
1)
2)
3)
At the priority rank of cooling, heating, dehumidifying and automatic operation, the earlier operated
unit has the operation priority.
If any later operated unit is mismatched, the indoor unit will be forcibly operated in the Fan mode.
If the earlier operated mode mismatches with the later operated mode, the remote control LCD on the
later operated side will flash in the operation mode (at the intervals of 0.5 seconds).
Fan mode is out of the priority rank. Moreover, cooling and dehumidifying do not mismatch
with each other in the same mode.
Code descripotion
Heating
: Mode match
Stopping
Dehumidifying
Fan
Cooling
Unit 0
<Combination of
operation modes>
................ (It operates as set by the remote control.)
: Mode mismatch
.............
Fan
Unit 1
(4)
The earlier side is prior for operation.

The later operated side is in the
drying mode, and the remote control
LCD indicates the selected operation
mode in the flashing mode.
Cooling
Dehumidifying
Heating
Stopping
(b) Operation example of priority rank (Note: ON shows the operation of the remote control.)
1)
If the units 0 and 1 are in the same mode, they operate in the mode.
Unit
Unit
Cooling
ON
Cooling
Cooling
ON
2)
If cooling is mismatched between the units 0 and 1, the unit 0 on the earlier operation side has the
priority.
Unit
Unit
Cooling
Cooling
ON
Heating
Flashing LCD of
heating mode
Fan
ON
3)
If any mismatch occurs in the same mode, the not operated side (unit 1) has the operation priority.
Unit
Unit
Cooling
Heating
ON
ON
Flashing LCD of
heating mode
Fan
Cooling
Cooling
ON
4)
Since no priority is in the fan mode, the later operated side can be operated in the desired operation
mode.
(c) Cancellation of mismatched unit
If any mismatch occurs, cancel the mismatched state by any operation of the following.
1) Change of operation mode of mismatched unit (unit indicated by the remote control LCD in the flashing mode)
Change the mode to the mode of the earlier operated side (unit now in operation).
Select Fan or stopping mode.
-
98 -
2)
(5)
Change of operation mode of earlier operated side (unit now in operation)

Change the mode to that of the mismatched unit. (Match the operation mode.)
Select drying or stopping mode.
Engine starting method

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
The engine is started with the combination of ON-OFF control of the starter motor, ignition and fuel gas shutdown valve and
the communication control of the engine controller.
To start the engine, start command of engine start/stop commands is sent. After the answer is received for the command,
the starter magnet (52S), ignition relay (XG1) and gas shutdown valve (20G1,2) will be turned on at the timing when the
engine speed is sent. When the engine is speeded up by start of the starter motor (STR) and the fuel ignition of the ignite, the
engine control will send the start state of engine start/stop states.
After start state of engine start/stop states is received, the starter magnet (52S) will be turned off within 100mS to release
the starter. In this state, the engine will be completely started.
The following start is applied when the power is turned on or the start is applied after halt of 168 hours or more.
The ignition relay (XG1) and gas shutdown valves (20G1, 2) being kept off, the starter magnet (52S) alone is continually
activated 3 times of 3 seconds for ON/2 seconds for OFF to purge air from the engine.
The following is performed for operations other than (d).
If the outdoor temperature exceeds 0 C with 20G1 and 2 in the off mode, XG1 will be turned on for 4 seconds and off for 6
seconds, 52S will be turned on for 5 seconds and off for 5 seconds for 3 times continuously. After a 1.0 second delay, 20G1
and 2 will be turned on for 3 seconds and off for 7 seconds for 3 times continuously. If the unit does not start, there is a 3
minute delay and this process is repeated once again.
To stop the engine, stop command of engine start/stop commands is sent and the gas shutdown valves (20G1, 2) and
ignition relay (XG1) are also turned off. Then, the engine speed is sent as 0 min-1.
Operation
Start request
Operation
Start/stop command
Revolution speed command

ON
Starter magnet (52S)
ON
Ignition relay (XG1)
ON
Gas shutdown valves (20G1, 2)
Operation
Start/stop command
(500)
(300)
Completed
combustion
Revolution speed monitor

Ignition
Within specified time
Start with STR

Completed engine start
(The starter is released.)
(g)
Engine stop
When SW10-6 is ON:

Upon 168-hour stopping, the engine will be operated for 3 minutes; furthermore, the lowest speed will be sent for the engine
speed. During this period, the bypass solenoid valves (SV2, SV3, SV4) will be ON (i.e., open), and both the 4-way valve
(20S) and the outdoor fan motor will be OFF. Indoor data communication will be terminated and outdoor unit protection
control will be enabled. If operation commences, this control will be terminated and operation will be governed in accordance with 3-minute delay control.
Note (1) The bypass solenoid valve SV2 is normally off for the 450 model.
99 -
(6)
Determination of engine revolution

The engine revolution speed is determined according to the frequency required by the indoor unit.
(a) Minimum/maximum frequency list
Model
GHCP450HMTE4
GHCP560HMTE4
Maximum frequency
200Hz
265Hz
Minimum frequency
10Hz
10Hz
Frequency
(b) Engine revolution speed for frequency

(i) GHCP450HMTE4
Partial load
Full load
Frequency (Hz)
Engine revolution
speed (min-1)
Frequency (Hz)
Engine revolution
speed (min-1)
Frequency (Hz)
Engine revolution
speed (min-1)
10~35
890
70~75
890
140
1655
40
935
80
935
145
1700
42.5
980
85
980
150
1745
45
1070
90
1070
155
1835
47.5
1115
95
1115
160
1880
50
1160
100
1160
165
1925
52.5
1205
105
1205
170
2015
55
1295
110
1295
175
2060
57.5
1340
115
1340
180
2105
60
1385
120
1385
185
2195
62.5
1475
125
1475
190
2240
65
1520
130
1520
195
2285
135
1565
200
2375
Notes (1) 10 to 65 Hz: Partial load (Calculation is performed at 2.5 Hz intervals)

(2) 70 to 200 Hz: Full load (Calculation is performed at 5 Hz intervals)
(ii) GHCP560HMTE4
Partial load
Full load
Frequency (Hz)
Engine revolution
speed (min-1)
Frequency (Hz)
Engine revolution
speed (min-1)
Frequency (Hz)
Engine revolution
speed (min-1)
10~50
890
90~100
890
185
1655
52.5
935
105
935
190
1700
55
980
110
980
195
1745
57.5
1025
115
1025
200
1790
60
1070
120
1070
205
1835
62.5
1115
125
1115
210
1880
65
1160
130
1160
215
1925
67.5
1205
135
1205
220
1970
70
1250
140
1250
225
2015
72.5
1295
145
1295
230
2060
75
1340
150
1340
235
2105
77.5
1385
155
1385
240
2150
80
1430
160
1430
245
2195
82.5
1475
165
1475
250
2240
85
1520
170
1520
255
2285
175
1565
260
2330
180
1610
265
2375
Notes (1) 10 to 85 Hz: Partial load (Calculation is performed at 2.5 Hz intervals)

(2) 90 to 265 Hz: Full load (Calculation is performed at 5 Hz intervals)
100 -
(7)
Outdoor fan control

In the cooling/heating mode, the outdoor blower is controlled according to the outdoor temperature (detected with Tho-A) or the
required frequency.
Note (1) The high-pressure control, the defrost control, the high-pressure control (protection) and the outdoor fan control with cooling low outdoor temperature control are prior.
Zone (B)
Zone (A)
Cooling mode
Heating mode
Zone (A)
Zone (B)
29
10
32
13
Outdoor temperature (C)
Operational content of outdoor fan

Outdoor unit fan control
Item
Cooling
Frequency (Hz)
Model
GHCP450HMTE4
GHCP560HMTE4
(8)
Heating
Zone (A)
Zone (B)
Zone (A)
Zone (B)
10~75
3 speeds
3 speeds
3 speeds
3 speeds
80~110
6 speeds
6 speeds
7 speeds
6 speeds
115~200
7 speeds
7 speeds
7 speeds
7 speeds
10~77.5
3 speeds
3 speeds
3 speeds
3 speeds
80~110
8 speeds
6 speeds
7 speeds
6 speeds
115~185
9 speeds
7 speeds
7 speeds
7 speeds
190~265
9 speeds
8 speeds
7 speeds
7 speeds
Cooling operation
(a)
Cooling
The frequency is controlled at the intervals of 5Hz according to the load (fuzzy control).
1)
The determined frequency of the indoor unit satisfies that required in the following table when the total of the required
frequencies are less than the maximum frequency.
Moreover, when the total of the required frequencies is more than the maximum frequency, the frequency is gained by
proportionally interpolating the required frequency.
Frequency bands for indoor unit models

Model (Indoor)
Category
All series
(1)
22 model 28 model 36 model 45 model 56 model 71 model 90 model 112 model 140 model
Required frequency (Hz)
10~15
10~20
10~25
10~25
15~30
15~40
15~50
35~60
35~70
Selected frequency (Hz)
5~15
5~20
5~25
5~25
5~30
5~40
5~50
5~60
5~70
Notes (1) Frequency during cooling is 45 Hz.
(b) Cooling thermostat OFF

If all thermostats are turned off in the indoor unit of the module, the cooling thermostat will be turned off in each module
unit of the outdoor unit.
If the frequency determined for the indoor unit becomes less than 5Hz or the required frequency enters the OFF area due
to the fuzzy calculation, the indoor unit will be brought into the cooling thermostat OFF operation.
101 -
(c)
Operation of major function part during cooling operation

Operation state
Engine ON
Functional part
Engine OFF
Frequency required by
Thermostat ON (indoor unit)
Refer to the table above
the indoor unit
Thermostat OFF (indoor unit)
0Hz
0Hz
Indoor fan motor
Remote controller command
Indoor electronic
expansion valve
Applied to the determined frequency
(1)
Fully closed.
Fully opened
(2)
Outdoor fan motor
Run
Stop
Ignition
ON
OFF
Gas shutdown valve
ON
OFF
Cooling water pump
ON
4-way valve
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Notes (1) Stopping and fan (including the mismatch) are included.
(2) The oil return control has the priority.
(9)
Dehumidifying (Thermal dry)
[Indoor unit adaptation]
This cooling operation is mainly for dehumidifying, with which the compressor, indoor and outdoor fans are operated in the
patterns as listed in the following table and in accordance with operation blocks switched with the room temperature sensor.
The operation blocks are selected by checking the return air temperature at 4-minute intervals. Respective functional items are
operated in each operation block as shown by the following table.
Operation block
Low
C
-2
A
+2
High
Indoor unit fan will be operated in

D block as shown below.
20 sec.
Lo
Indoor unit frequency (Hz)
Operation block
Room temperature
setting point
22 model
10
10
10
28 model
15
10
10
36 model
20
15
10
45 model
20
15
10
56 model
25
15
15
71 model
30
20
15
90 model
40
25
15
112 model
50
40
35
140 model
60
Compressor
Indoor unit electronic expansion valve
4 min.
Temperature check
45
35
Sum of frequencies on combined indoor units
0
0
Frequency adaptation
Indoor unit fan
OFF
(10)
Item
Outdoor unit fan
Me
Lo
Lo
Operation
Operation
Operation
LoOFF
Stop
Temperature check
Heating operation
(a) Heating: This is same as the cooling operation.
(b) Heating thermostat OFF
1)
If all thermostats are turned off in the indoor unit of the module, the heating thermostat will be turned off in each unit
of the outdoor unit module.
2)
If the determined frequency for indoor becomes less than 5Hz or the required frequency enters the thermostat OFF area
due to the fuzzy calculation, the relevant indoor unit will be brought into the heating thermostat OFF operation.
102 -
(c) Heating operation with thermostat OFF

1) Intermittent fan operation control
a) When the jumper wire J3 on the indoor PCB is shorted (installed at shipping),the fan of the unit of which the thermostat is
turned OFF during heating is operated in the Lo mode, and the indoor fan is turned OFF if the temperature rises 1C or more
than the return air temperature at the thermostat OFF.
b) Indoor fan OFF condition is maintained for 5 minutes and then the operation is reset at the Lo mode again. After operating for
2 minutes in the Lo mode, return air temperature is checked and, if it is 1C or higher, the indoor fan is turned OFF or, if it is
not higher than 1C, the Lo mode operation continues.
Notes (1) If the heating thermostat has been turned OFF, the temperature is indicated on the remote controller only when the indoor fan is operated in the Lo mode.
When it is OFF, the room temperature at the end of Lo operation is indicated.
(2) If the operation is changed to the defrosting mode while the heating thermostat is at OFF or the thermostat is turned OFF during defrosting, the indoor
fan is turned OFF.
(3) Residual operation of heater is dominant over this control.
2) Fan stop control

a) If the jumper wire J3 on the indoor PCB (installed at shipment) is opened or the thermostat is turned OFF during heating
operation with the remote control sensor operating, the fan on the indoor unit is turned OFF.
(d) Hot start [cold draft prevention during heating] (corresponding to the indoor unit)
1) To prevent the thermostat ON unit from cold draft during start of the heating operation, during thermostat resetting, during
defrosting operation of during heating resetting, the indoor blower is controlled according to the temperature (detected with
ThI-R) of the indoor air heat exchanger as shown below.
Preset blow rate (Hi, Me, Lo)

Stop
20
Note (1) The heating preparation (in the liquid crystal/remote

control) is displayed during the hot start (the engine runs
but the indoor fan is not at the preset blow rate.)
30
Temperature of indoor
air heat exchange (C)
2) During the heating operation, the hot start control will be also applied if the required frequency becomes 0Hz (heating thermostat OFF) but it becomes out of 0Hz and the answered-back frequency is also out of 0Hz (when the thermostat is reset).
Start
Defrost
Thermostat
OFF
Thermostat
ON
Stop Running
0Hz except
Required Hz
0Hz
0Hz except
Answered Hz
0Hz
30C or higher
Heat exchanger sensor
20C or lower
Preset value
Lo
Indoor fan
Lo
OFF
Hot start
Hot start
Hot start
Hot start
3) If the indoor fan motor has been continuously off for 7 minutes due to the hot start control, the indoor fan motor will be turn off
regardless the heat exchanger sensor (ThI-R) to turn off the heating preparation LCD.
Even of the fan motor has been continuously stopped for 7 minutes during defrosting, it will not be forcibly turned on. If the fan
motor has been continuously turned off for 7 minutes after the end of defrosting, it will be turned on regardless of the heat
exchanger thermistor.
103 -
(e)
Operation of major functional parts during heating operation

Operation state
Engine ON
Functional part
Frequency required by
Refer to the table above
the indoor unit
0Hz
Lo
Applied to the determined frequency
Indoor fan motor

Indoor electronic
expansion valve
(1)
70 Puls
Engine OFF
0Hz
Lo
(2)
Fully opened
Outdoor fan motor
Run
Stop
Ignition
ON
OFF
Gas shutdown valve
ON
OFF
Cooling water pump
ON
OFF
4-way valve
ON
ON
OFF
Notes (1) Stopping and fan (including the mismatch) are included.
(2) The oil return control has the priority.
(11) Up/down control of engine revolution speed

The revolution speed commanded to the engine controller is set at 1 step/2 seconds unless any speedup or slowdown is specially
specified for the frequency determined from the required frequency.
ion
olut
l rev ine
a
c
i
t
g
Prac d of en
spee
Frequency step
Targeted revolution speed
2 seconds 2 seconds
(12) 4-way valve switch assurance

(a) At the start of the engine, the following operation method is applied regardless of the determined frequency.
1) Revolution speed indicated at the start
Model
Item
GHCP450HMTE4
GHCP560HMTE4
1115min
1115min-1
Indicated revolution speed
2) The capacity control of the compressor is set in the partial load mode. (20UF-ON)
3) The bypass solenoid valves SV2, SV3, and SV4 are turned ON upon starting of the engine.
4) Upon faulty starting of the engine, the bypass solenoid valves SV2, SV3, and SV4 are turned OFF at the same time as the
gas-shutdown valve 20G1.2.
When the engine has been successfully started and after 3 seconds have elapsed since the receipt of [Start] of the [Engine
Stopped Condition] from the engine controller, compressor-capacity control will be set to full load (i.e., 20UF = OFF) and
SV2, SV3, SV4 will be maintained in the ON condition. Note that at this time, the 2-minute delay in compressor-capacity
control is canceled to enable full load to be achieved..
Indicated revolution
Notes (1) It will be regarded as the engine start failure if the engine does not reach
the revolution speed of 700 min-1 or more within 5 seconds after the partial
load is switched to the full load or if the engine stops before the end of the
4-way valve assurance. In this case, it will be regarded as the engine start
(500)
failure and the 3-minute delay will be regarded as invalid. Then, the engine
6 seconds
3 seconds
Engine revolution speed (min-1)
(b)
-1
will be automatically restarted after 7 seconds. The start failure of this

control will be counted as the number of the start failures.
(2) During this control, the high-pressure control and discharge pipe tempera-
(300)
ture control are made to be invalid.

Ignition
Partial
Completed
combustion
Full
104 -
(a)
Revolution speed of engine (min-1)
(13) Protective start of compressor

To protect the compressor, the compressor capacity control will be set at the partial load and
the indicated revolution speed will be set at the
upper limit of the engine revolution speed for 1
minute 45 seconds since the start after the end of
the 4-way valve switch assurance.
(b)
2-minute partial
4-way valve
assurance
Indicated
revolution
1 step/2 seconds
Protective start
of compressor
Revolution speed
area
890
If the engine revolution speed for the determined

frequency is below the indicated revolution
partial
Full
speed, the revolution speed corresponding to the
partial
1 minute 45 seconds
frequency will be applied.

(c)
For the first start after 6 hours or more of power
per minute for 18 minutes after the start. However, it must not exceed the area of the previous
item for 1 minute 45 seconds.
Revolution speed of engine (min-1)
or more of halt, it is increased at a rate of 2 steps
~
~
ON or the second or following start after 6 hours

2 steps/minute
Partial load,
2 minutes
Indicated
revolution
speed
~
~
890
2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 17 18
Time (minute)
Partial load
1 minute 45 seconds
(d)
For the fist start of less than 6 hours, the compressor is controlled according to the energized time of the crank case heater.
For the second or following start, it is started at the above item (a).
(e)
It stops for 18 minutes after the start. For the next start, the frequency increasing method with the control is applied till a total
of 18 minutes, and the upper limit is increased at a rate of 2 steps/minute.
(14) Compressor protection control due to energized time of crank case heater
After power ON (CH energization), the time is integrated. If the operation is started in less than 6 hours, the engine revolution
speed is controlled as follows.
Revolution speed of engine
2 steps/5 minutes 2 steps/1 minute

10 minutes
Partial load
Partial load
2 minutes
5
Partial
load
10
15
20
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
Time (minute)
1 minute 45 seconds
Notes (1) The control is canceled in 38 minutes.
(2) If it is stopped during the control, the control is applied till the integrated operation time including the second and following operation times
becomes 38 minutes.
105 -
(15) Warming-up operation

(1)
The warming-up control is applied after the protective start of the compressor is completed.
(2)
During warming-up, the [Permission] form of the [Warming-up Operation Permission Command] is sent to the engine
controller, and when 5 minutes have subsequently elapsed, the [Prohibited] form of this command is sent. (Only applicable
to cooling operation)
(3)
(4)
When both of the following conditions have been satisfied, the engine speed is set to partial-load, 1160 min-1.
a)
The operation mode at the termination of compressor-protection control is heating.
b)
The temperature of the water at the cooling-water pump inlet (i.e., Tho-PI) is less than 55C.
While warming-up control is active, the engine controller itself controls the engine speed in accordance with the water
temperature. If the indicated engine speed is greater than the warming-up operation speed, then this indicated speed is given
priority.
(16) Engine start delay

If the engine is stopped due to cool/heating thermostat activation, remote control start switch, trouble or similar, the engine can not
be restarted for 3 minutes. Here, even if the power is turned on, the 3-minute timer is invalid.
(17) Compressor capacity control
(a)
The capacity of the compressor is controlled by opening and closing the solenoid valve 20UF on the outdoor side.
(b)
When the solenoid valve 20UF is opened, the partial load operation is selected, and when it is closed, the full load operation
is selected.
(18) Cooling operation control at the low outdoor temperature (down to 5C)
If cooling is necessary in the intermediate term or winter in the OA room, electricity control room or similar, this function will
be applied even at the standard specifications.
The revolution speed of the outdoor fan motor is controlled according to the temperature (Tho-R) and outdoor temperature
(Tho-A) of the outdoor air heat exchanger in order to make the cooling operation possible to the outdoor temperature of 5C.
(a)
When the temperature of the outdoor air drops to 22C or lower, the condition of the high-pressure is checked and speed of
the outdoor fan motor is controlled. Note that this control procedure is disabled when the temperature of the outdoor air rises
to 27C or higher.
Raise 1 speed
Outdoor unit fan
control disabled.
Maintain
speed
Outdoor unit fan

control enabled.
Lower 1 speed
22
27
1.45
1.65
High Pressure (MPa)
(b) Control content

Outdoor temperature (C) High pressure (MPa)
1.45 or lower
(Control enabled
at 22 or lower)
1.45 ~ 1.65
(Control disabled
at 27 or higher)
1.65 or higher
Control details
The speed of the outdoor fan motor is reduced by a single level. The condition of the high-pressure
is checked after 2 minutes have elapsed, and if found to be 1.45 MPa or lower, the speed is reduced
by a further level.
The speed of the outdoor fan motor is maintained at the current level.
The speed of the outdoor fan motor is increased by a single level. The condition of the highpressure is checked after 1 minute have elapsed, and if found to be 1.65 MPa or higher, the speed is
increased by a further level. Note, however, that the maximum speed remains the limiting factor.
106 -
(c)
If the outdoor temperature (Tho-A) is 22C or less and the required frequency is 20Hz or less, the solenoid valve (SV2, 3) for
hot gas bypass will be turned on. It will be reset at the outdoor temperature of 25C or more or at the required frequency of
25Hz or more.
ON
ON
450 type : SV3

560 type : SV2
OFF
22
OFF
25
20
25
Determined frequency(Hz)
(19) Outdoor fan control for lower outdoor temperature

Only during heating operation, the outdoor fan control is applied according to the outdoor temperature in order to do the ON-OFF
control of the outdoor fan.
ON
(Ordinary control)
OFF
2
(20) High-pressure control
During operation, high-pressure control is enabled in accordance with the following if the high-pressure sensor (HPS) detects
either a pressure of 2.70 MPa or higher, or a pressure of 2.85 MPa or higher.
(a) Control when the high-pressure sensor detects a pressure of 2.70 MPa or higher:
1) If the high-pressure detects a pressure of 2.70 MPa or higher during warming-up operation, the [Prohibited] form of the
[Warming-up Operation Permission Command] is sent to the engine controller.
2) Note that this is disabled during 4-way valve protection operation.
3) Control details:
a) When the high-pressure detects a pressure of 2.70 MPa or higher, the frequency level is reduced in accordance with
the model in question.
Model
Frequency reduction level
GHCP450HMTE4
GHCP560HMTE4
Up-down control of the engine speed is disabled during

the period of deceleration.
Note (1) During cooling operation (including low outdoor-air cooling control), the fan tap for the outdoor fan is determined in accordance with
item (a)-4; during heating operation, this is determined in accordance with normal control.
b) If the high-pressure sensor's value fails to drop to 2.30 MPa or lower, the frequency level will be subsequently
dropped at 30-second intervals in accordance with item (a) above
c) The partial-load lower-limit will apply and operation will not be terminated.
d) In situations where the determined frequency drops and full load switches to partial load, operation will be performed in accordance with compressor-capacity control.
e) When the high-pressure sensor detects a level of 2.70 MPa or higher, the compressor cooling solenoid valve (SV1)
is turned ON, and the hot-gas bypass solenoid valve (SV3) is turned ON in accordance with the requested frequency. When the high-pressure sensor detects a level of 2.30 MPa or lower, both the compressor cooling solenoid
valve (SV1) and the hot-gas bypass solenoid valve (SV3) are turned OFF.
4) During cooling operation and low outdoor-air cooling control, the high-pressure is regularly checked and the following
control is implemented.
a) When the high-pressure sensor detects a level of 2.70 MPa or higher, the fan speed is increased by a single level.
b) When 1 minute has passed after the fan speed was increased, the high-pressure sensor level is checked, and if it is
found that the pressure has not dropped to 2.20 MPa or lower, the fan speed is increased by a further level. If it is
found that the pressure has, in fact, dropped to 2.20 MPa or lower, outdoor fan control is implemented.
(b) Control when the high-pressure sensor detects a pressure of 2.85 MPa or higher:
1) If during full-load operation, a pressure of 2.85 MPa or higher is detected by the high-pressure sensor, the compressor
capacity control is switched to partial-load operation. Furthermore, even if a pressure of 2.85 MPa or higher is detected
by the high-pressure sensor during partial-load operation, the compressor capacity control will not be changed.
2) In situations where the high-pressure sensor detects a pressure of 2.85 MPa and partial-load operation is to be implemented, and furthermore, when the current full-load speed is greater than the maximum partial-load speed for the
model in question, the maximum partial-load speed is sent to the engine controller and control is then switched to
partial-load operation.
If [minimum partial-load speed full-load speed maximum partial-load speed], then partial-load operation is implemented at the full-load speed.
-
107 -
3)
4)
5)
In normal situations, when the high-speed condition is in accordance with item b), 30-second frequency reductions are
continued in accordance with item a). (The term "normal situations" as used here refers to all situations other than
those corresponding to 63H breakage and/or open circuits.).
End conditions
If the high-pressure drops to 2.30 MPa or lower, frequency-cancellation operation will be implemented.
When the engine is stopped and then restarted, normal control will be restored.
Note (1) An abnormal stop can be implemented by assembling the high-pressure switch (63H) to the gas shutdown valve circuit, and by operating 63H
to turn off the shutdown valves (20G1, 20G2).
(21) Discharge pipe temperature control

If the discharge pipe temperature (Tho-D) exceeds the preset value, the solenoid valve (SV1) for compressor cooling and the
indoor expansion valve will be controlled to suppress the discharge temperature. If the temperature rises farther, it will be controlled to lower the revolution speed of the engine.
(a) Control of compressor cooling solenoid valve (SV1) due to the discharge pipe temperature (Tho-D).
SV1 Open (ON)
SV1 Closed (OFF)

108C
115C
Discharge pipe temperature (Tho-D)
(b)
Control of indoor expansion valve with discharge pipe temperature (Tho-D)

Holding
= Added by 1Hz
Retention
Reset
80C
108C
115C
Discharged pipe temperature (Tho-D)
(c)
Engine revolution speed control with discharge pipe temperature

Revolution speed down
Note (1) When Tho-D 120 C after 1 minute has passed since
the speed reduction, the speed is further reduced.
Retention
Reset
115C
120C
(d)
Discharge pipe temperature trouble

1) If the discharge pipe temperature (Tho-D detection) continuously rises beyond 130C for 2 seconds, the engine will be
stopped. If it drops to 90C or less, it will be automatically reset.
Engine stop
Retention
Engine operation
90C
130C
2) If the second stop of the compressor occurs within 60 minutes after the first stop due to the discharge pipe temperature
(Tho-D detection) trouble or if it continues beyond 130C for 60 minutes, the unit will stop in the trouble mode with the
inspection display (remote control: E36, outdoor LED-green/red: continuous flashing, red).
Note (1)
Unless the temperature has been below 90C for continuous 45 minutes since the discharge pipe temperature trouble occurred, it can
not be restored into operation. (Cleared by resetting the power.)
108 -
(22) Frequency Release Operation

Simultaneous with the satisfaction of the conditions for cancellation of engine speed control in accordance with high-pressure
control, discharge-pipe temperature control, and cooling-water temperature, the frequency will be raised by a single level. When
operation has been maintained at that frequency for a period of 1 minute, the level-increasing procedure will be repeated once
again. This control will be cancelled when the actual frequency matches the required frequency.
(23) Solenoid control on the outdoor side
(a)
When the engine is started, SV2, 3 and 4 (hot gas bypass) are controlled with the 4-way valve assurance.
(b)
SV2 (hot gas bypass) with lower outdoor temperature is controlled with the low outdoor air cooling control.
(c)
SV1 (for compressor cooling) and SV3 (hot gas bypass) with the high pressure sensor are controlled with the high pressure
control.
(d)
SV1 (for compressor cooling) with the discharge pipe temperature (Td) is controlled from the discharge pipe.
(e)
When the determined frequency is 70Hz or less, SV4 (hot gas bypass) is turned on. If it exceeds 70Hz, it will be reset.
Note, however, that during heating operation only, if the engine speed corresponds to the minimum partial-load speed and the
high pressure is simultaneously 1.40 MPa or less, then SV4 (hot-gas bypass) will be turned OFF.
(f)
SV7 and SV8 (performance-control valves) are operated in accordance with control for the heat-exchanger refrigerant-inlet
solenoid valves.
(g)
Operation for each condition

4-way valve Low temperaprotection ture cooling
SV1
450 model 560 model
HPS
HPS&
(1)
T <
= 52.5
HPS&
(1)
T <
= 70
ON
SV2
(Large)
Td
(2)
(3)
FK <
= 70
Heating
Cold-region
Outdoor
temperatureTd interval control
ON
ON
ON
(560 type) (560 type)
SV3
(Middle)
ON
SV4
(Small)
ON
ON
(450 type)
ON
(560 type)
ON
ON
ON
ON/OFF
SV7
SV8
ON
ON/OFF
Notes (1) Total of required frequencies

(2) Discharged pipe temperature
(3) Determined frequency
(4) Blank column shows OFF.
(i)
SV1 is operated under the OR conditions that are the detection of 2.70 MPa by the HPS and the operation of the Td.
(ii)
If SV2, 3 and 4 are doubly controlled, they will operate as follows.

1) Among SV2, 3 and 4, the large or small one is turned on in the priority.
Example 1 If SV2, 3 and 4 are required to be turned on, SV2 alone will be turned on.
Example 2 If SV3 and 4 are required to be turned on, SV3 alone will be turned on.
2) If the double control is reset and the signal control is applied, the ordinary solenoid valve control will be applied.
3) Among SV2, 3 and 4, two or more ones must not be turned on at the same time.
109 -
(24) Cooling water pump operation and cooling fan operation

(a)
The cooling water pump and cooling fan are turned on and off with the magnetic contactor 52P for pump.
(b)
The pump will be started when the engine is completely started and the 4-way valve assurance is completed.
(c)
After the engine stops, the pump will be kept on for 3 minutes 10 seconds and be turned off when the time has elapsed.
Operation
1 The engine starts
2 The 4-way valve
protection is completed.
Engine
ON
Cooling water pump
(d)
3 minuets 10 seconds
Manual pump operation

(i)
Press the manual pump start switch (SW4) on the P.C.B of the outdoor unit, and the pump will be started in the manual
mode.
(ii)
Possible conditions for manual start

1) The indoor unit is wholly stopped.
2) Also possible during abnormal stop (however excluding the pump motor overcurrent trouble, cooling water level
trouble, reversed/open-phase power supply and cooling water system trouble)
(iii) During manual operation, the cooling-water flow-volume control valves (CWFCV1, CWFCV2) are opened and closed
sequentially in order to perform air bleeding from the cooling-water system.
Time elapsed
Cooling-water flow-volume
control valve 1 (CWFCV1)
Switch on 30 seconds
Bypass-side, 200 pulses
30 seconds 1 minute, 30 seconds

1 minute, 30 seconds 2 minutes
Bypass-side, 0 pulses
Cooling-water flow-volume
control valve 2 (CWFCV2)
Water heat-exchange side, 0 pulses

2 minutes 3 minutes
(iv) The sequence of [switch on 30 seconds], [30 seconds 1 minute, 30 seconds], [1 minute, 30 seconds 2 minutes],
and [2 minutes 3 minutes] is considered as being one cycle, and this cycle is repeated until the pump manualoperation switch (SW4) is pressed once again.
(v)
When the engine is started and the pump is turned on with the ordinary control during manual operation, the control
will be reset.
(e)
The cooling fan FME is turned ON only when the conditions from item (f) have been satisfied.
(f)
The cooling fan FME is turned ON and OFF in accordance with the outdoor air temperature (Tho-A) for cooling operation
and dehumidifying operation and with the machinery-compartment temperature (Tho-ET) during power ON.
(Cooling, dehumidifying operation)
(Power ON)
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
22
27
50
Outdoor-air temperature (C)
(g)
60
Machinery-compartment temperature (C)
If the engine stops (or a full stop is implemented) while the cooling fan FME is ON, this fan will remain ON for a subsequent
period of 3 minutes and 10 seconds after stopping of the engine, and it will then be turned OFF.
110 -
(25) 7-segment LED display

(a)
The 7-segment display unit is composed of 2 digits for the function display unit and 4 digits for the data display unit, and
various data can be displayed with a combination of SW7 and SW8.
Function display
LED4
LED5
SW7
SW8
Data display unit
LED6
LED7
LED8
LED9
(Example)
0 1
(b)
Two kinds of displays for RAM values and troubles are provided.
(c)
Trouble display function
Example 1
Example 2
(d)
E is displayed at the 1st bit on the function display unit.
The number of the trouble code is displayed on the data display unit.
The display method and content of a trouble comply with the trouble and fault display.
RAM value display function
Example
(e)
The next RAM value is displayed with a combination of SW7 and SW8.
The data display is justified rightward.
The function No. not defined is designated - on the data display unit.
The function display of 00 thru 47 shows the indoor unit No.
At shipment, SW7 and SW8 are set at 60 (engine operation time following maintenance).
111 -
(f)
Display content
Display content
Connected capacity 1 of indoor unit
SW7
SW8
Functional
display
Data display
(example)
Display
range
00~47
22
22~140
Minimum
unit
Connected capacity 20 of indoor unit
00~47
140
22~140
Hz requiered by indoor unit 1
00~47
40
0~125
Hz required by indoor unit 20
00~47
20
0~125
Answer-back Hz of indoor unit 1
00~47
50
0~155
00~47
50
0~155
Number of indoor units connected
56
15
0~20
Total of Hz required
57
200
0~1000
Determined Hz
58
195
0~265
Throttle opening degree
59
10
0~100
Integrating operation hours of engine
60
3000
0~9999
Engine revolution speed
61
2200
0~3000
Indicated engine revolution speed
62
2150
0~2400
Compression full/partial -indicates halt
63
F. P.
"" indicates stop
Engine cooling water temperature
64
60
-20~130
Outdoor temperature
65
35
-20~43
Discharge-pipe temperature
66
100
-20~135
Water heat exchanger's refrigerant-outlet temperature
67
20
-35~75
Cooling-water-pump inlet temperature
68
50
-20~135
Integrated operation time of engine
71
3000
0~9999
Integrated operation time of engine
0001
10000~32767
Starter operated items (times)
72
250
0~9999
Starter operated items (times)
0001
10000~32767
Starter operated hours (min )
73
50
0~9999
Engine operated times (times)
74
250
0~9999
Engine operated times (times)
0001
10000~32767
High pressure (MPa)
79
2.31
0~3.00
0.01
Low pressure (MPa)
80
0.32
0~1.00
0.01
Machinery-compartment temperature
81
35
-20~135
00~47
50
0~155
00~47
50
0~155
Cooling-water flow-volume control valve 1
86
250
0~850
Cooling-water flow-volume control valve 2
87
69
250
0 0 1 0
0~850
Solenoid valve
-1
Solenoid valve
70
SV1
SV2
SV3
SV4
0:OFF
0:OFF
0:OFF
0:OFF
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
SV7
SV8
0:OFF
0:OFF
1:ON
1:ON
0 0 0 1
}
Note (1) * When the accumulated time or repetitions exceeds 10,000, the 7-segment function display indicated the 10,000 digit.
112 -
Empty
SW7
SW8
Functional
display
Abnormal stop
75
0 0 1 0
Abnormal stop 2
76
0 0 0 1
Abnormal engine stop
77
0 0 1 0
Display content
Data display(example)
Fan inverter
HPS activation
Abnormal discharged pipe temperature
Empty
63L activation
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Overspeed of engine
Underspeed of engine
Stepping motor trouble
Abnormal engine stop 2
78
0 1 0 0
Water temp. thermistor trouble
Oil level SW trouble
Fully closed/open SW trouble
IIA/hydraulic SW trouble
(26) Test operation, and operation with external input

(a)
Test operation
Operation in the test operation mode is controlled from outdoor with the switches SW3-5, 6 on the outdoor P.C.B.
Functions of switches
Switch
Function
ON
All indoor units connected are operated.

The indoor unit requires the maximum frequency, and the outdoor unit is operated at the maximum frequency
(See the table below.) according to the request from outdoor.
Ordinary operation
SW35
OFF
SW36
ON
SW35 is ON.: Cooling operation
OFF
SW35 is ON.: Heating operation
Note (1) The operation is prior to the center console and other options. The operation state is transferred to the option.
Maximum frequency of outdoor unit during test operation (The rated capacity time is shown.)
Model
GHCP450HMTE4
GHCP560HMTE4
Max. operation Hz
200
265
Remarks: The fuzzy control is not done during test operation. (The calculation is done.) The other control is valid.
(b) Outdoor/indoor connection unmatch check function

It is operated from the outdoor with the switches SW3-4, 5 and 6 on the P.C.B of the outdoor unit. This is prior to the center
console and other options, and the operation state is transferred to the option.
(i)
Start conditions: SW3-4, 5 and 6 are all turned on.
(ii)
Control content
1) If the energization control of the crank case heater is activated
The ordinary cooling operation is executed until the integrated operation time of the engine becomes 25 minutes.
When it becomes 25 minutes, both indoor and outdoor units are stopped. (Stopped when fully open indoor expansion valve, indoor fan OFF, remote control center are displayed.)
After 3 minutes, the heat exchange thermistor temperature (ThI-R) of all indoor unit is checked, and the outdoor
unit alone is restarted. (In the indoor unit, the expansion valve to stop the fan is fully opened.) The temperature of
the indoor heat exchange thermistor is compared with the temperature of the heat exchange thermistor before
restart every 20 minutes to verify that it drops 7 deg or more. If there is any unit whose temperature does not drop
7 deg or more even though it is continuously checked for 5 minutes, the trouble will be displayed on the remote
control and outdoor unit.
-
113 -
2) If the energized control of the crank case heater does not operate
Check the heat exchange thermistor temperatures (ThI-R) of all indoor units, and start the outdoor unit alone. (If
SW3-4, 5 and 6 are turned on during cooling operation or ordinary operation, both indoor and outdoor units are
stopped. After 3 minutes, check the temperatures of the heat exchange thermistor of all indoor units, and start the
outdoor unit alone. The remote control is stopped with center display.)
Every 20 minutes, the temperature of the indoor heat exchange thermistor is compared with the temperature of the
heat exchange thermistor before the outdoor unit alone is started to verify that it drops 7 deg or more. The display
method is the same as that in the previous item.
(ii)
End conditions: The unit is stopped if it is completely verified that all indoor units are normal. When the check of 5
minutes is completed, it is stopped with the normality or abnormality displayed.
(iii) 7-segment LED display

The ordinary display is applied for 25 minutes and 5 minutes as previously described.
1) 7-segment LED display (lit on the function display unit, and flashing on the data display unit) for normal state
Flashing for 20 units.
Displayed regarding of the positions of SW7 and 8.
(Lit.)
(Flashing)
2) 7-segment LED display for abnormal state

The error No. 30 flash.
(Lit.)
(Flashing)
3) Flashing 7-segment LED is canceled when SW3-4 is turned off.
(c)
Item 1) above
56
20 (Flashing) / Normal display with SW7, 8
Item 2) above
30 (Flashing) / Normal display with SW7, 8
Demand control
1) The demand control is a function applicable for peak-cut of power.
2) The demand control/ordinary operation is switched or the operation enable mode/disable mode is switched with the dip
switch SW3-7 on the board of the outdoor unit, and external input (CnS).
3) The signal system of the external input (CnS) can be switched to the level input/pulse input with the jumper line on the
board of the outdoor unit.
J1 Short circuit (at shipment from factory): CnS is valid as the level input.
J1 Open (cut at the site): CnS is valid as the pulse input.
4) Operation with input CnS from the outdoor unit: The stop controls are summarized in the following table.
Cns meaning switch: SW37
CnS input system switch: J1
Input: CnS
Short circuit
J1: Short circuit

Level input
J1: Open
Pulse input
Open
J1: Short circuit

Level input
Short circuit
Open
SW37: OFF
CnS: Operation enable/
disable mode switch
Operation prohibition mode
SW37: ON
CnS: Demand control/normal
operation switching
Demand control
Normal operation
Operation permission mode

Operation permission/prohibition mode (inversion)
Normal operation/Demand control switching

(Reversal)
Operation permission mode
Normal operation
Demand control
Operation prohibition mode
J1: Open
Pulse input
(NOP)
(NOP)
5) The remote control shows the operation state. The operation state is transferred to the option.
6) If any control is not received from the remote control due to this control, center is displayed.
-
114 -
7) Operation pattern
Among the following functions, any function can be selected with SW3-7 and jumper cable (J1).
1
Operation enable/operation disable mode (SW3-7 OFF), level input (SW10-1 ON)
ON (shorted)
Air conditioner ON OK
CnS input
OFF (open)
ON
OFF (open)
ON
OFF
ON
Remote controller operation

Center
Remote controller display
Center
Remote
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Air conditioner ON/OFF
Ordinary operation/demand control (SW3-7 ON), level input (SW10-1 OFF)
CnS input
ON (shorted)
OFF (open)
ON (shorted)
Normal
Demand control
Normal
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Remote

ON
ON
Engine
OFF
OFF
Engine OFF
OFF
OFF
Operation enable/operation disable mode (SW3-7 OFF), pulse input (SW10-1 ON)
ON
OFF
ON
CnS input
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF

Center
Remote
ON
115 -
Center
OFF
Remote
ON
Center
Ordinary operation/demand control (SW3-7 ON), pulse input (SW10-1 OFF)

ON
OFF
ON
Demand control
OFF
Demand control
CnS input
ON
OFF ON
OFF

Remote
Engine
OFF
Engine OFF
Notes (1) After power is turned on, the remote is selected but the center is disable till the registration completion of the indoor unit (approx. 40 seconds).
(2) After power is turned on, the ordinary operation is initially set.
(27) Snow fan control

Set the dip switch SW3-3 on the outdoor unit control circuit board to ON. The outdoor unit fan of the standing unit is operated at
the Hi speed for 10 seconds once every 10 minutes when the outdoor air temperature drops to 3C or less under the condition that
the outdoor fan is stopped continuously for 10 minutes or more.
ON
Outdoor fan
OFF
Outdoor air temperature (C)
(28) Filter Sign

When 600 hours(1) of operating time (the amount of time the on/off switch is in the on position) has been reached, the filter sign on
the remote controller will come on. If the filter sign is not reset, it will begin flashing 8 hours after it first came on. Resetting can
be done during normal operation by pressing the "Filter Reset" button. It can also be reset when the power is off.
Note (1) This is disabled by cutting the jumper line (J4).
(29) Auto Swing Control (Excepted FDR, FDUM, FDFL, FDFU, models)
(a)
Have a louver motor to move the louvers up and down for the so called AUTO SWING function.
(b)
The louver auto swing starts when the AUTO SWING switch is pressed once and stops when the AUTO SWING switch is
pressed again. The louver position is displayed on the LCD on the remote controller. During auto swing, the position displayed on the LDC changes, but the positions of the louvers and the display are not coordinated. (The louvers swing3-4 times
per minute but the display changes once per second.)
(c)
Stopping the louvers

When the AUTO SWING switch is pressed to stop the louver movement, the LCD louver-position display stops and the
louvers stop when they come to the position displayed on the LCD. There are four louver stop position on the LCD. (When
jumper wire J2 on the indoor unit printed circuit borad is cut, the louvers stop immediately at the AUTO SWING switch is
pressed to stop them and the LCD display changes to show this posiition. Refer to page 199 for position of jumper wire J2.
(d)
Movement of louver when the power supply to the controller controlling 4 positions of the louver is switched on.
When power supply is switched on, the louver will automatically swing about 2 times (without operating remote controller).
This is an action for the microcomputer to confirm the louver position in order to input the cycle of the luver motor (LM) to
the microcomputer with the limit switch (LS) pushing the louver motor (LM). If the LS action is not input to the microcomputer, the louver will stop within 1 minute after the power supply is switched on and will not move from then on.
116 -
(e)
Keeping the louvers horizontal during heating

While HOT KEEP is displayed (during hot start operation or when the thermostat has turned off during heating operation),
the louvers stay in the horizontal position to prevent cold drafts, independent of the setting of the AUTO SWING switch
(auto swing or stop). The louver position display of LCD displays continuously the original position before this control
operation. When the HOT KEEP display goes out, both the louver and the LCD display return to their previous positions.
(However, after the power supply to the unit is switched on, the louvers swing two times as a check of the power source
frequency, regardless of the setting of the ON/OFF or AUTO SWING switches.)
(30) Condensate pump motor (DM) control (Only FDT, FDTW, FDTS, FDR, FDUM models)
(a)
Drain motor is started no sooner than the compressor is turned ON during cooling or dehumidifying operation. The drain
motor continues to operate for 2 minutes after the stop of unit operation, stop with the error stop, thermostat stop and at
switching from cooling or dehumidifying operation to blowing or heating operation. When there is any unit subjected to oil
return control, the drain motor is operated for 3 minutes at such occasion.
Note (1) Drain motor may be operated forcibly by turning ON the dip switch SW5-3 on the PCB. Turn the switch OFF to stop the drain motor.
(b)
Overflow detection is always operable by means of the float switch regardless of operation modes. If the overflow is detected
(or when the float switch is disconnected or its wire is broken), operation is stopped with the error stopped. (FDT, FDTW,
FDTS, FDR and FDUM) If the overflow is detected while the drain motor is stopped, the drain motor is operated for 3
minutes and then the overflow detection is performed to judge whether it is normal or not.
Indoor unit operation mode
OFF (1)
COOL
FAN (2)
DRY
During engine ON
HEAT
Control A
During engine OFF
Notes (1) Including OFF and error stop during COOL,

DRY, FAN and HEAT.
(2)Including FAN operation due to unmatch
of operation mode.
Control B
Flow chart of drain motor operation

Float switch operation (Contactor : Open)
Operation mode?
Control B
OFF
FAN
OFF
Control A
HEAT
COOL DRY
Engine
ON
*1
Drain motor ON
Error stop E9
Drain motor ON
NO
3 minutes
after float operation?
3 minutes
after float operation?
YES
No
Drain motor OFF
NO
10 seconds after
drain motor OFF?
Float SW?
YES
Reset
Operation
Reset
Drain motor OFF
Error stop E9 continues
Float SW?
Operation
End
Float operation?
Error stop E9
Drain motor 3-minute ON
No
YES
* 1 In the flow in the frame of broken line, operations of operation mode change and thermostat reset are effective and operated immediately upon selection.
However, the compressor ON command is not transmitted.
1)
Control A
a) When the float switch detects drain, E9 is displayed, the drain pump is turned ON, and an abnormal stop is achieved by
fully closing the expansion valve. After 3 minutes have passed, the condition of the float switch is again checked, and if
it is found to be normal, the operation of the drain pump is terminated; however, the other abnormal-stop items are
maintained in the current condition..
b) If the float switch continues to detect drain, the operation of the drain pump is allowed to continue. Note that this will
continue as long as the float switch detects drain.
-
117 -
2)
Control B
a) If the float switch detects the draining, the expansion valve is closed, the drain motor is turned ON for 3 minutes and, as 10
seconds elapses after the drain motor OFF, the float switch is checked. If the result is normal, the operation stops in the
normal way while, if it is not normal, E9 is displayed, the drain motor is turned ON and the operation stops with the error
stop with the expansion valve being closed completely. (It is left at ON while the draining is detected.)
(31) Expansion valve control for oil return

After the power is turned on, the first ON time of engine start is integrated. In order to collect the refrigerant oil after 10 hours of
the running, it will be stopped, the thermostat will be turned off, blowing will be applied and the indoor expansion valves of the
abnormally stopped units will be sequentially and fully opened one unit by one unit.
Notes (1) The sequence to fully open the expansion valves is the sequence of the addresses registered in the outdoor unit but not the sequence of the address
Nos..
(2) The units in the cooling and dehumidifying units are fully opened for one minutes, and the units in the heating mode are fully opened for 4
minutes.
(32) Value shift adjustment of room air temperature detection in heating

Under the standard specifications, the room temperature is adjusted at the setting temperature by controlling the indoor unit
capacity based on the setting temperature of thermostat and the suction air temperature.
However, where the unit is installed in the ceiling and warm air tends to stay around the ceiling, temperature in the living space
may not be adjusted at the setting temperature. In such occasion, it is recommended to change the setting of dip switch SW5-2,
which is found on the PCB of the indoor unit, to ON position so that the capacity control is tripped at +3 above the setting
temperature of thermostat and thus the heating feeling will improve.
Standard
With SW5-2 "ON"
Run
Run
Stop
-1
Stop
+1
+2
+4
Set. temp.
Set. temp.
Room temp. (deg)
Room temp. (deg)
(33) Frost prevention during cooling

To prevent frosting during cooling operation, the temperature (detected by ThI-R) of the indoor heat exchanger is checked. If it
becomes 3C or lower, the frequency (expansion valve opening) of the blowing unit will be decreased. If the temperature of the
heat exchanger is 2C or lower for 2 minutes or longer, the thermostat will be turned off to switch the operation to the FAN mode.
If the temperature of the heat exchanger becomes 16C or more after thermostat OFF operation is started, it will be returned to the
cooling mode. However, the operation will not be applied for 10 minutes after the thermostat is turned off. Moreover, the compressor will be turned off for 3 minutes if the stopped unit is continuously at the temperature of 2 C or less for one minute. After 3
minutes, it will be returned into the normal control.
(34) External control (remote display)/control of input signal
(a)
External control (remote display) output

Following output connectors (CNT) are provided on the control circuit board of indoor unit.
(i)
Operation output: Power to engage DC 12V relay (provided by the customer) is outputted during operation.
(ii)
Heating output: Power to engage DC 12V relay (provided by the customer) is outputted during the heating operation.
(iii) Compressor ON output: Power to engage DC 12V relay (provided by the customer) is outputted while the compressor
is operating.
(iv) Error output: When any error occurs, the power to engage DC 12V relay (provided by the customer) is outputted.
118 -
(b) Control of input signal

(Make sure to connect the standard remote control unit. Control of input signal is not available without the standard remote control unit.)
Control of input signal (switch input, timer input) connectors (CNT) are provided on the control circuit board of the indoor unit.
However, when the operation of air conditioner is under the Center Mode, the remote control by CnT is invalid.
(i)
At shipping from factory (SW5-1 on PCB OFF)

1) Input signal to CnT OFF ON [Edge input] Air conditioner ON
2) Input signal to CnT ON OFF [Edge input] Air conditioner OFF
ON
ON
CnT Input
OFF
A Unit
OFF
B Unit
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
(ii)
When SW5-1 on the PCB of indoor unit is turned on at the field.

Input signal to CnT becomes valid at OFF ON only and the motion of air conditioner [ON/OFF] is inverted.
ON
CnT Input
OFF
A Unit
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
B Unit
(35)
OFF
Multiple Units Control-Simultaneous Control of 16 unit with one remote controller

(a)
Function
Multiple units (even of outdoor different systems, 16 units maximum) can be simultaneously controlled by using a remote
control switch (a special order item). The remote control switch is used to set the operation mode, and all the unit can be
operated and stopped. Thermostat and protective functions of each unit functions independently.
Note(1) When part of the group gets out of order (the protective device operates), the relevant unit comes to an abnormal stop, but other normal units keep operating.
(b) Wiring Procedures

(i)
Lay power cable of each unit and signal wire as usual. (Remove the remote control switches from all units excluding
only one unit.)
Lay wiring for the remote controller separately from power cable and wires for all other electrical equipment.
(ii)
Arrange the terminal block (X, Y, Z) of the remote controller as shown next page for the simultaneous control, and lay
cross over in each indoor unit.
Signal (1)
wire
Outdoor
unit
Signal wire
Indoor
unit
No.1
Indoor
unit
No.2
Outdoor
unit
(1)
Indoor
unit
No.3
Indoor
unit
No.16
(2)
(2)
Remote control
signal wire
Remote control
signal wire
Notes (1) The overall length of the signal wire shall be less than 1000m.
(2) The length of remote control signal wire and crossover for remote controller between room shall be less than 600m.
119 -
(36) Engine oil supply control

When the outdoor unit controller receives a signal from the engine controller that the oil level switch (OL1) has operated continuously for 2 minutes and 30 seconds, the following controls are performed.
(a)
Engine speed is reduced to the lowest speed (partial).
(b) After the operation in (a) has been performed, the engine oil supply valve (20OL1, 2) is opened for 10 minutes and to supply
engine oil to the sub-tank.
(c)
If the engine is stopped, engine oil can be supplied by setting DIP switch SW3-4 to on and pressing SW6 for 2 seconds. This
will open the engine oil supply valve for 10 minutes.
(37) Engine speed control by coolant temperature

When the coolant temperature reaches 95 C or more, the frequency is reduced.
(a)
Frequency reduction steps

Model
Item
Frequency reduction steps
GHCP450HMTE4
GHCP560HMTE4
(b) After the frequency has been reduced, if the coolant temperature is between 85 and 95 C, the frequency will be reduced
according to the steps shown in (a) above every 30 seconds. The lowest is the partial operation limit. It will not stop.
(c)
When the coolant temperature reaches 85 C, frequency release operation will be performed.
(d) However, when in fan tap, if the cooling water reaches 85 C or less, fan tap maintains maximum speed until the release
operation is completed. Then it will perform normal outdoor unit fan control. (Except for cooling control during cold
temperatures and during heating operations.)
(38) Unit protection
(a)
High-pressure trouble
If operation occurs twice within 40 minutes after the detection of a pressure of 3.00 MPa or over by the high-pressure sensor
(HPS), or if the pressure does not drop to 2.45 MPa or under within this 40-minute period, an abnormal stop will be implemented and inspection displays are indicated. (i.e., remote controller, 7-segment display, : E40, indoor LED-green: continuous flashing, red: stays OFF, outdoor LED-green: continuous flashing, red: continuous flashing). Note, however, that if the
engine is stopped and the pressure is 2.45 MPa or lower for the first operation, an automatic restart will be implemented after
a delay of 3-minute.
(b) Overcurrent protection of pump motor

If the overcurrent relay 51P of pump motor is activated (the contact is open) during operation of the pump, it will be stopped
as a trouble. The abnormal status is kept for 3 minutes after emergency stop even though the 51P is restored. Therefore, it will
not be possible to implement a reset using the remote controller during this time.
Inspection display (remote controller: E64, 7-segment display,: E64-1, indoor LED-green: continuous flashing, red: stays
OFF, outdoor LED-green: continuous flashing, red: continuous flashing).
Note (1) In accordance with the manual-return configuration, return will not be possible until a reset is performed.
(c)
Cooling water level trouble

If the float switch (FS) is continuously activated (contact is opened) 3 minutes or more, it will be stopped as a trouble.
The abnormal status is kept for 3 minutes after emergency stop even though the FS is restored. Therefore, it will not be
possible to implement a reset using the remote controller during this time.
120 -
(d) Overcurrent protection of outdoor fan motor

If the overcurrent relay 51FO1 of the outdoor fan motor FMO1 is activated (the contact is open), it will be stopped as a
trouble.
The abnormal status is kept for 3 minutes after emergency stop even though the 51FO1 is restored. Therefore, it will not be
possible to implement a reset using the remote controller during this time.
Note (1) In accordance with the manual-return configuration, return will not be possible until a reset is performed.
(e)
Fan invertor trouble

If the trouble output of the invertor (30B-30C on the P.C.B) is activated (the contact is opened) two times within 40 minutes,
it will be stopped as a trouble.
The abnormal status is kept for 3 minutes after emergency stop even though the inverter abnormality is restored. Therefore,
it will not be possible to implement a reset using the remote controller during this time.
However, at the first activation, the engine is stopped, and is automatically restarted a delay of 3 minutes if the trouble is
reset.
(f)
Engine water temperature trouble

If the outdoor controller receives the water temperature trouble from the engine controller, it will be stopped as a trouble.
The operation of the cooling water pump and outdoor fan is continued after emergency stop until the cooling water temperature drops to 95C or less.
The restart by the reset of the remote controller will be possible after the cooling water temperature drops to 95C or less.
The abnormal status is kept for 3 minutes after emergency stop even though the cooling water temperature abnormality is
restored. Therefore, it will not be possible to implement a reset using the remote controller during this time.
Inspection display (remote controller: E80, 7-segment: E80 indoor LED-green: continuous flashing, red: stays OFF, outdoor
LED-green: continuous flashing, red: continuous flashing).
ON
OFF
95
110
Water temperature (C)
(g) Engine oil pressure trouble

If the engine oil pressure switch (OPE) is activated (the contact is opened), it will be stopped as a trouble.
Inspection display (remote controller: E81, 7-segment: E81 indoor LED-green: continuous flashing, red: stays OFF, outdoor
LED-green: continuous flashing, red: continuous flashing). The abnormal status is kept for 3 minutes after emergency stop
even though the hydraulic abnormality is restored. Therefore, it will not be possible to implement a reset using the remote
controller during this time.
(h) Engine oil level trouble 2
If the oil level switch (OL2) is activated (the contact is opened), the engine and compressor will be lowered to a partial load.
If it continues 30 seconds, it will be stopped as a trouble. It will not be possible to implement a restart by the check and reset
of the remote controller.
Inspection display (remote controller: E88, 7-segment: E88-2, indoor LED-green: continuous flashing, red: stays OFF, outdoor LED-green: continuous flashing, red: continuous flashing).
121 -
(i)
Engine overspeed trouble

If the outdoor controller receives the engine overspeed signal from the engine controller, the engine will be immediately
stopped.
After a delay of 3 minutes, it will be automatically restarted if the trouble is reset.
If the engine overspeed trouble occurs 2 times within 40 minutes, it will be stopped as a trouble.
The abnormal status is kept for 3 minutes after emergency stop even though the engine overspeed is restored. Therefore, it
will not be possible to implement a reset using the remote controller during this time.
Inspection display (remote controller: E82, 7-segment: E82, indoor LED-green: continuous flashing, red: stays OFF, outdoor
(J)
Engine underspeed trouble

If the outdoor controller receives the engine underspeed signal from the engine controller, the engine will be immediately
stopped.
After a delay of 3 minutes, it will be automatically restarted if the trouble is reset.
If the engine underspeed trouble occurs 2 times within 40 minutes, it will be stopped as a trouble.
The abnormal status is kept for 3 minutes after emergency stop even though the engine underspeed is restored. Therefore, it
will not be possible to implement a reset using the remote controller during this time.
(k)
Engine start failure

If the start of engine start/stop state is not received from the engine controller after the start of the engine (the starter is
started but the complete combustion does not occur), it will be controlled with the following method.
(i)
(ii)
Outdoor temperature and starter start time

Outdoor temperature
0C or lower
0C or higher
Starter start time
5 seconds
5 seconds
Start timing, and maximum start trials for trouble judgment

Start timing
Trials for trouble
judgment
Normal
(except the left)
First start after a halt of 168 hours or more

First start after power is turned on
(3 times 3 minute delay) 3 cycles
[First cycle is 6 times including air purging 3 times]
(3 times 3 minute delay) 3 cycles
Note (1) The failure of 4-way valve start assurance is also counted as the start failure of the control.
(iii) After the start of start operations, if the "engine operation/stop mode" operation is not received within the starter start
time indicated in (i), the gas shut-off valve (20G1,2), supply relay (XG1) and status solenoid contactor (52S) are
immediately set to off. After 6 seconds, the start operation is repeated. Note that if starting does not occur within the
number set for error determination, a error stop is performed.
The abnormal status is kept for 3 minutes after emergency stop. Therefore, it will not be possible to implement a reset
using the remote controller during this time.
Inspection display (remote controller: E84, 7-segment: E-84, indoor LED-green : continuous flashing, red : stays OFF,
outdoor LED-green : continuous flashing, red : continuous flashing.
(l)
Engine controller communication trouble

If the answer back signal of 0.5-second intervals of the engine controller can not be normally received for continuous 10
seconds, the following control will be applied.
(i)
If the outdoor controller detects the receiving trouble (process of 10 seconds),

1) The revolution speed indicated of the engine is ordinarily controlled according to the required frequency. The
answer-back frequency is determined by interpolating the value which was before the communication trouble.
2) The engine is stopped after 10 seconds.
3) Automatic restart becomes possible after a delay of 3 minutes.
122 -
(ii) If the engine controller detects the communication trouble,

1) If the communication is not normal for 10 seconds, the engine revolution speed will be dropped to Minimum speed
after 10 seconds.
2) After 10 seconds, the auxiliary relay (X14) is turned off for normal resetting. It will be held until the start command
is received.
3) For this while, the outdoor board will be kept in the control of (i), 2) and following in order to detect the communication trouble.
Note(1)
Since the engine control will not answer back if the signal receiving is abnormal for 10 seconds, the outdoor board will stop the
engine as the communication trouble.
(iii) Abnormal stop if any communication trouble occurs 4 times for 15 minutes
Inspection display (remote control: E89, 7-segment: E89-9, indoor LED-green: continuous flashing, red: stays OFF,
outdoor LED-green: continuous flashing, red: continuous flashing).
(m) Reversed phase/open phase of power supply
(i) Reversed phase of current
The control board detects the phase order for 2 seconds (at all times when the power is turned on). Since R / T / S /
R is judged as the reversed phase, the unit is stopped as a trouble (E32).
(ii) Open phase trouble
If the open phase of T phase is detected by the control board for 2 seconds after the power is turned on, it will be stopped
as a trouble (E32).
(iii) Inspection display
Remote controller: E32, 7-segment: E32, indoor LED-green: continuous flashing, red: stays OFF, outdoor LED-green:
continuous flashing, red: continuous flashing
(n) Connected quantity protection
If 20 indoor units or more are connected, it will be stopped as a trouble.
(o) Thermistor wire breakage (Abnormal stop if any thermistor is subject to wire breakage, gets off or is
largely dislocated)
(i) Indoor unit
1) Heat exchanger thermistor (ThI-R)
If wire breakage continues 5 seconds during 2 minutes to 2 minutes 20 seconds after start of the engine start or wire
breakage continues 5 seconds during 10 seconds after the power is turned on, it will be stopped as a trouble.
Inspection display (remote controller: E6, 7-segment; E6, indoor LED-green: continuous flashing, red: flashing
one time, outdoor LED-green: continuous flashing, red: continuous flashing).
Note (1) It is not detected for 5 minutes after defrosting is completed.
2) Return air temp. thermistor (ThI-A)

If the wire breakage continues 5 seconds, it will be stopped as a trouble.
Inspection display (remote controller: E7, 7-segment : E7, indoor LED-green: continuous flashing, red: flashing
one time, outdoor LED-green: continuous flashing, red: continuous flashing).
(ii) Outdoor unit
1) Outdoor temp. thermistor (Tho-A). Water heat exchanger's refrigerant outlet thermistor (Tho-MO)
If the wire breakage continues 5 seconds during 2 minutes to 2 minute 20 seconds after start of the engine start, the
outdoor unit will be stopped, and be then restarted after a delay of 3 minutes. If it is detected three times within 40
minutes after the first detection, it will be stopped as a trouble. If 20 seconds have passed since the power is
supplied, it will be stopped as a trouble at the first time.
Inspection display (remote controller: E37, E38 7-segment: E37, E38, indoor LED-green: continuous flashing, red:
stays OFF, outdoor LED-green: continuous flashing, red: continuous flashing).
Note (1) It is not detected for 5 minutes after defrosting is completed.
123 -
2) Discharge pipe thermistor (Tho-D), Machinery-compartment thermistor (Tho-ET)

If the wire breakage continues 5 seconds during 10 minutes to 10 minutes 20 seconds after start of the engine start,
the outdoor unit will be stopped, and be then restarted after a delay of 3 minutes. If it is detected three times within
40 minutes after the first detection, it will be stopped as a trouble.
Inspection display (remote controller: E39, E89, 7-segment: E39, E89-3, indoor LED-green: continuous flashing,
red: stays OFF, outdoor LED-green: continuous flashing, red: continuous flashing)
3) Cooling-water pump's inlet thermistor (Tho-PI)
If an open-circuit condition continues for a period of 5 seconds between 3 minutes and 3 minutes and 20 seconds
after startup of the engine, the outdoor unit will be stopped and restarted after a delay of 3-minute; furthermore, if
the third detection is made within 40 minutes after the first detection, an abnormal stop will be implemented. In
situations where 20 seconds has elapsed since power ON, an abnormal stop will be implemented at the first detection.
Inspection display (remote controller: E52, 7-segment display: E52, indoor LED-green: continuous flashing, red:
4) High-pressure sensor (HPS)
An open circuit is normally detected during engine operation. If an open circuit continues for a period of 5 seconds,
the outdoor unit will be stopped and restarted after a delay of 3-minute; furthermore, if the third detection is made
within 40 minutes after the first detection, an abnormal stop will be implemented.
Inspection display (remote controller: E54, 7-segment display: E54, indoor LED-green: continuous flashing, red:
(p) Engine controller trouble
If the outdoor controller receives the engine controller trouble from the engine controller, the engine will be immediately
stopped. After a delay of 3 minutes, it will be automatically restarted if the trouble is reset.
If the engine controller trouble is activated 2 times within 40 minutes, it will be abnormally stopped.
The abnormal status is kept for 3 minutes after emergency stop even though the controller abnormality is restored. Therefore,
it will not be possible to implement a reset using the remote controller during this time.
Inspection display (remote controller: E89, 7-segment: E89-5 thru 9, indoor LED-green: continuous flashing, red: stays OFF,
outdoor LED-green: continuous flashing, red: continuous flashing)
(q) Low-pressure trouble
If the lower-pressure switch 63L (0.05 open/0.15 closed MPa) is turned OFF continuously for 5 seconds during the operation
of the compressor, the engine will be stopped, and if the low-pressure switch is turned OFF after a delay of 3 minutes, it will
be restarted. If it is activated 2 times within 40 minutes, it will be abnormally stopped as a trouble.
Inspection display (remote controller: E57, 7-segment: E57, indoor LED-green: continuous flashing, red: unlit, outdoor
LED-green: continuous flashing, red: continuous flashing)
(r)
Post-maintenance engine operation-time abnormalities

If after the completion of maintenance, the engine's operating time reaches 8,000 hours, then the speed of the engine and of
the compressor will be reduced to the corresponding minimum levels, and when a further 30 seconds have passed, an abnormal stop will be implemented. The condition will remain abnormal for a period of 3 minutes following this; consequently, it
will not be possible to implement a reset using the remote controller. The abnormal stop is implemented every 50 hours of
operation on and after 8,000 hours. When restarting from the remote controller, abnormal stops will be implemented at
periods of 4 hours after 8,100 hours have passed. To clear the accumulated operation time to 0, set SW7 and SW8 to 60, and
then continue pressing the dip switch SW5 from the outdoor unit's circuit board until a value of 0 is reached.
Notes (1) The operating time can be changed to 4,000 hours by turning ON the dip switch SW9-2 from the outdoor unit's circuit board.
Functionality of the SW9-4 from the outdoor unit's circuit board:
SW9-4 ON: Abnormal stop not implemented
SW9-4 OFF: Abnormal stop implemented
124 -
(s)
Regulation of the engine's cooling-water flow-control valves

During cooling and heating operation, the engine's cooling-water flow-control valves (CWFCV1, CWFCV2) are regulated
in accordance with the temperature of the engine's cooling water.
Degree of opening of the engine's cooling-water flow-control valves upon unit stopping:
CWFCV1: 850 pulses
CWFCV2: 0 pulses
(t) Regulation of the outdoor heat-exchanger refrigerant-inlet solenoid valves
During heating operation, a heat-exchanger inlet solenoid valve (SV7) has been provided in order to prevent the in-flow of
liquid refrigerant to the outdoor heat exchanger, and a liquid-return solenoid valve (SV8) has been provided to return accumulated refrigerant to the outdoor heat exchanger; furthermore, these solenoid valves are regulated in accordance with the
outdoor temperature.
ON
ON
SV8
SV7
OFF
OFF
2
4
2
4
(u) Regulation of maximum speed in accordance with outdoor temperature

In situations where the total capacity of the indoor unit is less than 105% of the capacity of the outdoor unit when the
thermostat of the former is ON, the control of maximum engine speed is carried out in accordance with the outdoor temperature as follows:
2375 min-1
Cooling
2375 min-1
2015 min-1 (450 type)
2195 min-1 (560 type)
Heating
2195 min-1
36
38
(v)
Control as performed by the machinery-compartment thermistor (Tho-ET)

1) In situations where the temperature of the machinery compartment raises to a level of 80C or higher for a period of 2
seconds, the engine will be stopped. When the temperature subsequently drops to 60C or lower, the engine will be
restarted after a 3-minute delay period.
ON
Engine
OFF
60
80
Machine-compartment temperature (C)
2)
An abnormal stop will be implemented either if the engine is stopped in accordance with the above twice in a period of
60 minutes or less, or if the temperature remains continuously at 80C or greater for a period of 60 minutes (including
the period over which the engine is stopped); furthermore, this control will be terminated when the temperature of the
machinery compartment drops to 60C or lower for a period of 45 minutes.
Note (1) Even if the temperature returns to 60C or lower during the 45-minute period after the machinery-compartment temperature abnormality, the engine
will not be restarted. (Remote-controller setting is not possible, and this condition must be canceled by resetting the power supply.)
125 -
5. APPLICATION DATA
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Before installation, read through safety precautions for the complete work.
Since the cautionary items herein include the important content for safety, be sure to observe them. The indication marks and
their meanings are as follows.
WARNING Unless it is observed during installation, it may lead to a serious injuries of death, etc.
CAUTION Unless it is observed during installation, it may lead to a serious result depending on the situation.
After the installation work is completed, test the operation to verify that there is no abnormality. Also instruct the customer of
the operation method, maintenance method and periodic inspection along with the instruction manual. Moreover, make the
customer carefully store this installation manual together with the instruction manual for the future reference.
WARNING
Installation must be done by the dealer or qualified individual and not by the customer. Improper installation by
untrained individual may result to intoxication due to exhaust gas entry into the building, water leakage, electric
shock, fire hazards, etc.
Installation must be done according to this installation manual. Improper installation may result to intoxication due to
exhaust gas entry into the building, water leakage, electric shock, fire hazards, etc.
When transporting the unit, secure it with a rope suitable for its weight, routing the rope at the specified points of the
unit. If the rope was routed to a weak point during transport, the unit may drop, resulting to serious injuries or death.
Install the outdoor unit outside in the open to prevent exhaust gas accumulation that can cause intoxication due to
exhaust gas entering the building concerned.
The outdoor unit must be installed in a location where the exhaust gas cannot pass through and enter the building
through the intake/exhaust ports, vent port or through the piping connected to the building. Exhaust gas entering the
building concerned can cause intoxication.
Be sure to release the exhaust gas into the open without affecting the surroundings. (Never release any exhaust gas
into the drainage channel, gutter, etc.) Exhaust gas entering the building concerned can cause intoxication.
Install the outdoor unit in a secure and firm location, otherwise, the unit may become unstable and fall off causing
injuries.
Install the outdoor unit in a stable and horizontal foundation to prevent the unit from falling off. Be sure to fasten it with
anchor bolts. Inadequate foundation and fixtures could cause the unit to fall down which may result to gas leakage,
injuries, etc.
If the exhaust drain of the outdoor unit is connected to a closed drainage channel, gutter, etc., or if the exhaust drain
of the outdoor unit and the drain of the indoor unit are discharged at the same place, specify which pipe releases the
exhaust gas in the exhaust drain to the open air. Exhaust gas entering the building concerned can cause intoxication.
Do not join the exhaust drain pipe of the outdoor unit with the drain pipe of the indoor unit. Exhaust gas entering the
building concerned can cause intoxication.
Fuel piping must be done by a qualified individual. Otherwise, it may cause gas leakage.
Electrical works must be done by a qualified individual. Otherwise, it may cause electrical shock, fire hazard, etc.
Use the exclusive branch circuit for electric wiring, do not connect it with the circuit of any other electrical equipment,
otherwise, the breaker may fail and cause minor injures.
For wiring, use the specified cables and securely connect them. To prevent an external force of the cable from being
transmitted to the terminal connected area, securely fasten the cable. If it is incompletely connected or fastened, it
will cause heating, fire hazards, etc.
Use only the specified parts and accessory parts when installing. Unless original parts are used, it may cause major
unit breakdown, water leakage, fire hazard, electric shock, refrigerant leakage or gas reakage.
After completing the installation, make sure that there is no refrigerant gas reakage. Leaking refrigerant gas in the
indoor unit becomes poisonous when it contact with flame from fan heater, stove, hot plate, etc.
Use only the specified refrigerant when installing the unit, make sure that no other gas is mixed during installation or
during transportation of the unit. If air or any other gas is mixed, there will be unusual high pressure in the refrigeration
cycle that may burst and cause injury.
126 -
CAUTION
Maintain a specified distance between the outdoor unit and combustible materials. Insufficient distance may result to
fire hazard.
Never install the outdoor unit or indoor unit in a place where combustible gas may generate, flow in, accumulate or
leak or volatile flammable material is being handled. Otherwise, combustible material or flammable gas may catch
fire, causing fire hazard.
Never install the outdoor unit in a place where its emissions may hit plants or similar. Otherwise, the plants or similar
will be damaged by the emissions.
Provide space for inspection and maintenance works. Insufficient space may pose hazards and cause injury to
servicing personnel.
For outdoor unit installed on roofs or elevated location, provide access ladders, hand rail, etc., on the passage way
or fence, this will provide safety for seivice personnel around the outdoor unit to avoid injuries.
Use double wrench to tighten flare nuts to its specified torque. Be careful not to excessively tighten the flare area so
as not to damage it. (Refer to the tightening torque table) Damaged or loosened flare area will result to refrigerant
gas leakage which may cause oxygen deficiency.
Cover the refrigerant pipe with a dew-proof heat insulator. Insufficient dew-proof heat insulator will cause water
leakage or condensate drippings that can damage furniture, etc.
Perform airtight test after completing the refrigerant piping work to verify if there is leakage. Refrigerant gas leaks in
confined rooms may result to oxygen deficiency.
When installing the outdoor units on roofs, the exhaust drain pipe must be extended to drain the water onto the roof
gutter. If the exhaust drain drains on the floor as it is, it can the waterproof sheet or stain the surface of the concrete.
Execute the grounding works. Do not connect the ground cable to the gas pipe, tap water pipe, lightning arrestor or
telephone cable grounding. If it is poorly grounded, it will sometimes cause electric shock.
In some installation site, it is necessary to install the ground leakage breaker. Unless the ground leakage breaker is
installed, it will result in an electric shock.
When connecting the pipe, use the double wrench.
Between the gas cock of the fuel pipe and the outdoor unit, use the enforced gas hose, or the low-pressure gas hose
which is provided with the liquefied petroleum gas fitting. If any hose not specified is used, it will be damaged due to
vibration and cause gas leakage, thus causing fire hazards, etc.
After the fuel gas work is completed, verify that gas does not leak from the fuel gas piping. If any fuel gas leaks, it will
cause fire hazards or similar.
127 -
5.1 Installation of indoor unit

(1) Ceiling recessed type (FDT)
(a) Selection of installation location
1) Select location where the space above ceiling is larger than those mentioned
Type
Space above ceiling
below and perfect draining can be assured.
FDT28, 36, 45, 56, 71, 90
Over 270mm
2) Places where perfect drainage can be prepared and sufficient drainage gradient FDT112, 140
Over 330mm
is available.
3) Places free from air distrubances to the air inlet and outlet of the indoor unit.
4) Places with the environmental dew-point temperature is lower than 28C
Installtation space
and the relative humidity is less than 80%. (When installing at a place under
(mm)
a high humidity environment, pay sufficient attention to prevention of dewing
such as thermally insulating the unit properly.)
5) Do not place where the unit is exposed to oil splashes or steam (e.g. kitchens
and machine plants). (Istallation and use at such places will causes the per1000 and over
1000 and over
formance drop, corrosion in the heat exchanger and damage in molded
synthetic resin parts.)
6) Do not place where corrosive gas (such as sulfurous acid gas) or inflammable
Obstacle
gas (thinner, gasoline, etc.) is generated or remains. Installation and use at
such places will cause corrosion in the heat exchanger and damage in molded
synthetic resin parts.
7) Do not place adjacent to equipment generating electromagnetic waves or high-frequency waves such as in hospitals,
Generated noise may cause malfunctioning of the controller.
Ceiling opening dimension : 860 to 890 square
suspension bolt pitch : 780
400
420
G
637
422
Drain hose
(accessory)
Attach on site.
Liquid refrigerant piping
Drain piping connecting hole
Power intake hole
Hang bolt
Outside air intake hole
Supply air branch duct connecting hole
Hanger
128 -
Unit : mm
b
210
260
270
320
D
Control box
Refrigerant piping
Drain
Main
body
Hang bolt
Nut
Washer
Spring
Washer
In-door unit
Level gauge
Hose
10~25
Fix the level gauge in alignment

with this face of supply air grill.
Adjust so that level gauge surface and

the lower surface of ceiling are in matching.
Supply air grill
Ceiling
member Level gauge (insulation)
137
167
b
FDT112, 140
40~45
Request
For the suspension bolt whose length exceeds 1.3m, use the M10
size hang bolt and moreover combine a diagonal member to the
hang bolt for reinfocement.
45 and over
When there is the ceiling

1. Make an 860 to 890 mm-square cutout on the ceiling.
Refer to the outside dimensions of packing cardboard container.
sAlign the center of ceiling cutout and the center of unit.
2. Decide the suspension bolt position (675780).
3. Use four hang bolts and fix them so that each bolt can resist the pull
out load of 50 kgf.
4. Decide the length of suspension bolt to approx. 70 mm above the
ceiling surface.
5. After hanging in the unit, fix the attached level gauge and secure the
height of unit.
6. Use a transparent hose filled with water to check the levelness of unit.
(The maximum allowable height difference between both ends of unit
is 3 mm.)
Gas refrigerant piping
Model
FDT28, 36, 45,
56, 71, 90
267
310
840
A B
C
a
(c) Hanging
Arrange four sets of a suspension bolt (M10 or M8), a nut
for it, a plain washer and a spring washer on site.
332
30
suspension bolt pitch : 675
95
(b) Preparation for installation

1) Ceiling hole size and Position of suspension bolts.
a) The pattern sheet may shrink or expand as humidity
changes, so check the actual size before use.
b) The size of ceiling opening can be adjusted within
the range shown below. Bring the unit body to the
ceiling opening right in the center so as not to be set
aside and so that space between a ceiling opening
end and the outside of the unit body becomes equal
to that on the opposite side.
c) The size of the pattern sheet equals to the maximum
size of the square ceiling opening.
2) Location of pipes
For the location of pipe, see the exterior dimension.
(d) Drain Piping

1) Drain piping should always be in downhili grade (1/50 ~ 1/100) and avoid riding across and elevation or making traps.
Good piping
Suspension
bolts
Improper piping
Avoid riding across an elevation
1.5 m ~ 2 m
Air vent
Keep free from traps

Do not pipe under water
Heat
A downhill grade
insulation of 1/100 or more
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
700 mm or less
9)
When connecting the drain pipe to unit, pay sufficient attention not to applay excess force to the piping on the unit side.
Also, fix the piping at a point as close as possible to the unit.
For drain pipe, use hard PVC general purpose pipe VP-25(I.D.1)
Stage
difference Drain hose
which can be purchased locally. When connecting, insert a PVC
Drain socket part
pipe end securely into the drain socket before tightening securely
using the attached drain hose and clamp. Adhesive must not be
VP25 joint
Pipe cover (large) (field purchased)
used connection of the drain socket and drain hose (accessory).
[for insuation]
When consturcting drain piping for several units, position the com(accessory)
Main unit
mon pipe about 100 mm below the drain outlet of each unit as
shown in the sketch. Use VP-30(11/4) or thicker pipe for this
Drain hose
VP25
(accessory)
(field purchased)
purpes.
Clamp
Adhesion
Pipe cover
Be sure to provide heat insulation to hard PVC pipes of indoor
Drain socket (accessory)
[for insuation]
Pipe cover (small)
(field purchased)
placement.
[for insuation]
(accessory)
Do not ever provide an air vent.
The height of the drain head can be elevated up to a point 700 mm ablve the
ceiling and, when an obstacle exisits in the ceiling space, elevate the piping to
avoid the obstacle using an elbow or corresponding gadget. When doing this,
Secure the elevation as high as possible
(approx. 100 mm)
if the stretch for the needed height is too high, the back-flow quantity of drain
at the event of interruption of the operation gets too much and it may cause
overflow at the drain pan. Therefore, make the height of the drain pipe within
the distance given in the sketeh below.
A downhill grade of
VP30
1/100 or more
Avoid positioning the drain piping outlet at a place where generation of odor
may be stimulated. Do not lead the drain piping direct into a sewer from
295 ~ 325 mm
100 mm or less
where sulfur gas may generate.
The purpose of drain hose is to absorb minute discrepancy of the unit or the
Drain hose
drain piping occurred when they are installed. Therefore, when it is bent
intentionally or used under expanded condition, it may be damaged and result
in water leakage.
Drainage Test
VP25 joint
(field purchased)
Conduct a drainage test after completion of the electrical work.
During the trial, make sure that drain flows properly through the piping and that no water leaks from connections.
In case of a new building, conduct the test before it is furnished with the ceiling.
Be sure to conduct this test even when the unit is installed in the heating season.
Procedures
1
Supply about 1000 cc of water to the unit through the air outlet by using a feed water pump.
Pour water into a convex joint
Put the tip of the feed water pump
in the drain pan of the unit body
If the electrical work has not been completed, connect a convex joint in the drain
pipe connection to provide a water inlet.
Then, check if water leaks from the piping system and that drain flows through
the drain pipe normally.
2 Check at the exhaust port if drain is flowing.
(Note) Conduct this test paying attention to rotating sound of the drain motor.
3
Remove the drain plug located on the bottom of the drain pan when the water has to be evacuated from the unit.
4 After the test, fit the drain plug to the original place and turn off the power source.
129 -
(e) Fixing of Decorative Panel (The panel fixing bolts are attached on the panel.)
1)
Check with the accessory level gauges that indoor unit height and the size of ceiling hole are correct.
Remove the level gauges from the indoor unit before fixing the decorative panel.
2)
Screw two bolts out of four accessory bolts less than 5 mm in the indoor unit diagonally.
3)
Hang the panel on the two bolts and fix them temporarily.
4)
Tighten the bolts fixed temporarily and the remaining two bolts.
Screw the remaining two bolts, and tighen all (four) bolts.
5)
Connect the louver motor connector (red) to the panel respectively.
6)
If the louver motor is not operated by remote control, check if the connector is connected correctly, and turn off the power
for more then 10 seconds, then reset it.
Panel Joint Setting

The panel can turn 30 mm to the left and to the right in all (approx 2), and the indoor unit turns 30 mm to the left and to the right in
all (approx 3), But, it cannot turn if the panel is secured.
Limit in Fixing Panel

1 Fix the panel only in the direction shown in the figure.
2 If it is fixed in other way, air will leak. Also, wires cannot be connected for auto swing and receiver amp.
Louver motor
Electrical
equipment
box
Refrigerant piping
Drain piping
130 -
(2) 2-way outlet ceiling recessed type (FDTW)

1)
This unit is a ceiling surface direct return air and direct supply air type.
Install the unit a place the allows air to reach every part of the room, in accordance with the shape and heigh of the room.
Installation space
100
or
more
2)
1000
or more
Unit : mm
100
or
more
1500
or
more
1500
or
more
This unit permits connecting a branch duct (B 200 mm) according to the method shown in the figure below so that air
disribution may be improved to the shape of the room. (For the connecting port of the duct, refer to the exterior dimension
on page 31~33.)
200
mm
Air interruption
3) Cold air throw

Unit : m
Models
FDTW28, 45, 56 type
FDTW71, 90 type
FDTW112 type
FDTW140 type
Item
Standerd
4.0
4.5
4.7
5.0
UHi
4.5
5.0
5.2
5.5
Notes (1) The cold air throw is the same in 2 directions.

Conditions:
1.Unit height: 3.0 m above the floor
2.Fan speed: Hi
3.Location: Freee space without obstacle
4.The throw is as the per the table above.
5.Air velocity at the throw: 0.3(m/s)
4)
Places where chilied or heated air circulates freely. When the installation heiht exceeds 3.5m, warmed air stays close to the
ceiling. In such cases, suggest your client users to install air circulators.
5)
Places where perfect drainage can be prepared and sufficient drainage gradient is available.
6)
Places free from air disturbances to the return air port and supply hole of the indoor unit, places where the fire alarm may
not malfunction to short circuit.
7)
Places with the environmental dew-point temperature is lower than 28C and the relative humidity is less than 80%. (When
installing at a place under a high humidity environment, pay suffcient attention to prevention of dewing such as thermally
insulating the unit properly.)
131 -
8)
Places exposed to oil splashes or steam (e.g. kitchens and machine plants.)
Installation and use at such places will incur deteriorations in the performance or corrosion with the heat exchanger or
damage in molded synthetic resin parts.
9)
Places where corrosive gas (such as sulfurous acid gas) or inflammable gas (thinner, gasoline, etc.) is generated or remains.
Installation and use at such places will cause corrosion in the heat exchanger and damage in molded synthetic resin parts.
10) Place adjacent to equipment generating electromagnetic waves or high-frquency waves such sa in hospitals. Generated
noise may cause malfunctioning of the controller.
(b) Preparations for installation
1)
Ceiling hole and suspension bolt positions
a) The pattern sheet shrinks or expands as humidity changes, so check the actual size before use.
b) The ceiling hole sizes and suspension bolt sizes are shown in the following figure.
Dimension table
Unit : mm
Mark
FDTW28, 45, 56
type
1015
885
468
417
FDTW71, 90 type
1260
1130
590
540
FDTW112, 140
type
1730
1600
825
775
Models
(c) Installation
For the suspension bolt, use four M10 or W 3/8 bolts and secure so that each bolt can withstand a 50 kg/f pullout load.
Use a suspension bolt length that extends approximately 95 mm for the ceiling surface.
132 -
A. If there is a ceiling
1)
Open the hole in the installation location to the ceiling

opening dimensions.
2)
Install the suspension bolts (procured locally) at the
Outlet
port
designated locations.
Pattern paper
(Use care as the center of the spacing for the suspension

bolts is not at the center of the panel.)
3)
Ceiling surface
Hang the unit, use the four bolts to mount the pattern
Printed surface
Adjust the position of the main unit so that

the bottom surface of the pattern paper and
the bottom surface of the ceiling align.
paper provided to the panel mounting section and adjust

the height.
4)
Use a level or transparent hose with water in it to

confirm that the unit is level. If the unit is not level,
problems such as water leakage or improper operation
of the float switch could occur.
Vinyl tube
5)
After confirming the above, secure the unit in position.
Panel mounting position
<Panel mounting position>

B. If ceiling is to be installed later
1)
Follow steps A2 to A4 in the previous section "A. If

there is a ceiling" to install the unit and mount the
pattern paper.
2)
When the ceiling is installed, the outer perimeter of

the pattern paper can be referred to for making the
opening in the ceiling.
3)
After checking the height and that the unit is level,

secure the unit in position.
<Pattern paper mounting configuration>

(d) Drain piping
1)
Drain piping should always be in a downhill grade (1/50-1/100) and avoid riding across an elevation or making traps.
Good piping
Suspension
bolts
Improper piping
1.5 m ~ 2 m
Air vent
Heat
insulation

Do not pipe under water.
A downhill grade
of 1/100 or more
133 -
2)
3)
When connecting the drain pipe to the unit, pay suffcient attention not to apply excess force to the piping on the unit side. Also,
fix the piping at a point as close as possible to the unit.
Level difference part
For drain pipe, use hard PVC ganeral purpose pipe VP-25 (I.D.1'') which can
Drain socket
Drain hose
be purchased locally. When connecting, insert a PVC pipe end securely into
the drain socket before tightening securly using the attached drain hose and
clamp. Adhesive must not be used connection of the drain socket and drain
hose (accessory).
Joint for VP-25
Pipe cover (large)[insulation]
(accessory
(local procurement)
Unit
VP-25
Drain hose
(local procurement)
Drain socket Clamp
(accessory)
(accessory)
Adhesion Pipe cover [insulation]
Pipe cover (small)[insulation]
(local procurement)
(accessory)
4)
When constructing drain piping for several units, position the common pipe about 100mm below the drain outlet of each unit
as shown in the sketch below. Use VP-30 or thicker pipe for this pupose.
(approx. 100 mm)
A downhill grade of
1/100 or more
5)
6)
7)
VP30
Be sure to provide heat insulation to hard PVC pipes of indoor placement.

Do not ever provide an air vent.
The height of the drain head may be elevated up to a point 750mm above the ceiling and, when an obstacle exists in the ceiling
space, elevate the piping to avoid the obstacle using an elbow or corresponding gadget. When doing this, if the stretch for the
needed height is too high, the back-fiow quantity of drain at the time of interruption of the operation gets too much and it may
cause overflow at the drain pan. Therefore, make the height of the drain pipe withing the distance given in the drawing below.
Drain hose (accessory)
100 mm or less
750 mm or less
295~325
Joints for VP-25 (local procurement)
8)
Avoid positioning the drain pipng outletat a place where ganeration of odor may be stimulated, Do not lead the drain piping
direct into a sewer from where sulfur gas may generate.
When Using a Natural Drain Port

1) Remove the heat insulating material and rubber plug
of the natural drain port.
2) By using the natural drain connecting tube
(option),connect the drain pipe (VP-20) and completely
clamp it with a clamp.
Clear flexible tubing (optional)
Hard vinyl chloride piping.

Heat General piping VP-20
insulation
Rubber plug
Remove
Note (1) If the drain pipe is directly connected to the

3)
natural drain port, the drain pan becomes unremovable.

Disconnect the connector CNR (blue, 2P) for the drain
motor.
Natural drain port
CNR (Blue2P)
Control box
Note (1) If the connector remains connected, drain water is discharged from the standard drain pipe connecting port, leading to water
leakage.
134 -
Drainage Test
When using the standard drain port, execute a drainage test after completion of electric work.
1 During the test run, make sure that drain flows properly through the piping and that no water leaks from connections.
2 Be sure to conduct this test even when the unit is installed in the heating season.
3 In case of a new building, conduct the test before it is furnished with the ceiling.
Piping penetration cover

Insert the tip of the supply water pump approximately
50 mm in a downward direction.
1)
Inject about 1,000cc by using a feed water pump from the grommet on the drain pump side.
2)
At the drain port (transparent portion), check if drainage is performed.
3)
After completion of the drain test, completely perform heat insulation fot the drain pipe up to the main unit.
(g) Fixing of Panel ( The panel fixing bolts are attached on the panel. )
Note (1) Care should be exercised in handling the supply air port on the panel because it is easily depressed by finger nail.
1)
Check with the accessory level gauges that the indoor unit height and the size of ceiling hole are correct.
Notes (1) Remove the level gauge from the indoor unit befroe fixing the panel.
(2) Remove the Air inlet panel from the panel proper.
Procedure for Dismounting the Air inlet Panel

Air inlet panel
Panel proper
Remove
Pin (B)
Pin (A)
Panel outer frame
Panel inner frame
a)
Remove the panel from the pin (A) in the order of the arrows 1 and 2.
b)
Open the panel slightly as shown by the arrow 3 and move it to the arrow 4. Then remove it from the pin (B).
135 -
2)
Screw two bolts out of four accessory bolts less than 5mm in the panel diagonally.
3)
Hook the panel on the two bolts and set it temporarily.
4)
Tighten the bolts fixed temporarily and the remaining two bolts.
5)
Connect the louver motor connector (white, 3P) and the limit switch connector (white, 2P) to the panel respectively.
6)
When the louver motor cannot be operated by remote controller operation, check the connector connections and turn off the
power suppy for 10 sceonds or more for restting.
For Ceiling Material Inlaid Panel
Ceiling material holding plate
Ceiling material
Air inlet panel
Ceiling Material Dimensions

Unit : mm
Models
FDTW28, 45, 56
type
FDTW71, 90 type
FDTW112, 140
type
Width
300
300
300
Length
970
1215
1685
Item
1 Remove the air inelt panel from panel proper.

2 Remove the ceiling holding plates (2 sheets) temporarily set on the suction panel with screws.
3 Install the ceiling material on the air intel panel and fix it with the ceiling holding plates so as not to produce any play.
Note (1) Use a ceiling material with a thickness of 6-15mm and a side length of 300mm or more.
Ceiling material thickness : 6-10 mm
10 ~ 15 mm
Ceiling Material Instaling Direction
136 -
(3) 1-way outlet ceiling recessed type (FDTS)
Preparation of indoor unit

It can be installed by either one of the following methods. Select the most adequate method for your particular case.
A Standard installation
B Higher ceiling
Ceiling
Ceiling
Installation example and

limitation
3m ~ 4m
3m or less
Floor
Floor
Note (1) In the case of installing on the high ceiling, part of indoor unit requires some modification.
Procedures of rework
Installation on higher ceiling
Adhere the insulation materials attached to the direct blow panel on the blow outlet of indoor unit.
Blow outlet
Insulation materials

1)
Where cool and hot air will be distributed sufficiently.

Where the installation heigh exceeds 3m, warmed air is likely to concentrate close to the ceiling. In such case, you should
install also a circulator.
Reference
Cold air throw

Unit : m
Item
Reaching distance
Standard
Models
Higher ceiling
7
All models
[ Conditions ] 1. Unit heigh

Standard ceiling: 2.4--3.0(m) above floor
Higher ceiling: 3.0--4.0(m) above floor
2. Kind of operation: Hi
3. Place: Free space without obstruction;
4. Reaching distance means the horizontal distance for the wind to reach the floor.
5. Wind velocity at the reaching distance: 0.5m/s
Note (1) Wind capacity is UHi in case of a higher ceiling. It is value of Hi for other cases.
2)
Where the ceiling has sufficient rigidity.
3)
Where there is no obstacles in front of the suction intel and blow outlet.
4)
It should be avoided such places as kitchen, machine factory, etc. where there profuse liquid splashes or thick steam.
5)
Where the height of ceiling exceeds 200mm.
137 -
Where a space as shown below can be secured.

Unit : mm
200
or more
6)
Obstacle
100
or more
1000
or more
100
or more
Floor
7)
It should be avoided where a machine generating high frequency waves is installed.
8)
Select a place to branch the piping so that same distance will be a obtained for each of one way piping.
9)
Where humidity may exceed 80% behind the ceiling or the dew point may exceed 28C, adhere polyurethane foam materials
(t 10 or more) over the insulation materials on the external plate.
10) Where it is convenient for the piping and wiring to the outdoor.
11) Where protected from direct exposure to sun beams.
12) Where it is free from volatile gas generation.
(b) Standard Iocation
1) Installation
1
(Suspension bolt pitch)
30
Panel dimensions)
(Ceiling hole size)

770
(Air outlet)
(Ceiling ~
panel lap
dimensions)
40
600
(Piping connection side)

710
a) Ceiling hole size and position of suspension bolt
30
(Ceiling ~ panel lap
dimensions)
2
(Ceiling hole size)
3
(Panel dimensions)
Unit : mm
Mark
FDTS22, 28, 36, 45 type
990
1230
1290
180
FDTS71 type
1250
1440
1500
145
Models
b) Length of fixed suspension bolt (customer orderd parts M10)

[Reference] Suspension bolt pitch is adjustable within + 10mm in sidewise direction. Since there is no adjustment allowance in
back and forth direction, determine the position exactly with a measure. (Lap margin between ceiling and panel is
100 mm
or less
30mm.)
Suspension bolt
(M10)
138 -
Unit
c) Fixing of Suspension bolt. Fix the bolts securely as shown below or by any other adequate means.
Insert
Hole-in anchor bolt

Hole-in plug
Concrete
Suspension
bolt, M10
d) Installation
Drain pump box
Unit
Duct connection opening

for blowing through
lowered ceiling.
Suspension fixture (4 places)
Procedures
1 Install nuts on the Suspension bolts at onside. Suspension the suspension fixtures on the Suspension bolts first and then insert the
remaining fixtures on the remaining Suspension bolts at and lock them with nuts.
2 Since the indoor unit and the panel height cannot be adjusted, adjust the height using an attached pattern before fixing the indoor
unit.
Ceiling board
Panel mounting hole
Pattern
securing
screw
(attached)
Pattern
Detail - Section A
139 -
25
Using the external dimensions shown

on the pattern as a guide, cut out an
opening on the ceiling board.
Check of levelness
Check the levelness as follows. Use a level gauge or adjust the levelness with the following method.
Adjust the bottom of main unit
and the water level as shown
below.
Piping side
Water injection
Water level
0~3 mm
Vinyl pipe
Slightly lower the piping side
2) Drain pipe
a) Set the drain pipe as a declining gradient (1/50 ~ 1/100) and avoid to cross an over-hand ridge or to allow a trap on the way.
Good piping
Support fixture
Improper piping
1.5m~2m
Crossing
over-hang ridge
Air bleed
Declining gradient
1/100 or more
Trap
Insulation
materials
b)
When connecting the drain pipe, avoid undue stress being applied to the pipe at the unit side and fix the pipe at a point as close
as possible to the unit.
c)
A hard vinyl chloride pipe, general VP-25, which is available from markets is ideal for the drain pipe.
d)
When installing the drain pipe, make sure to use the attached drain pipe, drain pipe clamp, and insulation materials for drain
pipe clamp.
Insert the drain pipe to the base of outlet.
Securely tighten the drain pipe clamp.
Make sure to insulate the drain pipe clamp.
e)
When there are plural number of drain pipes, arrange to position the converging pipe at about 100mm below the drain outlet
as shown below. Use a pipe of VP-30 or higher for the converging pipe.
Should be as high as possible.
(Approx. 100 mm)
Declining gradient 1/100 or more
VP-30
f)
Make sure to provide the thermal insulation for the hard vinyl chloride pipe and drain socket provided indoor.
g)
Air bleed should not be provided in any event.

When it is necessary to raise the drain head, the limitation is up to 600mm below the bottom face of ceiling where the unit
is installed. The distance is the dimension of the pipe which is installed perpendicularly from a point close to the output for
drain pipe connection.
600mm or less
295~325
140 -
Drain test
[Perform this before installing the ornament panel]
Perform this upon completion of electrical work.
Gradually introduce 2,000~3,000cc of water as shown below.
Drain piping connection port
Fill from outlet port
Pour water into a convex joint
If the electrical work has not been completed, connect a convex joint
in the drain pipe connection to provide a water inlet.
Then, check if water leaks from the piping system and that drain flows
through the drain pipe normally.
Connect the remote control switch and set to cooling operation. The drain pump will operate with the compressor on.
Test whether or not the water is draining while listening to the operating sounds of the electric motor for the drain water.
Unit
Check the drainage condition by using the transparent socket.
Drain hose (provided)
Check that water is draining smoothly and that there is no water dripping from the connections or other areas.
Mounting the Panel
1
Open the inlet grille and remove the air block panel from the inside. (Remove the 2 screws.)
Air block panel
141 -
Approx. 15 mm
2 Mount the two (M5 x 35) panel mounting screws to the indoor unit
Detail of Section A
3 Hang the panel on the two mounting screws on the indoor unit by using the two
shaped holes. Slide the panel approximately 10
mm. Use the 5 panel mounting screws to secure the panel.
Sliding direction
4 Use the opening to connect the connectors for the louver motor and limit switches.
Opening
Connector
Ceiling opening
5 Reinstall the wind shield plate.
(c) Installation on higher ceiling

Adhere the insulation materials on the blow outlet of the indoor unit. All others are same as the standard
installation.
142 -
(4) Cassetteria type (FDR)

(a) Preparation of indoor unit
Before of during the installation of the unit, assemble necessary optional panel, etc. depending on the specific type.
(b) Select places for installation satisfying following conditions and, at the same time, obtain the consent on the
part of your client user.
1) Places where chilled or heated air circulates freely.
When the installation height exceeds 3 m, warmed air stays close to the ceiling. In such cases, suggest your client users to
install air circulators.
2) Places where perfect drainage can be prepared and sufficient drainage.
3) Places free from air disturbances to the suction port and blowout hole of the indoor unit, places where the fire alarm may not
malfunction or short-circuit.
4) Places with the environmental dew-point temperature is lower that 28C and the relative humidity is less than 80%.
( When installing at a place under a high humidity environment, pay sufficient attention the prevention of dewing such as
thermal insulation of the unit prperly.)
(c) Avoid installation and use at those place listed below.
1) Places exposed to oil splashes or steam (e.g. kitchens and machine plants).
Installation and use at such places incur deteriorations in the performance or corrosion with the heat exchanger or damage in
molded synthetic vesin parts.
2) Places where corrosive gas (such as sulfurous acid gas) or inflammable gas (thinner, gasoline, etc) in generated or remains.
Installation and use at such places cause corrosion in the heat exchanger and damage in molded synthetic resin parts.
3) Places adjacent to equipment generating electromagnetic waves or high-frequency waves such as in hospitals.
Generated noise may cause malfunctioning of the controller.
(d) Preparation for installation
1) Selection of suspension pattern
When the unit is hanged from ceiling, select one of following patterns depending on the dimensions of the ceiling.
< Combination with silent panel >
Mark
A
56 ~ 70
Models
FDR22, 28, 45, 56
71, 90 type
365 mm or more
FDR112, 140 type
416 mm or more
< Combination with canvas panel >

Mark
Models
495 mm or more
FDR112, 140 type
510 mm or more
150 ~ 300
FDR22, 28, 45, 56

71, 90 type
143 -
2) Ceiling hole size and position of suspersion bolt

When boring at the ceiling, use the pattern sheet included in the accessory of the unit.
Leave the pattern sheet on the unit till decorative panel is installed.
< Combination with silent panel >
Unit : mm
Mark
FDR22, 28, 45,

56 type
786
980
1040
FDR71, 80 type
986
1180
1240
FDR112, 140 type
1406
1600
1660
57
A
B
(Celing hole size)
C
(Panel dimensions)
57
30
(Panel dimensions)
Celing ~ panel
lap dimensions
30
545
70
70
690
(Celing hole pitch)
750
(Pipe connection side)
Models
(Celing ~ panel
lap dimensions)
525
(Ceiling hole size)

585
(Panel dimensions)
90
545
70
(Pipe connection side)
30
Ceiling ~ panel
lap dimensions)
< Combination with canvas panel >
A
B
(Ceiling hole size)
A
(Panel dimensions)
Unit : mm
Mark
FDR22, 28, 45,

56 type
786
804
864
FDR71, 80 type
986
1004
1064
FDR112, 140 type
1406
1424
1484
Models
9
30
Ceiling ~ panel
lap dimensions)
3) Suspension bolts installation

Locate the suspension bolts position by using the pattern sheet
(Use care of the piping direction when the unit is installed)
Hole-in anchor bolt

Hole-in plug
Insert
Concrete
Suspension
bolt M 10
(e) Installation of indoor unit

1) Fix the indoor unit to the suspension bolts.
M10 nut
If required, it is possible to suspend the unit to the beam, etc.
Suspension bolt
M10 washer
Directly by use of the bolts without using the suspension bolts.

Indoor unit
M10 spring washer
Note (1) When the dimensions of indoor unit and ceiling holes does not match, it can be adjusted with the slot holes of
mounting bracket.
144 -
2) Adjusting the units levelness

1 Adjust the out-of levelness using a level vial or by following method.
Make adjustment so that the relation between the lower surface of the unit proper and water level in the hose becomes as
given below.
Piping side
Supply water
Water level
0 ~ 5 mm
PVC hose
Bring the piping side slightly lower.
2 Unless the adjustment to the levelness is made properly, malfunctioning or failure of the float switch may occur.
3) Tap selection on blower unit
Taps of blower unit are set at the standard selection at the shipping from factory. Where the static pressure
is raised by changing the connection of connectors provided at the flank of control box as shown below.
(f) Installation of decorative panel
Name
Round head machine
screw (M5 x 35)
1) Case of silent panel
Blue
Black
White
Black
Brown
White
Q'ty
Position
4 pcs.
Securing the panel
a) Accessory
b) Installation procedures
Panel inner frame
1 Remove the inner frame of panel
Panel outer frame

Remove
< How to remove the panel inner frame >

Detach from pins (A) in the order of arrow 1 2
Open slightly as the arrow 3 and move toward the arrow 4 and detach from pin (B)
Panel outer frame

Pin (B)
Pin (A)
1
2
Panel inner frame
145 -
Motor side
White
Blue
Connector,
white
Red
White
Black
Motor side
Black
Blue
Red
Control box side
Blue
High speed tap
Red
White
Red
Connector,
white
Control box side
Standard tap (at shipping)
Abt. 30 mm
2 Install the panel outer frame on the Indoor unit.
Indoor unit
Panel outer frame
Temporary
setting
Panel inner frame
Procedures of installation
1 Secure the panel tentatively with 2 of 4 panel set screws (panel accessory) as shown above.
2 When the panel is supported with a pair of set screws, slide it in the arrow direction.
Note (1) Panel outer frame has the orientation.
3 Lock the former 2 and remaining 2 set screws.
4 Install the panel inner frame in the reverse order of removal.
2) Case of canvas panel
( Canvas duct (option) is necessary to install the canvas panel.)
a) Accessory
b) Mounting procedures
1 Install the canvas duct (option, 4 places) on the Indoor unit.
Indoor unit
Canvas duct
2 Round head screw
146 -
2 Remove the panel inner frame.

It can be removed same as the silent panel.
Panel inner frame
Panel outer frame

Remove
< How to remove the panel inner frame >
Pin (B)
Pin (A)
Panel outer frame
1
2
Panel inner frame
Detach from pins (A) in the order of arrow 1 2

Open slightly as shown by the arrow 3. move in the 4 arrow direction and detach from pin (B).
3 Install the chains on the panel outer frame. (4 places)
5 Chain
2 Round head screw
4 Install the panel outer frame.
Procedures of installation
Panel outer frame
Secure the holder tentatively as shown below. (4 places)
Canvas duct
Holder
147 -
Abt. 20 mm
Indoor unit
4 Holder
3 Round head screw
Hook the chain of panel outer panel on the holder.

Note (1) When hooking the chain.
make sure to avoid slackness on it by pushing
hard the panel outer
frame against the ceiling
material.
Ceiling material
Tighten 3 screw in the step 1 till the panel outer frame contacts closely with the ceiling material.
Secure the canvas duct and the panel outer frame with screws.
Canvas duct
1 Round head machine screw
Panel outer frame
5 Remove the panel inner frame and install in the reverse order of removal.
6 Cautions for duct installation work
Indoor unit
Convas duct
(Optional
parts)
Heat
insulation
Ceiling surface
Return air
port panel
Silent panel
Supply air port

Supply air duct
(to be purchased locally) (to be purchased locally)
Return air
port panel
(Canvas panel)
Calculate the draft and external static pressure and select the length, shape and blowout.
Supply air duct
1-spot, 2-spot, 3-spot and 4-spot with 200 type duct are the standard specifications. Determine the number of spots based on
following table.
FDR22 type
FDR28, 45, 56
type
FDR71, 90 type
FDR112, 140 type
1-spot
2-spot
2 ~ 3-spot (1)
3 ~ 4-spot (1)
Notes (1) Shield the central supply air port for 2-spot.
(2) Shield the supply air port around the center for 3-spot.
Limit the difference in length between spots at less than 2:1.

Reduce the length of duct as much as possible.
Reduce the number of bends as much as possible. (Corner R should be as larger as possible.)
Bad example
148 -
Bad example
Good example
Use a band, etc. to connect the indoor unit and the supply air duct flange.
Conduct the duct installation work before finshing the ceiling.
(g) Connection of air inteke and exhaust ducts.
State seeing from top of unit

Exhaust
Port
Side fresh air intake port

Rear fresh air intake port
Fig.1
Fig.2
1) Duct connecting position

a) Fresh air intake
Inlet can be selected from the side or rear faces depending on the working conditions.
Use the rear fresh air inlte when the simultaneous intake and exhaust is conducted. ( Side inlet cannot be used.)
b) Exhaust (Make sure to use also the air intake.)
Use the side exhaust port.
Attachment of ceiling material

Ceiling material can be attached to the panel innern frame.
(Plate thickness max. 15mm)
Ceiling material
Ornament plate
Panel inner frame

Stopper
Attachment procedures
1 Remove the stopper.
2 Remove the ornament plate and attach the ceiling material.
3 Hold down the ceiling material and return the stopper in position.
Note (1) If the ceiling material is attached, the ornament plate is not used.
149 -
(h) Drain piping

1) Drain piping should always be in a downhill grade (1/50-1/100) and avoid riding across an elevation or making traps.
Improper piping
Good piping
Suspension
bolts

1.5 m ~ 2m
Air vent

Heat
insulation
A downhill grade
of 1/100 or more
2) When connecting the drain pipe to the unit, pay suffcient attention not to apply excess force to the piping on the unit side.
Also, fix the piping at a point as possible to the unit.
3) For drain pipe, use hard PVC general purpose pipe VP-25 which can be purchased
Drain socket

Drain hose

(accessory
Joint for VP-25

(local procurement)
locally. When connecting, insert a PVC pipe end securely into the drain socket before tightening securely using the attached drain hose and clamp. Adhesive must not
be used connection of the drain socket and drain hose (accessory).
Main
unit
VP-25
(local procurement)
Drain hose
Clamp
Drain socket
(accessory) (accessory)
Pipe cover [insulation]
Adhesion (local procurement)
(accessory)
4) When constructing drain piping for several units, position the common pipe about 100mm below the drain outlet of each unit
as shown in the sketch below. Use VP-30 or thicker pipe for this purpose.

(approx. 100 mm)
A downhill grade
of 1/100 or more
VP-30
5) Be sure to provide heat insulation to hard PVC pipes of indoor placement.

6) Do not ever provide an vent.
7) The height of the drain head may be elevated up to a point 600mm from the bottom of unit and when an obstacle exists in the
ceiling space, elevate the piping to avoid the obstacle using an elbow or corresponding gadget. When doing this, if the
stretch for the needed height is too high, the back-flow quantity of drain at the time of interruption of the operation gets too
much and it may cause overflow at the drain pan. Therefore, make the height of the drain pipe withing the distance given in
the drawing below.
Drain hose
600 mm
(local maximum
height of drain head)
295 ~ 325
Right above
Joints for VP-25
8) Avoid positioning the drain piping outlet at a place where ganeration of odor may be stimulated. Do not lead the drain piping
direct into a sewer from where sulfur gas may ganerate.
150 -
9) Drainage test
a) During trial operation, make sure that drainage is properly execued and check that leakage is not found at connections.
b) Be sure to carry out a drainage test when installing the system during a heating season.
c) When installing the system in a building under construction, carry out the drainage test before ceiling tiles are installed.
Insert a water filing hose by approx 50 mm and feed water.
(Be sure to insert the water filing hose in a downward direction.)
Remove the gromment.

Be sure to restro it to the original
position after the test is over.
1 Supply approx 1000cc of water through the outlet of the unit using a feed water pump.
2
Make sure that drainage is proceeding properly at the see-through outlet of the unit.
*Also confirm the revolving sound of the condensate motor when checking the drainage.
3 Then remove the drain plug at lower section of the unit to drain water off. After making sure water is not left, restore the
drain plug to the original position.
10) Drainage from the lower drain socket
Only if the drain pipe can be in-
The upper drain socket
stalled in a downhill grade (1/501/100), the lower drain socket can

be used for connecting to the drain
(Piping connection)
A hard PVC general-purpose pipe
pipe as illustrated.
The lower drain socket
Heat insulator
Rubber plug
(Remove the rubber plug)
(Disconnect the connector for the

drain motor)
As shown in the sketch to the right, disconnect the drain motor
connector CnR (blue color coding).
Caution:
If the system is started with this
connector connected as is, drain
Disconnect Condensate
motor connector
CnR (2P Blue)
water is discharged out of the upper drain socket causing a heavy

water lekage.
151 -
(5) Satellite ducted type (FDUM)

1)
Avoid installation and use at those places listed below.

a) Places exposed to oil splashes or steam (e.g. kitchens and machine plants).
Installation and use at such places will incur deteriorations in the performance or corrosion with the heat exchanger or
damage in molded synthetic resin parts.
b) Places where corrosive gas (such as sulfurous acid gas) or inflammable gas (thinner, gasoline, etc.) is gnerated or remains.
c) Places adjacent to equipment generating electromagnetic waves or high-frequency waves such as in hospitals. Generated
noise may cause malfunctioning of the controller.
2)
Select places for installation satisfying the following conditions and, at the same time, obtain the consent on the part of your
client user,.
a) Places where chilled or heated air circulates freely. When the installation height exceeds 3m, warmed air stays close to the
ceiling. In such cases, suggest your client users to install air circulators.
b) Places where perfect drainage can be prepared and sufficient drainage gradient is available.
c) Places free from air disturbances to the return air port and supply hole of the indoor unit, places where the fire alarm may not
malfunction to short circuit.
d) Places with the environmental dew-point temperature is lower than 28C and the relative humidity is less than 80%.
( When installing at a place under a high humidity environment, pay sufficient attention to prevention of dewing such as
thermally insulating the unit properly.)
Check if the selected place for installation is rigid enough to stand the weight of thew unit.
Otherwise, apply reinforcement using boards and beams before starting the installation work.
Unit : mm
Inspection
space
Mark
FDUM36, 45, 56 type
1100
630
FDUM71, 90 type
1300
830
FDUM112, 140 type
1720
1250
Models
620
100
3)
152 -
(b) Suspension
Be sure to observe the finished length of the suspension bolts given below.
Unit : mm
Mark
472
Models
FDUM36, 45, 56 type
786
FDUM71, 90 type
986
FDUM112, 140 type
1406
1) Fixing the suspension bolt (customer ordered parts M10)

Securely fix the suspension bolt as illustrated below or in another way.
Hole in anchor bolt
Hole-in plug
Insert
Concrete
Suspension bolt M10
Suspension bolt
M10 nuts
Suspension bolt M10
M10 Washer
Indoor unit
60mm or less
Indoor unit
M10 Spring washer
2) Adjusting the units levelness

a) Adjust the out-levelness using a level vial or by the following method.
Make adjustment so that the relation between the lower surface of the unit proper and water level in the hose becomes given
below.
Piping side
Supply water
0 ~ 5 mm
PVC hose
Bring the piping side slightly lower
b) Unless the levelness is adjusted properly, the malfunction of the float switch will occur.
3) Tap selection on blower unit.
Taps of on blower unit are set at the standard selection at the shipping from factory. Where the static pressure is raised by
changeing the connection of connectors provided at the flank of control box as shown below.
High speed tap
Blue
Black
White
153 -
Red
Blue
Black
White
Blue
Black
Brown
White
Motor side
White
Red
Connector,
white
Connector,
red
Black
Control box side
Blue
Motor side
Red
Connector,
white
Connector,
white
Control box side
Standard tap (at shipping)
(c) Duct installation
1 Supply air duct

Same as FDR series. Refer to page 148.
2 Access door
Access door must be provided without fail.
Dimensions of access door and service space
( See exterior dimensions in page 44 to 46.)
3 Return air port
An air filter is not included in the indoor unit. Use the return air port with air filter.
4 Return air duct: Use square duct.
5 Return air port with canvas duct
1) Connection of intake and exhaust ducts.
Looking from top of unit
Exhaust port
Side fresh air intake port

Intake duct
(square duct)
Fig.1
Fig.2
Fresh air intake

port midway
of return duct
2) Duct connecting position.

< Fresh air intake >
a) Use side air intake port.
b) In case of simultaneous intake and exhaust, the side air intake port cannot be used, therefore, take air from the midway air intake
port along the intake duct.
< Exhaust >
Make sure to use suction as well.
c) Use a side exhaust port.

3) Duct connection
Use intake and exhaust duct flange of separately sold (for connection of 125mm round duct) to connect 125mm round duct.
The duct clamped by bands must be thermally insulated to prevent dew condensation.
154 -
(d) Drain piping

1) Drain piping should always be in a downhill grade (1/50-1/100) and avoid riding across an elevation or makeing traps.
Improper piping
Good piping
Suspension
bolts
1.5 m ~ 2m
Air vent
Heat
insulation

A downhill grade
of 1/100 or more
2) When connecting the drain pipe to the unit, pay suffcient attention not to apply excess force to the piping on the unit side.
Also, fix the piping at a point as close as possible to the unit.
3) For drain pipe, use hard PVC general purpose pipe VP-25 which can be purchased
locally. When connecting, insert a PVC pipe end securely into the drain socket before
Drain socket

Drain hose
tightening securely using the attached drain hose and clamp. Adhesive must not be used
connection of the drain socket and drain hose ( accessory).
(accessory)
Joint for VP-25

(local procurement)
Main
unit
VP-25
(local procurement)
Drain hose
Clamp
Drain socket
(accessory) (accessory)
Pipe cover [insulation]
Adhesion (local procurement)
(accessory)
4) When constructing drain piping for several units, position the common pipe about 100 mm below the drain outlet of each
unit as shown in the sketch below. Use VP-30 or thicher pipe for this purpose.
(approx. 100 mm)
A downhill grade of
1/100 or more
VP30
5) Be sure to provide heat insulation to hard PVC pipes of indoor placement.

6) Do not ever provide an air vent.
7) The height of the drain head may be elevated up to a point 600 mm from the bottom of unit and, when an obstacle exists in
the ceiling space, elevate the piping to avoid the obstacle using an elbow or corresponding gadget. When doing this, if the
stretch for the needed height is too high, the back-flow quantity of drain at the time of interruption of the operation gets too
much and it may cause overflow at the drain pan. Therfore, make the height of the drain pipe withing the distance given in
the drawing below.
600 mm
(local maximum
height of drain head)
295 ~ 325
Drain hose
Right above
Joints for VP-25
8) Avoid positioning the drain piping outlet at a place where generation of odor may stimulated. Do not lead the drain piping
direct into a sewer from where sulfur gas may generate.
155 -
9) Drainage test
a) During trial operation, make sure that drainage is properly execued and check that leakage is not found at connections.
b) Be sure to carry out a drainage test when installing the system during a heating season.
c) When installing the system in a building under construction, carry out the drainage test before ceiling tiles are installed.
Insert a water filing hose by approx 50 mm and feed water.
(Be sure to insert the water filing hose in a downward direction.)
Remove the grommet.

Be sure to restro it to the original
position after the test is over.
1 Supply approx 1000cc of water through the outlet of the unit using a feed water pump.
2
Make sure that drainage is proceeding properly at the see-through outlet of the unit.
* Also confirm the revolving sound of the condensate motor when checking the drainage.
3 Then remove the drain plug at lower section of the unit to drain water off. After making sure water is not left, restore the
drain plug to the original position.
The upper drain socket
10) Drainage from the lower drain socket

Only if the drain pipe can be installed in a downhill grade (1/50(Piping connection)
1/100), the lower drain socket can
A hard PVC general-purpose pipe
be used for connecting to the drain

pipe as illustrated.
The lower drain socket
Heat insulator
Rubber plug
(Remove the rubber plug)
( Disconnect the connector for the

drain motor)
As shown in the sketch to the right,
disconnect the drain motor connector CnR ( blue color coding).
If the system is started with this
connector connected as is, drain
Disconnect Condensate
motor connector
CnR (2P Blue)
water is discharged out of the upper drain socket causing a heavy

water lekage.
156 -
(6) Ceiling Supension type (FDE)

1) A place where good air circulation and delivery can be obtained.
Cold air throw

Unit : m
Models
FDE36, 45, 56 type
FDE71 type
FDE112 type
FDE140 type
Air throw
7.5
9.5
10
Conditions
(1) Installation height: 2.4 ~ 3.0 m above the floor
(2) Fan speed: Hi
(3) Location: Free space without obstacles
(4) Distance of reach indicates the horizontal distance after the wind touched down the floor.
(5) Air velocity at the throw: 0.5 ( m/sec.)
2)
A place where ceiling has enough strength to support the unit.
3)
A place where there is no obstruction to the return air inlet and supply air outlet ports.
4)
Places exposed to oil splashes or steam (e.g. kitchens and machine plants).
Installation and use at such places will incur deteriorations in the performance or corrosion with the heat exchanger or damage
in molded synthetic resin parts.
5)
A place where the space shown below may be secured.
Ceiling mouting installation

Unit : mm
300 or more
100 or more
150 or more
5 or more
Obstacle
6)
This unit uses a microcomputer as a control device. Therefore avoid installing the unit near the equipment that generates
strong electromagnetic waves and noise.
(b) Installation preparation

1) Drilling of holes for interconnecting piping and wiring.
a) Drill a hole through the wall in accordance with the piping diameter. We recommend using a hole saw drill of 70 ~ 86 mm
diameter and the hole should be drilled on an incline from inside to outside.
b) Insert the accessory piping sleeve into the hold and cut it to the proper length in accordance with wall thickness.
2) Installation of suspension bolts
a) Use the template sheet to determine the positions of suspension bolts and refrigerant pipings. The refrigerant piping can be
routed either to the right, left, top or rear.
157 -
b) Positions of suspension bolts are as in the drawing below.

When the suspension brackets face out
Suspemsion
bolt hole
Suspemsion
bolt hole
650
Air
outlet
50
31
B
D
Suspension
bracket
240
5
240
5
Suspemsion
bracket
50
31
140 275
A
Air
outlet
140 275
650
When the suspension brackets face in
8
31
C
D
8
31
Unit : mm
Mark
FDE36, 45, 56 type
1000
900
984
938
FDE71, 112 type
1260
1160
1244
1198
FDE140 type
1470
1370
1454
1408
Models
c) In case of ferro-concrete buildings

Fix the suspension bolts in the following way.
Insertion
150 ~ 160
Steel reinforcement rods
Concrete
M8 ~ M10 (3/8) suspension bolts
25 ~ 45 mm
d) Length of suspension (in cace of exposed type installtion)

Notes (1) In case the susprnsion bracket face in, and the supension
bolts are made to the length as shown in the left drawing
the bolts ends will be put in the plasitics cap of the
indoor unit top panel.
(2) Dont remove the plastics cap.
Ceiling board
Suspension bolts
(c) Installation of indoor unit

1 Remove a fixing bolt of the side panel.
1) Detach the inside panel and suspension bracket
2 Unhook four hooks (marked
) by sliding the side
panel in front side about 10mm, and detach the side
panel from the unit.

Position of the hooks
1
m
ab
0m
out 1
Front
Rear
Slide for front side about 10 mm
158 -
2) In case of exposed installation to the ceiling ( with suspension brackets facing in)
25 ~ 45 mm
a) Fix the suspension brackets to suspension bolts
Ceiling boards
Suspension bolt [M8~M10 (3/8)]
Suspension bracket (accessory parts)
Flat washer (accessory parts)
Hexagonal nuts (accessory parts)
b) Hook the unit to suspension brackers

Suspension bracket
Suspension bracket fixing bolts

(let them protrude 8 ~ 12 mm from the unit)
c) Fix unit securely in place by tightening the suspension bracket fixing bolts.
d) Attach the side panels and installation is finished.
Ceiling
3) In case the unit is half recessed into the ceiling ( the suspension brackets facing outside)
a) Open a hole in the ceiling large enough for the unit and necessary installation work. ( Fill up the excess opening after the
installation work is finished.)
Opening
re
r mo
300 o
Unit : mm
61
re
r mo
300 o
10
10
159 -
b) Installation space dimensions
80
(FDE112,140)
Unit upper
side
10
160
10
24
(Plug in dimensions)
(FDE36,45,56,71)
Unit: mm
Ceiling board
10
c) Mount the unit using suspension bolts
Suspension bolts
Flat washer (accessory parts)
Hexagonal nuts (accessory parts)
d) Securely tighten the nuts and fix the indoor unit place.
e) Attach the side panels and fit in ceilling board in the space around the unit and the work is finished.
Fit in ceiling boards here
4) Gradient for drainage

Mounting with proper gradient for drainage is needed as shown below.
Front and rear directions
0~3 mm
0~3 mm
In right and left directions
Caution In case of gradient is contrary, water may leak out.

Indoor side of drain pipe must be thermally insulated.
Note (1) In case of left-hand side drainage, the gradient will be to

the opposite side.
160 -
(7) Wall mounted type (FDK)

1) Select the best position and direction depending on the shape of room and height of ceiling to ensure that the cooled or warmed
air will be circulated sufficiently.
cold air throw
Unit : m
Models
200 mm
or more
FDK22 type FDK28 type FDK36, 45 type FDK56, 71 type

Item
Air throw
5
5.5
150 mm
or more
200 mm
or more
[Conditions]
a) Fan speed: Hi
b) Location: Free space without obstacles
c) Distance of reach indicates the horizontal distance after the wind touched down the floor.
d) Air yelocity at the throw:0.5 (m/sec.)
2)
Where there is no obstacle around the Air inlet port or Air outlet port.
3)
Where a sufficient space can be reserved for the service of air filter and the attachment/removal of panels.
4)
Places exposed to oil splashes or steam (e.g. kitchens and machine plants ).
Installation and use at such place will incur deteriorations in the performance or corrosion with the heat exchanger or damage
5)
Where pipes and wires can be arranged conveniently.
6)
On the solid floor
7)
Where the unit is not exposed directly to sun light.
8)
Place where corrosive gas ( such as sulfurous acid gas ) or inflammable gas ( thinner, gasoline, etc.) is generated or remains.
9)
Where a complete draining can be assured.
10) Where a sufficient space can be reserved for service.

(b) Method to install the mounting plate
1) Indoor unit weighs about 20 kgs. Be sure to check closely the installation place and, if any risk is expected, provide a sufficient
reinforcement with plates or beams. Indoor unit cannot be secured directly on the wall, etc.
Attached mounting plate must be used.
Concrete wall
(Use marketed anchors (M6)
Wooden wall
Example of nut anchor

Wood
screw
Bolt
Mounting
plate
Mounting
plate
Example of bolt anchor

Nut
Mounting
plate
10 mm
or over
2) When installing a mounting plate on the wall, adjust it at level precisely and fix securely. Use the marketed anchor bolts (M6)
Min.
210 mm
when the wall is made of concrete.
Mounting plate
161 -
Set this face

at level
Secure as tightly as
a wight of 90 kgs
can be supported.
Nuts,screws
(c) Installation
1) Use an attached pattern sheet and mark the position of screws to attach the mounting plate.
2) Determine the direction to lead the pipe and bore a through hole on the wall aligning with the pipe hole of unit.
Wall
Indoor
Outdoor
Sealing
plate
Wall
70 mm
Sleeve
Cut the sleeve for the thickness
of wall and insert in the hole.
3)
Remove screws (2 pcs.) and remove the right and left
2
1
panels from the Indoor unit. ( Remove screws first, move

slightl to remove.)
4)
Remove the lower panel from the Indoor unit. It can be

remove if 3 screws are loosened but not removed.
5)
Secure the mounting plate with screws at a selected

place on the wall. When the wall is made of concrete,
use the marketed anchor bolts (M6)
162 -
Front
Sleeve
6) Hook and install the indoor unit on the mounting plate

from top. Hook slightly at left at first and return to right.
7) Fix the indoor unit on the mounting plate with a screw.
8) Install the lower panel at the original position.
9) Install the right and left side panels at their original

position.
10) This is all for the installation.
163 -
(8) Floor standing exposed type (FDFL)

Cold air throw
Unit : m
Models
All models
Air throw
[Conditions]
(1) Fan speed: Hi
(4) Air velocity at the throw: 0.5 (m/sec.)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
On the solid floor
7)
8)
Places where corrosive gas (such as sulfurous acid gas) or inflammable gas ( thinner, gasoline, etc.) is generated or remains.
Installation and use at such place will cause corrosion in the heat exchanger and damage in molded synthtic resin parts.
9)

Floor standing installation
Wall fixation
150 or more
Unit : mm
1000 or more
Floor fixation
150 or more
600 or more
600 or more
Floor
(b) Bolt positions

1) Bolt positions for metal settings used for floor fixation.
2) Bolt positions for wall fixation

unit : mm
Metal fitting used for floor fixation (accessories).
195
205
unit : mm
205
Front side
Rcar side
806(1091)
1196(1481)
470
220 250
98
32
10 30 Slotted holes
M8
1196(1481)
786(1071)
195
View from the floor
12 24
M10
Slotted holes for

wall mounting
Note (1) Value in ( ) indicates 71 type.
164 -
Level adjusting screw
(c) Installation of unit

1) Floor standing installation
a) Position of mounting bracket fixing bolts
Drill holes by referring to figures below.
When fixed on the wall
Bolt for wall mounting
4 places
Hole for piping &
wiring on wall
30
Wall
When fixed on the floor
Hole for piping

& wiring on floor
2 places
Note (1) Be sure to use a bolt of the length for wall mouning.
b) The methed of drilling the wall is as follows.

Wall
Indoor
Wall
Outdoor
Sealing plate
Sleeve
70~86 mm
Sleeve
c) Remove the front and side panels.

Case front panel
Top panel
Case side panel

Side panel
Case front panel

Frame
Case side panel
Case front panel
d) Level the unit using the level adjusting screw. Installation will be complrted after attaching side and front panel.
e) Exceute fixation following the directions described below.

Frame side panel
Tighten the bolt for floor
fixation using a flat washer
and double nut.
Mounting platc
(Accessories)
165 -
Tighten the bolt for wall

and double nut.
(d) Drain piping

The drain piping can be directed to the floor or rear sides as follows.
(a) Connect a drain piping to the drain outlet and fix it by use of tigghening band.
(b) Indoor side drain piping must be thermally insulated.
(c) After finishing the drain piping, check the drainage by pouring some water in the drain pan.
Up-and-down bend
Bad
Bad
Trap
Decrine
(e) Installation of remote controller ( on the indoor unit )

Attached remote controller may be installed on the indoor unit as shown below. The work can be done on the spot when the
customer asks so or by other reasons.
Refer to the page 153 when it is instralled on the wall.
1) Detach the front panel.
Unit: mm
A
84 0.5
Wiring hole 16
2-3.0
VIEW A
(Holes of tapping screws)
2) Remote controller installation.

Attach the lower case with the screws (M4 128) accessory.
3) Remote controller wiring.
a) Connect the terminals between the remote controller and the control box as per these wire color codes:[ (X) (red). (Y) (white),
(Z) (biack)], using the wires included in the kit.
b) The wires should have a surplus length of approximately 30 cm. (Necessary when servicing with the front panel detached.)
c) Strip and solder as shown below when cutting the wire. (Omitting the soldering process may cause looseness of the wiring.)
10 ~ 15 mm
10 mm(Stripe and soldering.)
166 -
4) Wiring route.
a) Wire from the wiring hole through the rear side of the control box to the terminal block.
b) Any suplus wires should be tied up with a cable tie.
Remote controller
installation section
Cable tip
Control box
Front Side
(8) Floor standing hidden type (FDFU)

(a) Selection of installation hidden location
Cold air throw
Unit : m
Models
All models
Air throw
[Conditions]
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
(1) Fan speed: Hi

(4) Air velocity at the throw: 0.5 (m/sec.)
On the solid floor
Places where corrosive gas (such as sulfurous acid gas) or inflammable gas ( thinner, gasoline, etc.) is generated or remains.
Installation and use at such place will cause corrosion in the heat exchanger and damage in molded synthtic resin parts.

Floor standing installation
Floor fixation
Wall fixation
Peri cover
1000
600
unit : mm
Peri cover
100
100
600
Floor
167 -
(b) Bolt positions

2) Bolt positions for wall fixation
1) Bolt positions for metal settings used for floor fixation.

Metal fitting used for floor fixation (accessories).
unit : mm
1150(1435)
Bolt positions for floor mounting hardware

Floor mounting hardware
(Provided parts)
10 x 30 elongated hole
Use M8
112
786 (1071)
179
Back
250
220
470
Front
806(1091)
Elongated hole for

wall mounting
4 - 12 24
Use M10
As viewed from floor side.

Note (1) Value in ( ) indicates 71 type.
Screw for adjusting

levelness.
(c) Installation of unit

1) Floor standing installation
a) Position of mounting bracket fixing bolts
Drill holes by referring to figures below.
Bolt for wall mounting
4 places
Hole for piping &
wiring on wall
30
Wall
Hole for piping

& wiring on floor
2 places
Note (1) Be sure to use a bolt of the length for wall mouning.
b) The methed of drilling the wall is as follows.

Wall
Indoor
Wall
Outdoor
Sealing plate
Sleeve
70~86 mm
Sleeve
c) Level the unit using the level adjusting screw. Installation will be complrted after attaching side and front panel.
d) Exceute fixation following the directions described below.

Frame side panel
Tighten the bolt for floor
and double nut.
Mounting platc
(Accessories)
168 -
Tighten the bolt for wall

and double nut.
(d) Drain piping

The drain piping can be directed to the floor or rear sides as follows.
(a) Connect a drain piping to the drain outlet and fix it by use of tigghening band.
(b) Indoor side drain piping must be thermally insulated.
(c) After finishing the drain piping, check the drainage by pouring some water in the drain pan.
Up-and-down bend
Bad
Bad
Trap
Decrine
5.2 Installation of the remote controller (Optional parts)

(1) Selection of installation location
(b) Remote controller cords can be taken out upward only as

shown below.
Top
Following locations should be avoided:

(a) Where exposed to direct sunlight
(b) Near the heat source
(c) Highly humid area or where splashed with water
(d) Uneven installation surface
(2) Selection of installation location
(Cord take-out direction)
Exposed installation
(a) Remove the remote controller case.
Insert finger nails between the upper (white) and lower
(brown) cases and ply them to open.
Cut the remote controller lower case off at the top and thin
section with a nipper, knife or other and remove burrs from
the cut with a file or other.
(c) Secure the remote controller lower case on the wall with 2
Top
pieces of wood-screws.
Upper case (white)

Lower case
Lower case (brown)
Bottom
(d) Connect the remote controller cords with the terminal block.
Make sure to align the terminal numbers on the indoor unit
and the remote controller. Polarities are specified on the terminal block so that the unit will not be operated if the cords
are connected improperly.
Terminals: (X) red wire, (Y) white wire, (Z) black wire
169 -
(e) Set necessary functions in accordance with the model of indoor unit.
Refer to (c) for the setting of functions.
(f ) Couple the upper case with the lower case as they were.
(g) Secure the remote controller cords on the wall or other using cord
clamps.
(3) Setting the functions

Change the setting of selector switches (SW1 ~ SW4)
and jumper wires (J1 ~ J4) in accordance the functions
of indoor unit and purposes of use.
To indoor unit
Embedded installation
1) Have a Electrical box and remote controller cords (use shielding wires
or twisted pair wires for extension) embedded in the wall in advance.
Upper case
J6
Remote controller cords
Selector switch
(SW1 ~ SW4)
Electrical box
(Provided by customer)
2) Remove the upper case from the remote controller.

3) Secure the remote controller body on the electrical box with 2 pieces
of M4 round head screw (provided by customer).
4) Connect remote controller cords with the remote controller.
(Refer to the section regarding the exposed installation.)
5) Couple the upper case with the lower case as it was to finish up the
installation.
Functions of selector switches
Switch
SW1
SW2
SW3
M4 round head screw x 2 pieces
(Provided by customer)
Function
C
Model type - Cooling only
Model type - Heat pump model
ON
Remote control sensor - Valid
OFF
Remote control sensor - Invalid
ON
Power failure compensation - Provided
OFF
Power failure compensation - Not provided
SW4
Cautions for extension of remote controller cords
Heat sensor
element
Jumper wire
(J1 ~ J4)
Remote controller selector - Slave
Remote controller selector - Master
Functions of jumper wires
Make sure to use shielding wires only.

All models: 0.3 mm2 x 3 core wires [MVVS3C, products of
Keihan Cables]
Note (1) When the extension distance exceeds 100 m, change the wire size as
follows:
100 ~ 200 m ... 0.50 mm2 3 core wires
~ 300 m ... 0.75 mm2 3 core wires
~ 400 m ... 1.25 mm2 3 core wires
~ 600 m ... 2.00 mm2 3 core wires
Name
J1
J2
J3
Make sure to ground one side only of the shielding wire.

J4
J6
Function
With
Return air temperature display - Valid
None (1) Return air temperature display - Invalid

With
None
(1)
With
Blow rate display - 3 speed

Blow rate display - 2 speed
Timer function - Valid (Normal)
None (1) Timer function - Invalid

With
Auto swing display-With
None (1) Auto swing display - None

With
For GHP multi
None (1) For KXR multi
Note (1) None means it is not installed on the PCB or open.
170 -
5.3 Installation of outdoor unit

(1) Selection of installation site (After getting the approval from the customer, select the installation site.)
OWARNING
Do not install the outdoor unit where the exhaust gas from the outdoor unit may enter the room. If it is installed near
the intake/exhaust openings, window or ventilation opening, the exhaust gas may enter and causing danger inside
the room.
Install the outdoor unit outside in a properly ventilated location. Accumulating exhaust gas can pose danger.
Be sure to disperse the exhaust gas into the open without affecting the surroundings.
Install the outdoor unit in a secure and firm location.
OCAUTION
Do not install the outdoor unit in a place where combustible gas generates, flows in, accumulates or leaks. Also, test
periodically gas piping inside the unit and the local gas piping.
When installing the unit, provide the specified clearance from combustible materials.
S Select the installation site for the outdoor unit according to the following conditions.
Install the outdoor unit to satisfy the installation
standard and operation instruction of the gas
equipment for the business.
Place where air is accumulated.
Place where the installation area is sturdy
Place where there is no obstacle against air at the
intake and blow-out openings.
Place not exposed to thermal radiation from another
heat source
Place where drain water flows well

Place where noise or heat wind does not influence
the adjacent house.
Place not buried by snow
Place where the blowout opening is not exposed to
strong wind
Place where exhaust gas is not accumulated
S Impossible at the place enclosed with four walls. Assure a space of 2m or more above the top.
S Install the outdoor unit at the place where any short circuit does not result from the heat exhaust of the unit.
S If plural outdoor units are installed, assure a sufficient suction space to prevent a short circuit from occurring.
S In the snow district, provide the framework or snow-proof hood to prevent the outdoor unit from being buried by snow.
S If any influence may result from vibration, install the vibration insulator.
(2) Clearance from combustible materials
Exhaust gas port

10 or more
150 or more
150 or more
Exhaust gas port
(PROJECTIOM VIEW)
600
(RIGHT SIDE VIEW)
or more
(Unit: mm)
Front side
The dimentions above are not dimensions for installation clearance.
171 -
10 or more
Front side
(3) Installation Space
Exposure to the sideward wind
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;
(a)
Installation of single unit
(a)
600 or more
350
or more
50 or more
Install the blowout port of the unit at a right angle

against the wind direction.
(Unit: mm)
Wind
direction
2000 or more
(Front side)
Wind
direction
1000 or more
(b)
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
Installation of plural units
(b)
600 or more
1000 or more
(Front side)
50
or more
350
or more
50
or more
(Note 1)
fix the unit on the study foundation with steel wire

or similar.
350
or more
(Front side)
50
or more
If the foundation is unstable or wind blows sideward,
50
or more
Steel wire
50
or more 1000
or more
Note (1) If plural units are installed, limit three units in series and produce
a unit-to-unit space of 350mm. (Passage for maintenance)
(4) Transportation and installation of unit

(a) Transportation
1)
When transporting the packed unit, unload it as near as possible to the

installation site.
2)
When unpacking and relocating the unit, lift the unit with the rope, while
preventing it from being injured.
2)
Fasten the rope only on the predetermind points on the unit.
OWARNING
Make sure to fasten the rope on the specified points on the unit
and use the appopriate weight when lifting the unit.
Lift the unit on four or more points.
OCAUTION
When removing the packing vinyl bag, take care not to touch the
fins of the heat exchanger.
(b) Installation
OWARNING
Install the unit firmly to withstand strong winds or earthquakes, the unit may fall down and cause injury.
OCAUTION
Constract the foundation completely with proper drainage around the permeter of the foundation to prevent water
accumlation
172 -
1)
2)
Refer to the figure below for the foundation. Construct on the ground the hatched portion of the foundation completely
as shown below.
Install the unit on a level ground. (slope of 1/2000 or less)
164
164
(Back side)
1050
1000
Caution for installation

When the optional vibration-proof base is
used, the pitchesof the bolts (W1560 X
D960) varies. For details,refer to
Installation manual for vibration-proof
base.
Anchor bolt hole (20)

(M124 places)
40
40
1233
1580
1744
(Front side)
637
82
(5) Fuel gas piping

OWARNING
After connecting the fuel gas pipe, be sure to take the gas leakage test.
For the gas leakage test, use soapy water or the gas leak tester. Never attempt to take the gas leak test of the flame
color reaction since it is very dangerous.
OCAUTION
Support the fuel gas pipe as necessary. If any pipe is poorly supported, the stresses will be concentrated on the pipe,
possibly causing the pipe to be cracked.
Use the metallic fuel gas pipe, and be sure to use the outdoor type reinforced gas hose or the low-pressure hose with
the fitting for liquefied petroleum gas. Never use any flexible pipe.
(a) Fuel gas piping layout
Pressure output port tap

Main valve
Fuel inlet (25A)
260
Outdoor unit
Strainer
Drain
154
Outdoor type reinforced gas hose or low-pressure

hose with the fitting for liquefied gas
(6) Exhaust gas drain piping

OWARNING
Never connect the exhaust gas drain water of the outdoor unit to the water pipe of the drain water of the indoor unit.
Otherwise, the exhaust gas will enter the indoor room.
Since the exhaust gas drain water of the outdoor unit is at the high temperature, never touch the water, or it can cause burns.
OCAUTION
Discharge the exhaust gas drain into the drain channel, gutter or other which is released to the open air. Never place
any drain hose on the floor surface.
* If it is specially exposed on the roof, extend the drain pipe to discharge the drain to the rain water drain port (roof
drain). If any exhaust gas drain is discharged to on the floor surface, it will sometimes damage the waterproof sheet
and stain the concrete surface.
Notes (1) Use the hard vinyl chloride pipe to extend the drain.
(2) Be sure to slope the pipe downward.
(3) Be sure to release the exhaust gas drain to drop into the concentrated pipe, gutter or similar.
(4) Carry out the work to prevent exhaust gas drain from scattering.
(5) In cold districts, exhaust drain piping may freeze, install heater to prevent any blockade.
173 -
Installing procedure of exhaust gas drain pipe

(Example of concentrated pipe)
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
Drain channel
Exhaust gas
drain hose
Field piping
Do not place trap on the concentrated pipe, and provide a downward
slope of 1/100 or more.
Gas releasing
Exhaust gas
drain hose
Drain channel
Install one gas bleeder between

the outdoor units.
5.4 Refrigerant piping

(1) Refrigerant piping length Indoor unit height restrictions
Model
All models
Outdoor unit to first branch (Main line)
MAX. 70 m
First branch to each indoor unit (Branch piping)
MAX. 40 m
Maximum length for each indoor unit

(To farthest unit)
MAX. 100 m
Item
Difference in
height of indoor
and outdoor unit
When outdoor unit is

above
When outdoor unit is
below
MAX. 50 m
MAX. 40 m
Difference in height between indoor

units in the same system
MAX. 15 m
(2) Selection procedure for refrigerant piping

Model
Item
Sum up
to down
streem
capacity
GHCP450HMTE4
Gas line
Liquid line
Outdoor unit
34.92
Main piping
Part number of
branch used
GHCP560HMTE4
Part number of
branch used
Gas line
Liquid line
15.88
38.1
19.05
34.92
15.88
38.1
19.05
~ Less than 101
15.88
9.52
DIS-2KX10-E
15.88
9.52
DIS-2KX10-E
101 or more ~
less than 180
180 or more ~
less than 371
371 or more ~
less than 540
19.05
9.52
DIS-2KX20-E
19.05
9.52
DIS-2KX20-E
25.4
12.7
DIS-2KX30-E
25.4
12.7
DIS-2KX30-E
31.8
15.88
DIS-1KX40-E
31.8
15.88
DIS-1KX40-E
540 or more ~
38.1
19.05
DIS-1KX40-E
38.1
19.05
DIS-1KX40-E
Note (1) If adjustment is required between the branch connection and the unit port diameter, always perform that adjustment at the branch connection.
174 -
ID
15.88
12.7
ID
15.88
370
Liquid line
87
ID
9.52
6.35
ID
9.52
Liquid line
12.7
ID
15.88
424
Gas line
94.5
Gas line
370
87
12.7
15.88
ID
12.7
ID
9.52 19.05
ID
9.52
12.7
Liquid line
ID
ID
12.7
19.05
15.88 9.52
12.7 6.35
ID
19.05
Liquid line
519
Gas line
118
Gas line
DIS-2KX30-E
ID
25.4
19.05
15.88
ID
25.4
28.58
12.7
Liquid line
94.5
15.88
19.05
ID
19.05
15.88
12.7
ID
Liquid line
Diameter is same as
above dimensions
424
Gas line
94.5
Gas line
DIS-2KX20-E
Gas line
132
Gas line
ID
28.58
25.4
19.05
15.88
DIS-1KX40-E
25.4
31.8
ID
38.1
38.1
ID
31.8
Model Item
370
Liquid line
87
ID
9.52
ID
9.52
6.35
Liquid line
DIS-2KX10-E
Branch pipe set shapes

Branch pipe
Item
622
Diameter is same as above dimensions
Notes (1)The gas side flow divider pipe is insulated.

(2)Cut piping in the center on site in the area it will be used.
175 -
Reducer
ID
44.5
160
OD
38.1
ID
34.92
OD
120
38.1
ID
9.52
OD
540
424
12.7
ID
100
22.22
OD
100
19.05
ID
9.52
OD
100
12.7
ID
9.52
OD
100
12.7
ID
25.4
OD
19.05
70
ID
28.58
OD
25.4
70
Refrigerant piping connection example

Outdoor unit: GHCP560HMTE4
Connection capacity total: 559
GHCP560
HMTE4
Outdoor unit
Branch Branch
piping 1 piping 2
Branch
piping 4
Branch
piping 5
Branch
piping 6
Branch
piping 3
F
c
45
45
b
a
Indoor unit
112
56
140
90
71
Determining piping size

Code
A
B
C
Selection procedure
Piping size (mm)

Gas line Liquid line
Same as outdoor unit (GHCP560HMTE4) 38.1 19.05

Down-flow indoor unit capacity total (391) 38.1 15.88

Same as indoor unit
19.05 9.52
Same as indoor unit
15.88 9.52
Same as indoor unit
19.05 9.52
Same as indoor unit
15.88 9.52
Same as indoor unit
15.88 9.52
D
E
Same as indoor unit
12.7 6.35
Same as indoor unit
12.7 6.35
Selecting branch piping set

Code
Branch
piping 1
Branch
piping 2
Branch
piping 3
Branch
piping 4
Branch
piping 5
Branch
piping 6
Selection procedure
Branch piping set
Down-flow indoor unit capacity total (559) DIS-1KX40-E

Down-flow indoor unit capacity total (90)
DIS-2KX10-E
Notes (1) Make the appropriate selection for connections for different diameter
piping provided with the branch set according to the sizes of the piping.
(2) If adjustment is required between the branch connection and the indoor
unit port diameter, always perform that adjustment at the branch
connection.
176 -
Note (1) Always use branch connections (for both gas and
liquid lines) as indicated for "horizontal branch"
and "vertical branch."
(2) There is no need to provide a trap for upright piping.
Horizontally
Floor
Good
No
Floor
No
Floor
Good
Vertically
(3) Specification of unit piping (Pipe diameter, Connecting method)

(a) Unit
1)
Outdoor unit
Unit: mm(in)
Item
Model
2)
Gas line
Pipe diameter
GHCP450HMTE4
34.92 (13/8 ")
GHCP560HMTE4
38.1 (11/2 ")
Connecting method
Pipe diameter
Connecting method
15.88 (5/8 ")
Brazing
Flare
19.05 (3/4 ")
Unit: mm(in)
Indoor unit
Item
Model
3)
Liquid line
Gas line
Pipe diameter
Liquid line
Connecting method
Pipe diameter
Connecting method
22, 28 type
12.7 ( /2 ")
6.35 ( /4 ")
36 type
12.7 (1/2 ")
6.35 (1/4 ")
45 type
12.7 (1/2 ")
56,71,90 type
15.88 (5/8 ")
9.52 (3/8 ")
112,140 type
19.05 (3/4 ")
9.52 (3/8 ")
Flare
6.35 (1/4 ")
Flare
Joined pipe size Specifications of pipe: Outer diameter Wall thickness (mm)
6.35 0.8
9.52 0.8
12.7 0.8
15.88 1.0
19.05 1.0
25.4 1.0
28.58 1.0
31.8 1.1
34.92 1.1
38.1 1.15
(b) Refrigerant connection piping.
Front side
Exhaust gas drain

Electric wiring
Refrigerant gas pipe
Refrigerant liquid pipe
(c) Tightening torque

6.35(1/4 ") Flare nut
14 ~ 18 N m (1.4 ~ 1.8 kg m)
9.52(3/8 ") Flare nut
34 ~ 42 N m (3.2 ~ 4.2 kg m)
12.7(1/2 ") Flare nut
49 ~ 61 N m (4.9 ~ 6.1 kg m)
15.88(5/8 ") Flare nut
68 ~ 82 N m (6.8 ~ 8.2 kg m)
19.05(3/4 ") Flare nut
100 ~ 120 N m (10 ~ 12 kg m)
Flange area bolt on the gas side
30 ~ 40 N m (3 ~ 4 kg m)
OCAUTION
To tighten the flare nut, use the double wrench, and turn the nut to the specified torque. Take care that the
flare area will be broken if it is excessively tightened. (Refer to the tightening table.) If any flared area is
loosened or broken, the refrigerant gas will leak to cause an oxygen dificiency accident.
177 -
Forward/leftward connecting
(1) After connecting the pipe to the accessory at the site, connect the service valve.
(2) Directly connect service valve to the liquid side at the site.
GHCP450HMTE4
135
115.5
135
116
GHCP560HMTE4
163
163
263
263
210
190
210
190
353.5
358.5
Piping port lid
Back side
Back side
(4) Piping work at the site

(a) Be sure to flow nitrogen gas during brazing.
If any nitrogen gas does not flow, much oxidized film will be
Produce the resistance at the pipe
end with tape or similar, and fill
produced to cause a hazardous trouble.
nitrogen into the pipe.
(b) Prevent moisture and foreign material from entering the pipe.
<N2>
Taping
Moreover, flash the pipe.
(c) For flashing, flow nitrogen gas at approx. 0.02MPa, block
the pipe end with hand, and release the hand when the pressure
Do not use any other gas
except nitrogen gas (N ).
rises in the pipe. (At this time, keep the other pipe ends
Primary
blocked.
Secondary side
Main valve side
0.02Mpa
(d) Before the piping work at the site, fully close the service valve.
Hand
(e) When soldering the service valve to the pipe, cool down the
main body of the valve with wet towel or similar.
Pressure reduction
Nitrogen
(f) Ester/ether/alkyl-benzene oil or similar is recommended as
valve
gas
the flaring oil.
(g) If vibration-proof base is attached, make sure that the
refrigerant piping is free from excessive stress.
Example : 1. Use flexible pipe.
2. There will be no joint of refrigerant piping at a distance of 1.5 m or less from outside unit.
(h) After local piping construction, attach noise insulating material on the piping port lid at the inner side of the unit converning
the edges of the piping port.
2
OWARNING
Before brazing, be sure to verify that the service valve is closed. If any refrigerant gas comes into contact with
the flame, toxic gas will be produced to cause intoxication.
178 -
(5) Air-tight test

OCAUTION
After completing the refrigerant piping work, take the air-tightness test with nitrogen gas to verify that there is no
leakage. If any refrigerant gas should leak into the narrow room beyond the limited concentration, it will cause
an oxygen deficiency.
(a)
(b)
(c)
The air-tightness test of the main body of the unit has been completed by our factory. After the pipes are connected, take the
air-tightness test on the connected, pipe and indoor unit at the check joint of the service valve on the outdoor gas side. During
the test, be sure to keep the service valve closed.
Air-tightness test pressure = 3.3MPa
Apply the pressure from the gas side with nitrogen gas.
After the air-tightness test, be sure to evacuate the system.
Service valve on the gas side
Check joint
1 When the pressure reaches 0.5MPa, stop the pressuriClosed
su
s
zation and leave it 5 minutes or more as it is. Verify that
e
Pr ation
riz
the pressure does not drop.
Closed
2 Next, pressurize it to 1.5MPa, and leave it 5 minutes or
more again as it is. Verify that the pressure does not drop.
3 Then, increase it to the specified pressure (3.3MPa), and
Indoor unit
record the ambient temperature and pressure.
4 Leave it approx. one day as it is. If the pressure does not
Indoor unit
Indoor unit
drop, it will be proper. Since the pressure varies approx.
0.01MPa as the ambient temperature varies 1C,
compensate the pressure.
(6) Evacuating
Evacuating can be completed faster by evacuating both the check joint on the liquid side service valve and the check joint of the
evacuating gas pipe (accessory) connected to the gas side service valve at the same time. (Of course, evacuating is possible even
through the liquid side check joint only.)
0.1 MPa
Retighten piping
connections.
179 -
Charge normal quality

of refrigerant
Gas leakage check
Charge a small quality

of refrigerant
Needle of attached
pressure gauge
shall not move
for 5 minutes.
Air-tightness check
10 to 15 minutes
750 mmHg and over
Evacuating completed
Evacuating start
Installation of gas charge

equipment
Installation completed
<Work flow chart>
(7) Refrigerant charge amount

(a) Additional; charge amount
Item
Model
GHCP450HMTE4
GHCP560HMTE4
Additional charge amount

per 1m of liquid pipe
15.88
12.7
9.52
6.35
Factory charge amount at time of shapement
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Remarks
17.5 kg
Additional refrigerant
0.28 kg/m 0.2kg/m 0.12kg/m 0.06 kg/m 0.03 kg/m
Holding charged
18.0 kg
Charge is not required
19.05
Notes (1) When the refrigerant piping length exceeds the length that additional refrigerant charge is not required, charge additional refrigerant based on to
calculated amount of refrigerat per unit piping length.
(2) The unit is holding charge type that all of the refrigerant is charged in the outdoor unit and in the indoor unit only a small amount of refrigerant is
filled for prevention of the air entry.
Calculation of amount of refrigerant to be charged in local piping

The amount refrigerat additionally charged in local piping depends on connection pipe size but not on indoor unit type.
[Amount of refrigerant to be charged in the local piping = Actual length of liquid pipe Amount of refrigerant
additionally charged per meter of liquid pipe]
[Example] Amount of refrigerant additionally charged = (11 0.28) + (12 0.2) + (13 0.12) + (14 0.06) + (15 0.03)
11: Overall length (m) of 19.05 liquid pipe
Following precautions must be observed when the model is adapted to R407C.

(1) Tools and related components should be changed when handling a different kind of refrigerant in order to prevent mixing of different oils.
Gauge manifold and charge hose, particularly, should never be used after using them for R22.
(2) Charge cylinder should not be used. Otherwise, the refrigerant composition may change when charging R407C into the cylinder.
(3) Refrigerant should be charged in the liquid phase from the container. Charging the refrigerant in the gaseous phase could change the
refrigerant composition substantially.
(4) Volume of refrigerant to be taken out in the liquid phase from the container should be up to 90% of necessary quantity (in weight percent)
as a standard.
(5) Refrigerant should not be replenished even if a leakage is discovered because it could change the refrigerant composition substantially.
When a leakage is discovered, replace with new refrigerant in the specified volume. However, it could be replenished temporarily in case of
an emergency.
(8) Heat-proof and dew-proof

OCAUTION
Perform the dew-proof, heat insulating works of the refrigerant piping. If the work is insufficient, water or dew will
drip causing the furniture or similar to be moistened.
Use a good thermal insulator (120C or more) .
It is necessary to make both gas pipe and liquid pipe heat-proof and dew-proof.
1) During cooling, the gas pipe prevents the dew produced
Pipe cover (accessory)
on the pipe from becoming the drain water which causes
water leakage accident. Moreover, since the discharged
gas flows to raise the temperature of the pipe surface to
60 - 110C, during heating, it may cause burns if touched.
Since it is dangerous, be sure to thermally insulate the
pipe.
2) Insulate the flare connection portion of the indoor unit
Band (accessory)
with a thermal insulator (pipe cover).
(Gas line pipe and liquid line pipe should be insulated).
Wires for connecting indoor
Exterior tape
3) Both the liquid side and gas side piping should be thermally
and outdoor units
insulated. Wrap the insulated pipes and connecting wire
Gas piping
Liquid piping
with a coating tape in a manner where crevices are
Insulation
minimal.
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;
;;
(a)
180 -
5.5 Electrical wiring

The electrical work shall be done by the service shop approved by Electric Power Company.
OWARNING
Qualified electrical service personnel must do the electrical work as stated in Technical Standard of Electrical Facilities,
In-company Standard and this installation manual. If the work is insufficient, it will cause electric shock, fire hazards,
etc.
For wiring, use the specified cables and securely connect them. To prevent an external force of the cable from being
transmitted to the terminal connected area, securely fasten the cable. If it is incompletely connected or fastened, it
will cause heating, fire hazards, etc.
When connecting many terminals at the same terminal block, limit to 2 terminals only. If 3 or more terminals are
connected, the screw at the terminal will become loosely fastened to cause a fire hazard.
Securely tighten the screw on the terminal block. If it is poorly tightened, it will cause fire hazard.
Never connect any line to the secondary side on the terminal block at the site.
OCAUTION
Use the exclusive branch circuit for electric wiring, do not connect it with the circuit of any other electrical equipment,
otherwise, the breaker may fail and cause minor injuries.
Execute the grounding works. Do not connect the ground cable to the gas pipe, water pipe, lightning arrestor or the
ground cable of the telephone. If it is improperly grounded, it will cause electric shock.
In some installation site, it is necessary to install the ground leakage breaker. If the ground leakage breaker is not
installed, it will cause electric shock.
Do not turn on the power supply until the work is completed. Before servicing, turn off the power supply.
(1) Power supply wiring
(a) Outdoor unit power supply
Use separate power supplies for the outdoor and indoor unit respectively. (Standard specification)
The table below shows the power specification for outdoor unit only.
Item
Power
source
Model
GHCP450HMTE4
GFCP560HMTE4
3 phase
400V
50Hz
Circuit breaker
Power
supply
wire size
(mm2)
Wire
length
(m)
Switch
capacity
(A)
Rated
current
(A)
Earth
leakage
breaker
(A)
20
30
30A 30mA
0.1 sec. or
less
35
2.0
35
Grounding
wire size
(mm2)
Screw
size
2.0
M5
Notes (1) The above table shows the power specification of outdoor unit when separate powers are use for outdoor unit and indoor units.
(2) The wire thickness and distance indicated above are for when voltage drop is 2%.
(b) Indoor unit power supply

Item
Indoor unit
Total power
supply for
indoor unit
Wire circuit breaker (A)

Power
Wire
supply length
wire size
(m)
(mm2)
Less than 10A

10A or more,
less than 15A
3.5
23
Rated
current
20
27
30
Circuit breaker
(Use for both ground/overload
and short-circuit production)
20A100mA 0.1sec. or less
30A100mA 0.1sec. or less
Signal wire thickness (mm)

Outdoor
Indoor
Indoor
Outdoor
2 core
2 core
0.75 2.0
0.75 2.0
Notes (1) The wire length covers values when necessary indoor units are connected in series with the unit power supply wire as shown below. Also, the wire
thickness and distance indicated above are for when voltage drop is 2%.
(2) These values are based on the conditions that indoor units are connected so that the total capacity becomes the mximum against each outdoor unit.
181 -
(2) Precaution in electric wiring.

(a) Use separate power supplies for the outdoor and indoor units respectiveliy (Standard specification)
(b) Signal wiring (for indoor and outdoor units)
Double-core cable with a diameter 0.75 to 2 mm2 should be used for the signal wires.
Never make the indoor and outdoor connecting signal line use co-axial cable or strand with the
power wiring for indoor and outdoor unit and other ower line.
(Never use a multiconductor wire together with power line. It may cause erroneous operation.)
Do not connect high voltage wires 220/240V or 400V to signal wires. as these wires are DC 5V. Signal wires should be
connected so that the terminal Nos. conform with each other for between outdoor and between indoor units. However, they
will work properly if different polarities are connected.
(Connect (A) and (A), (B)and (B).)
Do not strand or run the remote control cord with power line, electric line, etc.
The total length of the signal wires Should be 1000m or less.
Recommended signal wire list
Name
No.
1
Symbol
MVVS double-core 0.75 to 2 mm2
Shielding wire
When No. 4 shielding wire is used, always ground the single wire side of the shielding wire . In addition, using the shielding
wire is helpful to prevent the incorrect connection between 5V DC and 220/240V or 400V AC because the discrimination
from the power supply wire is clear.
(3) Earth leakage breaker (Locally Purchased)
(a) Do not branch the circuit of the earth leakage breaker for main line of GHP to any other equipment. If it leaks in GHP, the earth
leakage breaker for the main line will be activated to turn off the power to stop supplying power to the other equipment
except GHP. If it is inevitable to branch the circuit to any other equipment, provide the alarm circuit if any other equipment
is used for the following purpose.
Pump of fish farming, and biological cultivation on the warm ground facility, etc.
ELB: Earth leakage breaker
Refrigerator and cooled show case of shop, etc.
B: Breaker
ELB Main
Main
ELB
ELB
ELB
To GHP
To GHP
To GHP
Other
To GHP
To GHP
To GHP
Other
(b) Care necessary for double provision of earth leakage breakers

If any earth leakage breaker in the main line or branch line is high-speed type, both main and branch lines will be turned off
at the same time when it leaks. To prevent this problem, use a delay type for the earth leakage breaker of the main line, and
it will be separated from the branch area.
High-speed type
ELB
ELB Activation
Main
Activation
ELB
ELB
ELB Activation
Load
Main
Activation
High-speed type
ELB
Load
It leaks.
It leaks.
Power is turned off for all lines.
182 -
Power is kept on.
(4) Wiring system Diagram

Power source
3phase 400V50Hz
Earth leakage
breaker
Outdoor unit
Circuit Breaker
Earth
Signal wire (Between outdoor and indoor units)
Signal wire (Between indoor units)
Circuit breaker
Earth leakage
breaker
Indoor
unit
<I>
remote
controller wire
<II>
<III>
<IV>
<V>
<VI>
<VII>
<VIII>
Remote controller
Power source
1phase 220/240V50Hz
Outdoor/Indoor units connection procedures

Outdoor unit
A B
Signal wire (Between outdoor and indoor units)

Signal wire (Between indoor units)
Indoor unit side
power supply wire
L A B
N X Y Z
L A B
N X Y Z
Indoor unit
<I>
Remote controller wire
<II>
X Y Z
Remote
controller
X Y Z
Remote
controller
OCAUTION
When connecting plural terminals at the same terminal block, limit two terminals. If 3 or more terminals are connected,
the screw at the terminal will become loosely fastened to cause a fire hazard.
Securely tighten the screw on the terminal block. If it is poorly tightened, it will cause a fire hazard.
Never connect any line to the secondary side on the terminal block at the site.
Signal line
Since the signal line is rated at DC5V, never connect any wiring
of 220/240V. Take care that all boards will be burned if it is
incorrectly connected. Though any signal line has polarity,
connect the lines between the indoor unit and outdoor unit
and between indoor units according to the same terminal
numbers. (Connect (A) to (A) and (B) to (B).)
Be sure to route the signal line through the signal line inlet.
Moreover, route the signal line through the noise filter below
to make a loop, then connect the line to the terminal block.
Signal line Inlet

Signal line
Inlet
Circuit
board
183 -
Circuit board
Terminal
(5) Indoor and outdoor signal wiring

(a) If only one Outdoor unit is used
Outdoor signal
teminal block
Notes (1) The indoor and outdoor signal wiring are without polarity
B
Double cores 0.75 ~ 2 mm2
Total length of signal wires: 1000 m or less
Indoor signal
terminal block
Either of the above wiring is correct.

(2) For connection to the terminal block, use as M3.5 (5/32)
round eye-let terminal is shown below.
7 mm or less
(b) If plural outdoor units are used

1) A maximum of 48 indoor units can be connected by using the crossover wiring method, with 2 wires
for each side of the outdoor and indoor units.
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
AB
Outdoor unit
AB
AB
Outdoor unit
AB

AB
AB
Indoor unit
2)
AB
Indoor unit
Indoor unit
AB
Indoor unit
Indoor/outdoor wiring method for multiple floors.

Outdoor
unit
Outdoor
unit
Outdoor
unit
Outdoor
unit

3)
Indoor
unit
Indoor
unit
Indoor
unit
Indoor
unit
Indoor
unit
Indoor
unit
Loop wiring is inhibited

Outdoor
unit
Outdoor
unit
Outdoor
unit
Outdoor
unit
Loop wiring of signal wires is inhibiteed
Wiring at the Portion indicated by a
dotted line is inhibited.
(No)
Indoor
unit
Indoor
unit
Indoor
unit
Indoor
unit
(6) Remote controller wiring

(a) Wiring for controlling only one indoor unit.
X
Y
Z
Red White Black
Indoor unit
terminal blocks
Notes (1) Cables for the remote controller have polarity. Be sure to connect terminal
blocks with the same numbers. If mis wiring occurs, E1 is displayed and
disables the unit from operating.
X
Y
Z
Red White Black
Remote controller
terminal blocks
184 -
(b) When controlling plural units.

1) Use the same procedure shown in the drawing above for the wiring of the power supply, both indoor and outdoor units
and remote controller
When the wiring length for the remote controller exceeds 100 m, use the wiring procedure shown in the drawing below.
2) Connect each of the indoor units for group controlling (3 cables)
a) Connect the cables to the terminal blocks of X, Y, and Z for the indoor unit remote controller. Since the cables
have polarity, be sure to connect them to terminal blocks with the same numbers.
b) Use cables of more than 0.5 mm2 (Flexible and easily moved)
c) The total length of cables for crossover connection and the remote controller should be less than 600 m.
Note (1) Refer to the wire size chart on page 168 for any wiring exceeding 100 meters.
3)
4)
When there is more than one outdoor unit, they can be controlled by one remote controller.
One remote controller is capable of controlling up to 16 units in group
Notes (1) Use shielded cables, when wiring in parallel with cables for other power supply or when there is a possibility of being affected by outer noise such
as noise from a high-frequency unit.
Outdoor unit
Unit address
A B
No.01
Outdoor unit
Unit address
A B
No.02
Indoor unit
(Outdoor unit
address No.01)
(Indoor unit
address No.00)
Indoor unit
(Outdoor unit
address No.02)
(Indoor unit
address No.04)
A B
Indoor unit
(Outdoor unit
address No.01)
(Indoor unit
address No.02)
Indoor unit
(Outdoor unit
address No.02)
(Indoor unit
address No.05)
A B
Indoor unit
(Outdoor unit
address No.01)
(Indoor unit
address No.03)
A B
A B
Indoor unit
(Outdoor unit
address No.02)
(Indoor unit
address No.006
A B
A B
Remote controller
(c) Settings for main and secondary units when multiple remote controllers are used.
Up to two remote controllers can be used for each indoor
Indoor unit
unit (or each group of indoor units).

1)
There are two methods for arranging this. One
Remote control signal wire (has

polarity)
Match X Y and Z and connect.
method is to take a remote control connection wire

(3-strand) from the indoor unit for the secondary
remote control. The other method is to use a jumper
wire from the main remote control.
2)
Set the remote control switch for the secondary unit (SW4) to
secondary unit. (It was set to main unit a the factory.)
Note (1) The remote controller sensor setting is only enabled on the main remote controller.
Be sure to position the main remote controller in a location where it can detect
the room temperature.
185 -
Remote
control
SW4
Main
Remote
control
Z
SW4
Secondary
(7) Setting of unit address

Addresses can be set either with the automatic address setting, remote control address setting or manual address setting depending
on the combinations of address switches (see table) of the indoor and outdoor units. Operate the address switches before turning
power on.
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
Address setting method
Outdoor No.
Outdoor No.
Indoor No.
49
49
49
00 ~ 47
00 ~ 47
00 ~ 47
Auto address
Manual address
At the shipment from factory, outdoor Nos. of the outdoor unit are set at 49, both the output and indoor Nos. of the indoor
units are set at 49 and the setting method is set for the automatic addressing.
Address No. setting
Set the setting SW1 - 4 on the indoor PCB and the setting SW1 and 2 on the outdoor PCB as listed below.
On indoor PCB
On outdoor PCB
SW1, 2 (blue)
For setting of indoor No. (orders of 10 and 1)
SW3, 4 (green)
For setting of outdoor No. (orders of 10 and 1)
SW1, 2 (green)
For setting of outdoor No. (orders of 10 and 1)

SW2 (SW4) Order of 1
0 1
2 3
4
Order of 10
SW1(SW3)
SW1
(SW3)
order of 10
Order of 10
SW2(SW4)
0 1
9
7 8
2 3
Insert the tip of flat head

(precision) screwdriver
here and point the arrow
at a desired No.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08 09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18 19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28 29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38 39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48 49
Use 48 and 49 for setting the auto or remote

control address.
5 6
Order of 1
Notes (1) Outdoor No. is provided on the outdoor and indoor PCB's and indicates which outdoor unit is connected with which indoor unit via a
refrigerant pipe. Indoor and outdoor units connected with a refrigerant pipe must have the same No.
(2) Indoor No. is used to identify a particular indoor unit. The No. should never be duplicated.
(a) Auto address setting

This setting is used when wiring on the basis of outdoor unit.
Outdoor unit
No. 49
AB
AB
Indoor unit
AB
Indoor unit
AB
Indoor unit
Remote controller
Remote controller
Remote controller
186 -
AB
Indoor unit
Wires cannot be connected across

different refrigerant lines.
1)
Set the address switch of outdoor unit at 49. (This is set at 49 at shipment from factory.)
2)
Set the address switch of indoor unit at 49. (This is set at 49 at shipment from factory)
3)
Turn power on for the indoor and outdoor units. Addresses are set automatically.
For the auto address setting, power must be ON for both the indoor and outdoor units. If power is supplied to the indoor
unit only, "Outdoor No." is indicated on the remote controller. In such occasion, turn power ON also for the outdoor
unit.
4)
No. will be set within approx. 1 minute after turning power on.
5)
If you press the inspection switch of the remote controller after setting the No., the address of indoor unit will be displayed.
The outdoor unit No. 49 will also be displayed.
6)
Auto address setting is allowed also when controlling plural number of units with single remote controller. However,
the connection cannot be made across different refrigeration lines.
Information
1) Once addresses are set, they are retained on the microcomputer even after turning power off.
2) Even if the wiring is arranged on the basis of outdoor units, manual address setting can be used.
Erasing of addresses set with the automatic address setting

On the remote controller, press the "Fan speed" switch while holding down both the switches "Check" and "Timer".
Memory of address is erased. If the power supply to the indoor and outdoor units is turned off later, the system
returns to the state of no address setting. Then one of the 2 address setting methods can be selected by changing
combinations of the address switches.
(b) Manual address setting

This setting is used when connecting plural number of outdoor and indoor units with the super link, and is applicable when
controlling with more than one remote controller. (You can use only one remote controller of course.)
Turn power off before operating the address switches. Change of address is disabled when power is supplied.
Line "- - -" indicates the refrigerant piping. Figure in the figure indicates the address
number determined with the address switch.
Address No.
by address switch
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
No.01
No.02
AB
Indoor unit
Indoor unit
(Outdoor No. 01)

(Indoor No. 00)
(Outdoor No. 02)

(Indoor No. 04)
AB
AB
Indoor unit
Indoor unit
(Outdoor No. 01)

(Indoor No. 02)
(Outdoor No. 02)

(Indoor No. 05)
AB
AB
Indoor unit
Indoor unit
(Outdoor No. 01)

(Indoor No. 03)
(Outdoor No. 02)

(Indoor No. 06)
AB
AB
Remote controller
Remote controller
1)
AB
Using the address switch (green) on the outdoor unit PCB, set the address of the outdoor unit in a range of 00 - 47 avoiding
duplication with any other outdoor unit.
2)
Using the address switch (green) on the indoor unit PCB, set the outdoor No. at the same No. as the outdoor unit which is
connected with a refrigerant pipe.
3)
Using the address switch (blue), set the indoor No. of indoor unit in a range of 00 - 47 avoiding duplication with any other
unit on the connection.
-
187 -
5.6 Test run

(1) Before starting operation
(a) Using 500V megger tester, verify the insulation resistance of 1M or more.
(b) 12 hours before operation, be sure to energize the crank case heater.
(c) Verify that it is warm at the bottom of the compressor.
(d) Be sure to fully open the operation valve (both gas side and liquid side). If it is operated with it closed, the compressor will
be sometimes troubled.
(e) Verify that all indoor units are powered. If any indoor unit is not powered, it will cause water leakage.
(2) Test run
(a) If it is impossible, a test run of indoor units can be conducted by using the switches No.5 and No.6 of [SW-3] on the outdoor
unit circuit board irrespective of ON/OFF conditions of CnS and the remote controller.
No.5 of [SW3]
All connected indoor units operate when the

switch is set to ON.
Test run (ON)
Indoor units request the maximum frequency and

the outdoor unit operates with the maximum frequency shown in the table below according to
requents from indoor units.
Normal (OFF)
No.6 of [SW3]
When the switch is set to OFF, these units can be

operated with the remote controller or by external input.
Select cooling or heating according to input to

No.6 of [SW3].
When No.5 of [SW3] is ON when No.6 of [SW3]
is set to ON, a cooling operation starts.
When No.5 of [SW3] is on when No.6 of [SW3]

is set to OFF, a heating operation starts.
[Remark]
This operation has priority over other option commands with the center console.
At the time of trial operation, the maximum frequencies are follows. Protective devices are effectively controlled, and frequencies are controlled to become smaller.
OWARNING
Do not touch any high-voltage area or charged area in the control box, or it will result in an electric shock.
Before inspecting the unit, turn off the main power supply, or an electric shock will possibly result.
(3) Cooling test run operation (Cooling test run can be performed in winter.)
(a)
Operating method
In the normal cooling mode, while holding down the Temperature set switch, press the Set switch.
Setting temperature is changed at 5C and the cooling test run is operated for 30 minutes.
It stops after 30 minutes.
(b)
During cooling test run operation

If ON/OFF switch is pressed or a mode other than the cooling is selected by the Mode switch, the cooling test run
operation is released or returns to the specified operation mode.
If the Temperature set switch is pressed, the setting temperature changed at 18C and the cooling test run operation is
released but the cooling operation continues.
It is effective when any switches other than the above are pressed.
(c)
During the cooling test run operation, the setting temperature changes at 5C but any other control and protective functions
are operable just like in the normal operation.
If any error occurs, the location of error is indicated on the remote controller display or with the condition of flashing of
inspection lamp (red) on the main unit controller. Remove the cause of trouble before starting operation again.
188 -
Indoor/outdoor connection mismatch check

Using the switches No.4, No.5 and No.6 of [SW-3] on the outdoor P.C.B, the mismatch of the signal line and address No. setting
can be checked from the outdoor unit regardless of ON/OFF of the remote control.
1 Operation
Turn on both switched No.4, No.5 and No.6 of SW3.
2 Check result
Outdoor unit side
Normal
Abnormal
7-segment LED 5 6
7 5
Lit
Flashing
7-segment LED
E
Lit
3 0
Indoor unit side

(for 15 units)
(for 15 units)
Flashing
No display
E30 and troubled unit No. are displayed on the

remote control
The display of 7-segment LED is returned into the ordinary display by turning off No.4 of SW3.
The error display can be reset with the remote control.
3 Cautionary point
Check the indoor/outdoor connection mismatch on all outdoor units one unit by one unit. If it is checked on plural units at
the same time, it will possibly result in an improper detection.
Any unit which in not connected with the signal line or powered can not be checked.
When the address is changed, be sure to turn off the power supply. When it is powered, any address can not be changed.
(The error display can be result with the remote controll.)
(4) Delivery
(a) Explain how to operate the indoor unit to your customer according to the accessory owners manual.
(b) Persuade the customer not to turn off the power switch even if the unit is not used for along time. The air conditioner can start
operation any time when your customer want to heating or cooling his room. (The bottom of the compressor is heated with the
crank case heater, and compressor troubles can be prevented when the cooling or heating season sets in.)
189 -
6. MAINTENANCE DATA
6.1 Diagnosis of Microcomputer circuit
(1) Confirmation of the error code on the remote controller (by pressing the inspection switch) and the inspection
display and normal display lamps on P.C.Bs of indoor/ outdoor units
The microcomputer detects errors on electrical components, whitch include the microcomputer itself, errors on the power supply
line and errors (overload, etc.) on the refrigerant circuit and the location of trouble is displayed (with the combination of error
symbols of remote controller, normal (green) and inspection (red) display LED on P.C.Bs of indoor/outdoor units.) When any error
occurs, check first the inspection display. It will guide you to the trouble point and assist you to complete the repair work quikly.
Error code of the remote controller is recorded on the microcomputer after the trouble has been reset automatically so that, if you
press the inspection switch of remote controller, the error code and the number of unit in trouble are displayed for 10 sec., The
inspection display lamp on the indoor/outdoor unit P.C.B keeps flashing (glowing) even after the trouble was reset automatically.
Inspection lamp on the indoor unit P.C.B is turned off if the remote controller is reset.
(a)
Check Indicator Table

Whether a failure exists or not on the indoor unit and outdoor unit can be know by the contents of remote controller eroor
code, indoor/outdoor unit green LED (power pilot lamp and microcomputer normality pilot lamp) or red LED (check pilot
lamp).
Remote
controller
error code
No display
E1
Green
Red
Green
Red
Outdoor
LED
7-segment
Keeps flashing
Continuously lit
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Keeps flashing
Continuously lit
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Normal
Defective indoor P.C.B, CPU runaway
Power off, open phase, abnormal power section
Keeps flashing
3 time flash
Keeps flashing
Stays OFF
Remote control wire breakage (Power supply : Red Ground Black)

*Unlit for wire breakage when power is on
Indoor unit LED
Outdoor unit LED
Cause
Keeps flashing
Stays OFF
Keeps flashing Keeps flashing
E1
Remote control. indoor transmission defect
Keeps flashing
3 time flash
E1
Remote control wire breakage (signal)

*Unlit for wire breakage when power is on
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
1 time flash
2 time flash
2 time flash
2 time flash

Stays OFF
Stays OFF
E2
E3
E3
Indoor address No. overlap Connection of 49 or more units

Outdoor power OFF (Detection during operation alone)
No corresponding outdoor No. (Detection during operation alone)
Keeps flashing
2 time flash
Continuously
lit or unlit
Keeps flashing
E5
E5
Indoor / Outdoor transmission trouble

Outdoor microcomputer trouble
Keeps flashing
2 time flash
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
E5
Power supply trouble
E6
E7
E9
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
1 time flash
1 time flash
1 time flash

E6
E7
E9
Indoor heat exchanger thermistor wire breakage

Indoor return air thermistor wire breakage
Float SW activation (With FS only)
E10
Keeps flashing
Stays OFF
E10
Control of plural remote controllers, excessive number of units

(17 units of more)
E11
Keeps flashing
Stays OFF
Keeps flashing
E11
Selection of one remote controller multiple-unit control when

setting remote controller address
E12
Keeps flashing
1 time flash
E12
E28
Keeps flashing
Stays OFF
E28
Address No. combination defect, if the address is combined as follows

Outdoor unit No.
Indoor unit No.
48, 49
0 ~ 47
48, 49
0 ~ 47
Remote controller thermistor wire breakage
E2
E3
E5
Stays OFF
Notes (1) Pressing the inspection switch SW6, check the outdoor LED 7-segment display.
(2) Lighting or unlighting is repeated every 32 seconds.
190 -
Remote
controller
error code
E30
E31
E32
E36
E37
E38
E39
E40
E43
E48
Indoor unit LED
Outdoor
LED
7-segment
Outdoor unit LED

Green
Red
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Red
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
E54
E57
E64
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Stays OFF

E80
E81
E82
E83
E84
E88
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
E30
E31
E32
E36
E37
E38
E39
E40
E43
E48-1
E48-2
E54
E57
E64-1
E64-2
E64-3
E64-4
E80
E81
E82
E83
E84
E88-2
E88-3
E89-1
E89-2
E89-3
E89-4
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Stays OFF
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
E89-5
E89-6
E89-7
E89-8
E89-9
E89
Green
Cause
Indoor / outdoor connection unmatch
Outdoor No. doubled
Reversed phase, T phase open phase
Discharge temperature trouble
Open circuit in water heat exchanger's outlet-refrigerant thermistor
Outdoor temperature thermistor wire breakage
Discharge temperature thermistor wire breakage
HPS operation
Excessively connected units
Outdoor fan motor overcurrent
Outdoor fan motor / invertor trouble
High-pressure sensor open circuit
Low pressure trouble (63L motion)
Cooling water pump overcurrent
Cooling water level trouble
Abnormality in motor of coolant-water flow-volume control valve 1
Abnormality in motor of coolant-water flow-volume control valve 2
Engine water temperature trouble
Engine oil pressure trouble
Engine overspeed
Engine underspeed
Engine start trouble
Engine oil level trouble
Inspection engine oil (8100 hours)
Machine-compartment temp. trouble
Communication trouble between outdoor board and engine controller
Abnormality in machine-compartment thermistor
Abnormality in data transmission from engine accumulator
timer
Engine stepping motor trouble
Engine water temperature thermistor breakage
Engine oil level switch wire breakage
Engine full open-/closing switch trouble
IIA signal / oil pressure switch trouble
Note (1) Pressing the inspection switch SW6, check the outdoor LED 7-segment display.
(b) Inverter circuit board (LED1 red)

Invertor P.C.B LED (red)
Cause
1 time flash per 8 seconds
Instantaneous overcurrent protection
Overvoltage protection
Undervoltage protection
Cooling object thermal protection
Electronic thermal relay
Memory trouble. CPU trouble
191 -
(c)
Engine control (ECU) circuit board (LED1 red)

ECU circuit board [LED (red)]
Cause
Outdoor LED 7-segment
5 time flash
Engine over-speed 1
E82
5 time flash
Engine over-speed 2
E82
5 time flash
Engine low speed
E83
6 time flash
Coolant temp. error
E80
1 time flash
Communication error 1
7 time flash
Engine oil pressure error
E81
Oil level status 1
8 time flash
Oil level status 2
E882
3 time flash
Stepping motor error
E895
4 time flash
IIA signal/ oil pressure SW error
E899
2 time flash
Full close SW broken wire
E898
2 time flash
Full open SW broken wire
E898
2 time flash
Full close SW short circuit
E898
2 time flash
Full open SW short circuit
E898
2 time flash
Oil level SW1 broken wire
E897
2 time flash
Oil level SW2 broken wire
E897
2 time flash
Coolant thermistor broken wire
E896
(2) Trouble/error detection

(a)
Indoor side and remote controller side

1)
If it stopped since the protective device or similar is activated, it will be regarded as trouble stop.
2)
If the protective control of the indoor unit is activated, the relevant unit alone will be stopped. If any plural units are
troubled in the control, the troubled units alone will be stopped. Here, the drain trouble will be excluded.
3)
Unless the inspection is reset for the troubled and stopped unit with start/stop switch of the remote control, the unit
can not be restarted. If it is troubled in the stopped state, it is necessary to reset the inspection. However, the automatic
reset of the transmission trouble is excluded.
4)
If any mate unit is not present for the indoor unit when the power is turned on, E3 detection is not regarded as a trouble,
5)
If E3 or E5 is normally reset, it will be automatically reset as the normal stop.
but it is detected when the operation is restarted.

a) If E3 or E5 becomes from abnormal to normal in case of one remote control to one indoor unit,
1 LED on the board is automatically and normally displayed.
2 The inspection LED of the remote controller is automatically stays OFF.
However, keeping the unit stopped, press the start switch, and the air conditioner will be started.
b) If E3 or E5 becomes from abnormal to normal when the plural units are controlled with the remote control, the air
conditioner will be started when the remote control is in the start mode.
6)
E12 will be displayed unless the address setting (indoor No. and outdoor No. switches) of the outdoor unit and indoor
unit is a normal combination of the automatic address setting (48, 49) and manual address (00 thru 47). When the power
is turned on, it is immediately checked and is displayed on LCD but the address switch change is not read in hereafter.
Accordingly, E12 can be reset with the power reset alone.
7)
If indoor CPU is abnormal, LED will be lit every 32 minutes. Hereafter, the serial transfer will become defective
between the controller and the remote control, and the remote control will display E1.
8)
In case of E9, the outdoor unit will be also stopped if the drain trouble occurs again 3 minutes after the trouble detection.
9)
In case of the excessive number of control units connected to the remote control (E10), all units connected to the remote
control will be stopped as a trouble.
10) E2 detection is activated if any indoor No. is doubled.
192 -
(b) Outdoor unit

1)
The trouble is displayed according to the trouble content.
2)
The trouble is displayed with the red inspection LED (LED1) and 7-segment LED (LED4 thru 9) on the outdoor
controller.
3)
The dipswitch SW3-1 to reset the display of LED1 is provided on the outdoor controller.
4)
If any trouble is reset, the display will be turned off by resetting the dipswitch. (Impossible for 3 minutes after trouble
occurrence)
(Even if it is not reset with the remote control, it can be turned off.)
a)
LED can not be turned off by the inspection resetting of the remote control.
b)
The display of remote control can not be turned off by resetting the dipswitch.
c)
Even if the inspection is reset with the remote control, resetting with the dipswitch SW3-1 is so valid as to turn off
LED1.
d)
5)
When the dipswitch is on the reset side, LED will be surely turned off.
The trouble is surely held for 3 minutes after its occurrence. During this while, the trouble can not be reset by the
inspection reset of the remote control. The inspection display of the remote control is turned off once but it will be
immediately turned on if it is started within 3 minutes.
(3) Trouble/error display

(a)
Remote controller display, and number of connected units

1)
If any trouble occurs when the remote controller and indoor controller are connected one to one, the remote controller
will blink the inspection LED, lighting the trouble content on the LCD section.
2)
The trouble mode of each unit must be checked on the LCD with the inspection switch.
3)
The error mode of each unit can be monitored on LCD with the check switch.
4)
If any unit is troubled, the inspection LED of the remote controller will be blinked. (However, E1 error will be displayed only when all units are troubled.) / LED of the indoor unit will 3 time flash.
(b) The trouble stop will be displayed in the currently troubled mode. (Remote control LCD)
(c)
If any plural units are doubly troubled, it will be displayed at the following priority rank.
E1>E10>E2>E3>E5>E7>E9>E12 .... Remote control display
(d) If any other trouble doubly occurs while LED on the indoor side is flashing, it will be switched to the
display of the higher priority.
(e)
On the remote controller, the trouble mode of the highest priority will be memorized.
(f)
The serial transmission error between indoor and outdoor will be 2 time flash, and the indoor/outdoor
transmission error E5 will be displayed to the remote controller.
(g) LED of indoor unit

1)
Red and green LED are installed on the indoor P.C.B.
2)
Green LED continues flashing when CPU is normal.
3)
Red LED flash when it is troubled.
(h) 7-segment display method for trouble in the outdoor unit

Press the inspection display switch SW6, and it will be displayed. In this case, it is regardless of the positions of SW7, 8.
193 -
(i)
Press the inspection display switch SW6, and the five newest troubles which have occurred will be sequentially displayed.
Next to the last trouble display, the data of SW7 and SW8 will be displayed.
Example Trouble currently occurred E81, Past troubles E40, E35, E88-2
Normal operation
SW7, 8
61
2,000 (engine speed)
Trouble occurrence
SW7, 8
61
(1) SW6 push
SW7, 8
81
(2) SW6 push
SW7, 8
40
(3) SW6 push
SW7, 8
36
(4) SW6 push
SW7, 8
88 -2
(5) SW6 push
SW7, 8
-----
(6) SW6 push
SW7, 8
61
0 (engine stop)
Repeatedly push SW6, and (1) thru (6) will be displayed again.
If SW6 is not input during 10 minutes when (1) thru (5) is displayed, it will return to the ordinary display of SW7, 8.
In case of less than 5 troubles, the [5 - Number of troubles] columns will be filled with E ----.
(4) Resetting of trouble mode

(a)
The trouble display on the indoor controller side can be reset by the inspection resetting of the start/stop switch of the remote
controller. Moreover, it can be also reset by resetting the power supply.
However, if any trouble can not be reset by the resetting operation, LED will be blinked again at the priority rank of the
trouble mode. Remote control LED will not blink. (Because the inspection is being reset.)
(b) If the trouble mode is reset for inspection with start/stop switch in the control mode of plural units, the remote control will
send the inspection resetting signal to all units. (The unit which is in operation will be stopped.)
(c)
If SW3-1 reset when the trouble is reset, the trouble display on the 7-segment will go out to switch the operation into the
normal mode.
(5) Troubleshooting procedure

When any error occurs, inspect in following sequence. Detailed explanation on each step is given later in this text.
Error
Power supply check

(indoor/outdoor unit)
Replacement or repair of defective

parts Test run/adjustment
Check of inspection display [Indoor/outdoor unit P.C.B, remote

controller or Indication board]
Check of unit
controller
Power supply reset (1)
Check of inspection display [Indoor/

outdoor unit P.C.B, remote controller or Indication board]
Note (1) It means the operation to turn off the power and back on again more than 1 min. later in order to reset the malfunction of microcomputer due to the
effect of power supply conditions or accidental noise.
194 -
(6) Diagnosis by the power supply reset

When any error occurs, reset the power supply as described below to see if it is the result of accidental noise, etc.
sCheck at the indoor unit side.
Error
Are the return air

temperature and Center/
Remote displayed on the
remote controller?
YES
Is any error
code display?
NO
NO
YES
Check the error

code displayed
Power switch OFF

Power supply line error
ON/OFF
switch OFF
NO
Does the error

code disappear?
Microcomputer
out of control
YES
Turn off the circuit breaker (power

supply) and back on again 1min. later. (Power supply reset)
ON/OFF
switch OFF
Does start operation

with display of cooling degree:
Hi, thermostat: 23C?
NO
Power supply line error
See page 199
YES
Does the error repeat
NO
Cause is accidental (noise, etc.)

and the unit is normal.
YES
Check of error code
Errors due to external noise, etc.

Error code may be displayed or the error may not be displayed normally even if the controller is normal because of external noise
source(1) or joined or parallel arrangement of power cables and signal wires. It is because the wire of remote controller, wired
remote controller signal wires for multiple units or the network signal wires may be influenced by external noises whitch are
judged as signals by the microcomputer whitch reacts mistakenly.
When there is any noise source, it is necessary to the shield wire for the remote controller and signal wires.
Note (1) High frequency medical machine, rectifier motor application device, thyristor, broadcast transmission tower, power
transmission line, power line of electric train, automatic door motor, elevator (voltage drop), wireless telephone, high
voltage power distribution line, computer, personal compouter and their cables.
There do not necessarily always cause problems but they can be a source of electrical noise.
195 -
(2)
Reference Effect of noise

When noises inturude into the remote controller.
Abnormal or irregular display such as the flashing of irrelevant display (lamp) (for example, LEDs of cooling and heating
illuminated simultaneously or the like) is observed even if the remote controller is not operated or the remote controller
and, as the result, the operation of units may be disabled or similar abnormal phenomenons are observed.
When noises intruded into the microcomputer of printed circuit board; State of operation becomes abnormal such as the
units perform irregular operation while the remote controller is not operated, the operation cannot be stopped with the
remote controller, etc.
Electro magnetic noise prevention(example)

Cover the entire surface of control box or
the inside of unit cover with the cover foil
or cover the enitre unit with a wire net.
Use the shield or
twist pair wires
Interisified shielding
of control section
Signal wire
Make a positive
ground
Remote controller wire
(Indoor unit)
Outdoor
unit
(Indoor unit)
l2
Shut off electrically the
noise source or put it in
a shield room.
Cutting machine
welder High
frequency
l1
Put in a steel case Remote controller
Separate from cutting machine as for as

possible. This is very effective because
the effect of noise is in inverse
proportion to 1.5 times of distance.
Insert in a steel pipe to shield.
Power
cable
Unless it has a sufficient current

capacity, mini split current drops
momentarily at the start/stop of
cutting machine.
Distribution
board
Beware of noises
transmitted via air.
Avoid supply from the same

distribution board to prevent troubles
by the power source propagation.
Install the line filter at the power
supply of cutting machine of mini split
(Positive grounding is necessary.)
(7) Eroor diagnosis procedures at the indoor unit side

To diagnose the error, measure the voltage (AC, DC), resistance, etc. at each connector around the printed circuit board of indoor
unit PCB on the inspection display or the operation state of unit (no operation of compressor or blower, no switching of 4-way
valve, etc.). If any defective parts are discovered, replace with the assembly of parts as shown below.
(a) Unit of replacement parts releated to indoor unit printed circuit board (Electric components on and around the
microcomputer)
Indoor unit printed circuit board, thermistor (Return air, heat exchanger), remote controller switch, limit switch, transformer,
fuse
Note (1) Judges the troubles on the parts of driving power circuit or cooling cycle with the ordinary check method.
196 -
Function of jumper wires
(b) Parts layout on the indoor unit printed circuit board (P.C.B)
Transformer
primary side
Model selector
switch
Control selection
Transformer
secondary side
Power supply
connector for PCB
Name
With
None (1)
With
J2
None (1)
J1
J3
J4
J5
With
None (1)
With
None (1)
With
None (1)
With
J6
J6 (2)
J7
J8
Return air
Outdoor unit number
HA connector
thermistor
address switch
Heat exchanger Indoor and outdoor
Limit switch input
Indoor unit number
unit transmission
thermistor
for the auto swing
address switch
None (1)
With
None (1)
With
None (1)
With
Function
Setting of 4 position angle of louver
Setting of 4 position angle of louver
4 position louver control : Valid
4 position louver control : Invalid
Heating thermostat OFF - Intermittent
operation
Heating thermostat OFF - Stop
Filter sign : Valid
Filter sign : Invalid
Normal operation operable
Operation permission prohibited
Expansion valve aperture - Fixed at
current aperture.
new aperture.
Automatic detection of expansion valve
aperture opening (only for J71, 90)
new aperture.(except J71, 90)
Expansion valve aperture - Normal
Impossibility
Spare
None (1) Spare
Notes (1) "None" means that jumper wire is not

provided on the PCB or the connection is cut.
(2) Only FDT series has the following control.
Replacement procedure of indoor unit micrcomputer printed circuit board

Microcomputer printed circuit board can replaced with following procedure.
1) Confirm the parts numbers. (Refer to the following parts layout drawing for the location of parts number.)
Parts No.
Model
PJA505A073ZA
FDR, FDUM, FDK, FDFL, FDFU
PJA505A074ZA
FDT, FDTW
PJA505A078ZA
FDTS, FDE
Model select switch (SW6)
Function of DIP switches
Model
Switch
22
28
36
45
56
71
90
112
140
Switch
SW6-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
SW6-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
SW6-3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
SW6-4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Function
Reverse Invalid
ON
Input
SW5-1
Signal Rus stop
OFF
ON
SW5-2
OFF Normal
ON
SW5-3
OFF Normal
ON
Test mode
SW5-4
OFF Normal
Note (1) All off under load condition.
(c) Check method when the error code is displayed

Remote controller or Indication board: Inspection LED, error code
Indoor unit PCB: Red LED ( inspcetion display), Green LED ( CPU. normal display )
Outdoor unit PCB: Red LED ( inspcetion display), Green LED ( CPU. normal display )
(d) Check procedure depending on indication lamps (For the indoor unit)
The next page error diagnosis is applicable to cases where only 1 unit is installed in a network unless stated otherwise but the check
method is same even if there are multiple units on the network. Except the network occupation state due to out of control indoor
unit CPU, the error display indicates the state of respective units. Check each unit specified by the error display as explained on
next page.
197 -
Error display : No display

LCD display : No display
[Polarity determination trouble]
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
Red LED
Stays OFF
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Lights continuously
Green LED
Lights continuously
When the LCD display (Center/Remote, temperature display, etc.) of remote controller flashes, it means the polarity on the
unit is not yet determined. Polarity determination is completed within a few seconds after the power on. If it is not completed
in time, CPU out of cotnrol, etc. is suspected.
Is there lighting of
the center or remote only on the
remote-controller's LCD, or is there lighting of
the green LED on the indoor
unit's PCB?
Notes (1) When CPU of one unit goes out of control, it

occuping the transmission section of the network,
YES
so the transmission of other units are not done and

the polarity of the whole network will not be
determined.
Power supply reset
(2) The unit which has its indoor and green LED
lighting continuously (or no lighting) is the one
with a defective indoor unit P.C.B.
NO
Is it more than
10 sec.
after power on?
(3) If it becomes normal after replacing the P.C.B. it

can be considered that the P.C.B. is defective
YES
(defective network transmission circuit).

Is the remote
controller LCD
nomal
If yes, it is a
malfunction by
electrical noise
YES
(1)
NO(Center or Remote only display)

Multiple units
on network
1 unit only
on network
(3)
Defective indoor unit P.C.B

Replace
(2) (3)
Defective indoor unit P.C.B on

some units Replace
198 -
Error display : No display

LCD display : No display
[Power supply line error]
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
Red LED
Stays OFF
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Stays OFF
Unit is normal
(Malfunction by noisse)
YES
Indoor/outdoor unit
transfomer CNW2 (indoor).
CNA2 (outdoor). Is AC 17V
checked between (blue)
(blue) and AC 8V between
(red) ~ (red)?
YES
Power supply checked

between 1~2 or
L1, L2, L3, N?
NO
YES
Power supply
reset
Is it
normalized
NO
NO
No power supply, wiring

error of power line
Repair
Indoor unit
Blown fuse (indoor unit:3.15A, outdoor unit:3.15A)

Replacement
Defective transfomer Replacement
Broken power cables of inside or outside of
unit
Repair
Defective remote controller P.C.B Replace
Outdoor unit
Red LED
*3 time flash
(During unit operation)
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Flash of green LED means CPU is normal.

* If the remote controller wire is broken at the
power ON, it does not illuminate.
Is there
DC 10V checked
between X (red) ~ Z (black)
of indoor unit terminal
block?
NO
YES
Poor connection of wired remote controller

cord (wiring error) or broken wire Repair
Note (1) Z for ground
Defective remote controller P.C.B

Replace
Error display :
7-Segment display :
Red LED
Green LED
Indoor unit
Stays OFF
Keeps flashing (1)
[Communication error between remote controller~Indoor unit]
Red LED
Green LED
Outdoor unit
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Note (1) With the separate power supplies for indoor/outdoor units, the outdoor unit green LED
may flash in some cases.
Is the
remote controller
covering multiple
units?
YES
NO
NO
Power supply reset
Is it
normalized
Is the power ON
on all indoor units?
Power supply ON
YES
NO
Defectve indoor unit
P.C.B Replace
199 -
Unit is normal.
(Malfunction by accidental
noise)
YES
Defectve indoor unit

PCB Replace
[Communication error between remote controller~Indoor unit]
Error display :
7-Segment display :
Red LED
Green LED
Indoor unit
*3 times flash
Keeps flashing
Red LED
Green LED
Outdoor unit
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
* Lamp OFF if remote controller wire is broken at power ON.
Remote controller normal

voltage (DC)
X ~ Z: 10.5 ~ 10.8V
Y ~ Z: 5 ~ 10.8V
Unit is normal.
(Interference by temporary
noise on remote controller
cords)
YES
Is DC 10.8V detected between

remote controller
terminals (X)
(red) ~ (Z)(black)?
YES
Is voltage swinging at DC6 ~ 10V

between remote
controller terminals (Y) (white)
~ (Z)(black)?
Is voltage swinging
YES
at DC6 ~ 10V between
indoor PCB connestors (CNK)
2(white) ~
3(black)?
YES
Power supply reset
Is it
normalized?
NO
NO
NO
NO
Broken or poor connection of remote controller
cord (white) or (black)
Defective remote controller PCB

Is DC10.8V detected
between indoor PCB
connectors (CNK) 1
(red) ~ 3 (black)?
YES
Note (1) If it is normalized by replacing the PCB, it should be judged the remote
controller or indoor unit PCB is defective (defective remote controller
communication circuit).
NO
Defective indoor unit
P.C.B
Defective remote controller PCB

Replace. Defective indoor
unit P.C.B
Replace.
Broken or poor connection of remote controller

cord (red) or (black)
200 -
Error display :
7-Segment display :
[Duplicated indoor unit No. or More than 49 indoor unit are connected.]
Indoor unit
1 time flash
Keeps flashing
Red LED
Green LED
Red LED
Green LED
Outdoor unit
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
(1)
Is the indoor unit

No. duplicated or
More than 49 indoor
unit are connected?
YES
Correction of unit No.

setting
NO
(2)
Notes (1) When correcting the unit number, check again the pairing of indoor/
outdoor units (same Number assigned to coupled units) is correct.
(2) If it is normalized by changing PCB, judge the unit number input
circuit is defective.

P.C.B
Replace
(defective unit number circuit)
Error display :
7-Segment display :
Red LED
Green LED
[Defective indoor unit heat exchanger thermistor]
Indoor unit
1 time flash
Keeps flashing
Red LED
Green LED
Outdoor unit
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Return air thermistor (Th1-A)

Indoor unit heat exchanger thermistor
(Th1-R)
Resistance temperature characteristics
Defective indoor unit PCB Replacement (Defective indoor unit heat

exchanger themistor input circuit)
Resistance (k)
YES
Is the indoor
unit heat exchanger
thermistor connector
connection OK?
Are characteristics
of indoor unit heat
exchanger thermistor OK
or is there any
broken wire?
YES
15
10
5k at 25C
NO
NO
Defective indoor unit heat exchanger

themistor Replace
Correction
10 20 30 40
Temperature (C)
Note (1) 22.5 k at -6C
Error display :
7-Segment display :
Red LED
Green LED
50
[Detective Return air thermistor]
Indoor unit
1 time flash
Keeps flashing
Red LED
Green LED
Is the return air

connection OK?
Outdoor unit
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Is the return air

thermistor characteristics
OK or is there a
broken wire?
YES
YES

Replace (Defective return air
thermistor input circuit)
NO
NO
Defective return air

thermistor Replace
Correction
201 -
Note (1) Characteristics as per the above

graph.
Error display :
7-Segment display :
[Drain trouble]
Indoor unit
1 time flash
Keeps flashing
Red LED
Green LED
Red LED
Green LED
Outdoor unit
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing

Replacement (Defective condensate motor output circuit)
NO
(1)
Is the angle of drain

piping good. Is there
any problem?
YES
Is there any
overflow?
NO
NO
YES
Is the float
switch tripped?
YES
Repair or replace the

float switch
Check DM broken wire, burning, locking.
Are there any DM connector loose.
Are there any P.C.B fasten terminal loose.
Are there any DM wires broken.

Replace (Defective DM driving
output circuit, defective float
switch input circuit)
Note (1) Check if AC230 is between DM connection DM connectors, between

faston terminal 4 brown and 5 white (FDT, FDTW 0 ).
[Control of 1 remote controller VS multiple units

Excessive number of units (more than 17 units) ]
Error display :
7-Segment display :
Red LED
Green LED
YES
Repair
NO
Is there output for

condensate motor
(DM)?
Indoor unit
Stays OFF
Keeps flashing
Red LED
Green LED
Are more
than 17 units connected
to a remote
controller?
YES
Outdoor unit
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Reduce to 16 units
or less
NO
Replace
Error display :
7-Segment display :
Red LED
Green LED
[Selection of one remote controller multiple-unit

control when setting remote controller address.]
Indoor unit
Stays OFF
Keeps flashing
Is a single
remote controller connected
to 2 or more indoor units and currently
in remote-controller
address mode?
Red LED
Green LED
YES
Outdoor unit
Stays OFF
Keeps flashing
Provide individual remote controllers;

alternatively, carry out manual
address setting.
NO
Defective remote
controller
Replace
202 -
Error display :
7-Segment display :
10
Red LED
Green LED
[Address No. combination error or addressing is

preformed with the following combinations.]
Indoor unit
Stays OFF
Keeps flashing
Red LED
Green LED
Are unit unmber

set for see
following?(1)
YES
Outdoor unit
Stays OFF
Keeps flashing
Unit number
correction
NO
Note (1)
Outdoor unit
address No.

PCB
Replace
(defective unit number
input circuit)
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Is the remote controller

connection good?
48, 49
48, 49
00 ~ 47
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Red LED
00 ~ 47
[Remote controller thermistor defective]
Error display :
7-Segment display :
11
Indoor unit
address No.
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Are the
remote controller
thermistor characteristics OK?
Is there a broken
wire?
YES
NO
YES
Remote controller circuit board defective

Replace
(Remote controller thermistor circuit defective.)
NO
Repair
Remote controller thermistor defective
Replace
Remote controller thermistor resistance temperature characteristics (ThC)

Temperature (C)
Resistance (k)
Temperature (C)
Resistance (k)
Temperature (C)
Resistance (k)
Temperature (C)
Resistance (k)
64
14
33
30
16
46
8.5
61
16
36
32
15
48
7.8
58
18
27
34
14
50
7.3
53
20
25
36
13
52
6.7
48
22
23
38
12
54
6.5
44
24
21
40
11
56
5.8
10
39
26
19
42
9.9
58
5.4
12
36
28
18
44
9.2
60
5.1
(8) Error diagnosis procedures at the outdoor unit side

At the error diagnosis related to the outdoor unit, check at first the error code of remote controller and the illumination patterns of
norma l and inspection display lamps in the same manner as the case of indoor unit.
Then estimate the outline, the cause and the location of error based on the pattern and proceed to the inspection and repair. Since
the self diagnosis function by means of the microcomputers of indoor/outdoor units provide the judgement of error of microcomputers them selves irregularity power supply line, overload, etc. caused by the installation space, inadequate volume of refrigerant
etc., the location and cause of trouble will be discovered without difficulty.
In addition, the display lamps error code of indoor/outdoor units is kept flashing, (except when the power supply is interrupted)after
the irregularity is automatically recovered to give irregularity information to the service presonnel. If any mode of higher priority
than the error retained in memory occurs after the reset of error, it is switched to that mode and saved in the memory.
(a)
Replacement parts assembly related to the outdoor unit PCB

Outdoor unit PCB, outdoor unit inverter PCB, power transistor module, diode module, capacitor, reactor, noise filter, thermistor, (heat exchanger, discharge pipe, outdoor temperature), fuse, transformer, etc.
-
203 -
(b) Parts layout on the outdoor unit (P.C.B)
20G+
20G
L52
L53
L58
L57
FME
20OL
Function selector switch

(SW9)
L56
L55
SV7
52S
L54
SV3
SV4
L49
L48
SV2
L47
SV1
L46
L45
SV8
20S
L44
L43
L42
L41
52P
FM2
L40
FM2
L39
FM1
L38
Model selector switch

(SW10)
DS4
BCU
SK16
SK17
SK15
SK13
SK11
SK8
SK7
SK6
SK5
SK4
SK3
SK1
SK18
SK25
SK24
SK23
SK22
SK21
SK20
CNT2
L51
SK12
X17
X10
X15
X16
X13
X17
X11
X15
X8
X13
X7
X11
X6
X8
X5
X7
X4
X6
X3
X5
X18
X4
X1
X18
X3
X1
X18
X23
X23
X1
X22
X22
X25
X21
X21
X24
X20
X20
X16
X10
BCU
L50
C30
C5
X12
LED2
PC4
LED4
LED5
L15
LED6
PC5
J13
R3
63L
PC6
C19
PC8
C21
J12
R5
IC14
51P
SW1
SW2
SW7
SW8
SW3
SW9
1 2 34 5 6 7 8
1 23 4
IC15
TB2
L16
ZD1
ZD2
ZD3
ZD4
LED1
R2
C9
R7
51F01
SW4
C23
PC10
SW5
NF1
SW6
IC22
FS
C6
IC3
IC12
IC13
IC9
IC4
C11
C12
C14
TP7
CNV
XTAL1
C8
C298
C17
R203
C32
CNE
IC23
C1
C299
IC25
PC14
C402
IC20
PC15
IC2
C403
C404
NF3
CT PCB input
(CNCT)
PC1
PC3
PC2
TP5
Cooling/heating compulsory input

External input
(CNS)
CNCC
CNF
CNVSV
CNCWFV
Ignition coil
(CNF)
Coolant-water flow-volume control valves 1, 2
(CNCWFV)
CNI
VSV1, 2
(CNVSV)
Dip-switch functions
SW1
SW2
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW7
SW8
PC18
PC17
NF4
C2
DS1
Name
PC16
IC21
TP1
TP9
(CNTH)
R204
TP10
CNA2
Water heat-exchanger outlet-refrigerant

thermistor
Coolant-water pump-inlet thermistor
Outdoor thermistor
Discharge-pipe thermistor
Machinery-compartment thermistor
C16
C31
DS2
High-pressure sensor
Low-pressure sensor
(CNPS)
C13
IC5
IC8
C4
C3
TP4
IC17
IC16
C7
TP3
TP2
IC1
CNTH
IC7
Inspection-display selector switch

(SW6)
NF2
IC6
C22
PC9
Oil inspection display switch

(SW5)
C10
SW10
1 2 34 5 6 7 8
R6
CNPS
IC19
CNCT
IC18
IC24
CNS
R1
L22
Pump manual operation

selector switch
(SW4)
SK9
ZNR
DS3
L37
S
L36
L18
20UF
L60
20UF+
L17
L59
FM1
Data-display selector switches

(SW7, SW8)
CNA1
Function selector switch

(SW3)
Outdoor No. address

setting switches
(SW1, SW2)
CNR
ECU input
(CNR)
Fan-motor inverter
(CNI)
SW9 functions
Function
Name
Selection of number setting for corresponding outdoor unit (x 10)

Selection of number setting for corresponding outdoor unit (x 1)
Pump manual-operation selection
Oil-inspection display
Inspection-display selection
Data-display selection (x 10)
Data-display selection (x 1)
Function
Silent mode
Standard setting
Maintenance timing: 4,000 hours
Maintenance timing: 8,000 hours
Compulsory cooling/heating
Standard setting
Without integrated engine-time error
With integrated engine-time error
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
SW91
SW92
SW93
SW94
SW3 functions
Name
SW31
SW32
SW33
SW34
SW35
SW36
SW37
SW38
Function
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
SW10 functions
Inspection-LED reset
Standard setting
Name
Spare
SW101
With defrost control

Without defrost control
With mismatch checking for inside/outside-connection
Without mismatch checking for inside/outside-connection
Trial operation
Standard setting
Trial operation: Cooling
Trial operation: Heating
External input: Demand control / Normal
External input: Operation permitted / prohibited
Test mode
Standard setting
SW105
SW106
SW107
SW108
SW 10-2
OFF
ON
Function
External input: Level input

External input: Pulse input
Refrigerant: R407
Refrigerant: R22
Cold-region specification
Standard setting
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
SW 10-3
ON
OFF
SW 10-4
OFF
OFF
Model
GHCP450HMTE4
GHCP560HMTE4
Replacement procedure of outdoor unit microcomputer printed circuit board.

Microcomputer printed circuit board can replaced with following procedure.
1) Confirm the parts numbers. (Refer to the following parts layout drawing for the location of parts number.)
Parts No.
Model
PCL505A027ZA
All models
204 -
(c) Check procedure depending on indication lamps (For the outdoor unit)
[Error on the outdoor unit signal line]
Error display:
7-segment display:
(Detected during operation only)

Indoor unit
Red LED
2 time flash
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Outdoor unit
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Stays OFF
Power supply
checked between R~N or
terminal block
YES
Is there
AC 17V checked
between CNA2 (blue) ~ (blue)
and AC 8V between (red)
~ (red) of outdoor unit
transfomer?
YES
Power supply
reset
Is it
YES
Normalized?
NO
NO
Power not supplied.

Power supply wiring
errorRepair.
NO
Defective outdoor
unit P.C.B
Blown fuse (3.15) Replacement

Defective transformer
Replcement
Broken power supply wire in
the unit Repair
Outdoor unit
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Is the pairing of
Indoor/outdoor units OK?
NO(1)
Change of unit number setting

Note (1) NO outdoor unit corresponding to the indoor
unit.
205 -
YES
Is the connection
of network signal
wires good?
NO
Repair the door connection, broken wire of

network signal wires.
Unit is normal
[Outdoor unit signal line error, Power supply error]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Indoor unit
Red LED
Outdoor unit
2time flash
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Continuously lit or unlit
Is it
normalized?
Power supply reset
YES
Malfunction due to noise, etc.

(Out of control CPU of outdoor
unit due to noise during power on)
NO
Defective outdoor unit P.C.B

Replace (Defective network
communi-cation circuit)
Indoor unit
Red LED
2 time flash
Green LED
Keeps flashing
(1)
Has the
outdoor power source
been turned OFF during
operation?
Outdoor unit
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Stays OFF
YES
Power ON
NO
Note (1) This case applies only to the situation with individual
indoor and outdoor power supplies. (When the red LED
(indoor) flashes twice and the green LED (outdoor) in
combination, it indicates that the outdoor unit's power
supply was interrupted during operation.)
Has a fuse been blown?

Is there an open circuit or disconnection in the L1 or L2 phases?
Was there a power outage (or interruption)?
Indoor unit
Red LED
Green LED
2 time flash
Keeps flashing
Outdoor unit
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
(1)
Signal wire poor

connection at outdoor
unit?
YES
Repair
NO
(2)
Signal wire poor

contact between indoor/
outdoor units?
YES
Repair
NO
Power supply reset
Is it
normalized
Notes (1) Check for poor connection (Iooseness, misconnection)

at outdoor unit terminal block and broken signal wires
between outdoor units.
(2) Check the poor connection or broken signal wires
between indoor/outdoor units.
YES

Replace (Defective network
communi-cation circuit)
206 -
Unit is normal.
(Malfunction by
accidental noise)
[Connection error indoor and outdoor unit]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Red LED
Green LED
Indoor unit
Stays OFF
Keeps flashing
Outdoor unit
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Red LED
Green LED
Connection of indoor and

outdoor unit OK?
NO
Repair
YES
Replace
[Duplicated unit No. of outdoor units]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Red LED
Green LED
Indoor unit
Stays OFF
Keeps flashing
Red LED
Green LED
Is the unit
No. duplicated on
outdoor units?
YES
Outdoor unit
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Correction
NO

Replace (Defective unit No. read
circuit)
Note (1) When the PCB is defective, the flash patterns of outdoor
unit red LED, green LED may become irregular.
[Antiphase on power supply or open L3 phase (primary side) on power supply]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Red LED
Green LED
Indoor unit
Stays OFF
Keeps flashing
Is there antiphase on
power supply?
Outdoor unit
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Red LED
Green LED
YES
Note (1) Wrong wire connection of the antiphase

detection circuit is suspected occured
during replacement of the outdoor unit
PCB. Replacement work should be
performed carefully.
Correction
NO
(1)
Is L3 phase open at
primary side?
YES
Correction
Is antiphase detection
circuit wired properly?
NO
NO
Correction
(Defective antiphase detection
circuit)
Replace
207 -
YES
Error display:
[Discharge temperature error]
7-segment display:
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Is the
discharge
gas thermistor
characteristics
normal?
YES
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Discharge gas
temperature error?
(At cooling/heating
operation)
Check the unit side.
Check the unit side.
Insufficient refrigerant Charge

the refrigerant (measure)
Is it the overload operation?
During cooling: Is FMO operating?

During heating: Is FMI operating?
Are service valves (both liquid, gas)
fully opened during both cooling
and heating.
Is the installation space of indoor/
outdoor unit adequate?
Is there any short circuit air flow
for indoor/outdoor units?
NO
Discharge pipe thermistor replace
Error stop
Operable
NO
Defective outdoor unit

P.C.B Replacement
(Defective discharge gas
thermistor input circuit)
Temperature-resistance
characteristics of discharge
gas thermistor(ThO-D)
100
90C 130C
Discharge pipe temp.
T<
= 80C
10
T>
= 80C
5
50
0
0
20
50
80 100
Temperature [T] (C)
120
[Defective water heat exchanger outlet thermistor]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Is the
connection condition for
the water heat exchanger
outlet thermistor
acceptable?
NO
Repair
Keeps flashing
YES
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Are the
characteristics of the
water heat exchanger
outlet thermistor acceptable?
Are there any open
circuits?
YES

Replace (Defective input circuit
in water heat exchanger outlet
thermistor)
NO
Resistance/temperaturecharacteristics of water heat exchanger outlet thermistor (Tho-MO)
Water heat exchanger outlet

thermistor is defective
Replace
15
Resistance (k)
Thremistor resistance (k) [T <

= 80C]
Is the unit
normalized
10
5k at 25C
10
20
30
Temperature (C)
208 -
40
50
Thremistor resistance (k) [T >

= 80C]
Error display:
[Defective outdoor temperature thermistor]
7-segment display:
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Is the outdoor
air temperature thermistor
connector connection
OK?
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Is the outdoor
temperature thermistor
characteristics OK, is there
no broken wire?
YES
NO
YES

Replace (Defective outdoor temperature thermistor input cicuit)
NO
Defective outdoor
Replace
400
Thermistor resistance (k) [T < 0C]
Repair
characteristics of outdoor
temperature thermistor (ThO-A)
300
40
30
T < 0C
200
20
T > 0C
100
10
0
-50
Thermistor resistance (k) [T > 0C]
50
Temperature [T] (C)

[Defective discharge gas thermistor]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Is the
discharge gas thermistor
connector connection
OK?
YES
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Are thr discharge

gas thermistor characteristics
OK, is there no
broken wire?
NO
NO
Repair

Replacement (Defective discharge gas thermistor input circuit)
YES
Defective discharge gas

thermistor Replace
100
209 -
characteristics of discharge
gas thermistor(ThO-D)
T<
= 80C
T>
= 80C
5
50
0
0
10
20
50
80 100
Temperature [T] (C)
120
Thremistor resistance (k) [T >

= 80C]
Red LED

= 80C]
10
[High-pressure abnormality]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
At HPS operation
1. During cooling
Is the outdoor unit fan motor operating?
Is there no short circuit air circulation for the outdoor unit?
Is there sufficient space for air inlet & outlet?
2. During heating
Is the gas side service valve fully opened?
Is the indoor unit heat exchanger thermistor detached from
the detector case?
Is the filter clogged?
3. During colling / heating
Is the refrigerant over charge?
YES
Did HPS, operate?
NO

Replace (Defective HPS,
input circuit)
11
[Excessive numbers of indoor units connected]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Does number of
indoor units connected
exceed the specified
value?
Indoor unit
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
(1)
YES
Correction
NO
Keeps flashing
Turn off the power supply,

and turn it on again.
Outdoor unit
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
YES
Replace indoor / outdoor P.C.B.
Is error displayed?
NO
Note (1) Outdoor No. setting check of indoor unit
(Is outdoor No. of other system used?)
12
Malfunction due to noise, etc.
[Outdoor fan motor overcurrent (51F01) error]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Does outdoor
fan motor
(FM01) run?
YES
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Does AC200V
stand any terminal?
Check 51F01.
NO
Is outdoor
installation space
proper?
NO
YES
Power system error

(Inspect relays.)
Outdoor P.C.B defect

Replace.
NO
Repair.
210 -
YES
Outdoor fan motor P.C.B

Replace.
13
[Outdoor fan motor (FM02) or invertor error]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Does AC 200V stand

at U, V and W?
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
YES
Outdoor fan motor defect

Replace
YES
Does invertor board

LED (green) flash?
NO
Does AC 200V stand

at L1, L2 and L3?
NO
YES
Does invertor board

LED (red) flash?
NO
Check whether LED (red)

flashes or not.
NO
Invertor board defect
Invertor P.C.B defect

Replace.
Power system error
14
YES
[Error in coolant-water pump's inlet water thermistor]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Outdoor unit
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Is the
connection condition
YES
for the coolant-water pump's
inlet water thermistor
acceptable?
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Are the
characteristics of
the coolant-water pump's inlet
water thermistor
acceptable?
Resistance/temperature
characteristics of coolant-water
pump's inlet water thermistor (Tho-PI)
100
Coolant-water
pump's inlet water
Replacement
thermistor is defective
Repair
10
T>
= 80C
T<
=80C
5
50
0
0
20
50
80 100 120
Temperature [T] (C)
[High-pressure sensor error]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Is the
connection condition for
the high-pressure sensor
acceptable?
NO
Repair
Defective outdoor unit PCB Replacement

(Defective input circuit in high-pressure sensor)
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
YES
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Are the
high-pressure sensor
acceptable?
NO
High-pressure sensor
is defective
YES
Output characteristics
Output voltage (V)
15
YES
NO
NO

(Defective input circuit in coolant-water
pump's inlet water thermistor)
Replace
Pressure (MPa)
211 -
Thermistor resistance (k) [T>

= 80C]
Red LED
Thermistor resistance (k) [T <

= 80C]
Indoor unit
16
[Low pressure error]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
When 63L is activated

YES
Does 63L activate?
Does refrigerant run out

(Does gas leak)?
NO
(63L input circuit defect)
Replace
17
[Cooling water pump overcurrent (51P)]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
YES
Does pump motor run?
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Does AC 200V stand

at each terminal?
Check 52P.
NO
NO
Power system trouble

Replace
18
[Cooling water level error (FS)]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Does float switch (FS)

activate?
NO
YES
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Is water filled in the

reservoir tank of
radiator?
YES
NO
Resupply
Defective outdoor P.C.B

Replace.
212 -
Defective float switch

and broken wiring
YES
Pump motor defect

Replace
19
[Motor error for coolant-water flow-volume control valve 1

(CWFV1)]
[Motor error for coolant-water flow-volume control valve 1
(CWFV2)]
Error display:
7-segment display:
7-segment display:
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Is there a
voltage of 12 V in the motor's
connectors? (Between CWFV2, No. 2
(white) and No. 8 (black) Between
CWFV1, No. 10 (white) and
No. 16 (black)
NO
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Is the condition
of the connections and wiring
between the PCB and the
motor acceptable?
YES
Inspection for open

circuits and repair
YES
Defective motor
Replace
20
NO
Defective outdoor unit PCB

Replace
[Engine water temperature error (Tho-W)]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Are
characteristics of
engine water temperature
thermistor good?
YES
NO
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
YES
Is engine cooling
system good?
Temperature-resistance characteristics
of water temperature thermisror (Tho-W)
Defective engine board

or control board
Replace.
NO
Defective engine water

Replace.
Inspect/replace.
Note (1) If water temperature rises beyond 110 C error will be displayed
21
[Engine oil pressure error (OPE)]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Is engine oil
pressure switch (OPE)
activated?
NO
Defective engine P.C.B
Defective control P.C.B
Replace.
YES
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Is oil amount proper?
YES
Defective engine oil pressure

switch or broken wiring
Repair or Replace.
NO
Refill or replace.
213 -
Temperature (C)
30
20
10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
Resistance (K)
28.60
16.20
9.56
5.88
3.73
2.45
1.65
1.14
0.81
0.58
0.43
0.32
0.25
0.19
0.15
0.12
22
[Engine overspeed]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
YES
Is engine speed normal?
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Defective engine
controller P.C.B
Replace.
NO
Is carburetor
or stepping motor proper?
YES
Defective engine
controller P.C.B
Replace.
NO
Inspect, correct or replace
23
Detection conditions
(1) Engine speed of 2,600rpm or more
Display for detection of 1 second
(2) Engine speed of 2,500rpm or more
Display for detection of 10 seconds
[Engine underspeed]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Is engine speed normal?
YES
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Defective engine
controller P.C.B
Replace.
NO
Is fuel system proper?
NO
Inspect or replace.
YES
Is carburetor or
setting motor proper?
Defective engine
controller P.C.B
Replace.
YES
NO
Repair of replace.
214 -
Detection conditions
(1) Engine speed of 600rpm or less
Display for detection of approx. 4 seconds
24
[Engine start failure]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Red LED
Green LED
Function system
Stays OFF
Keeps flashing
Part concerned
Starter
IIA
Electricity
Protective switches
High tension cord
Ignition plug
Gas kind
Main pressure
Main valve
Gas
Mixer
Microcomputer meter
Zero governor
Mixer
Air
Duct
Cooling water
Refrigeration cycle
Engine
Load (start)
Cause
Defective starter motor
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Remarks: Since there are many factors for engine start failure,
check for the error factor referring to the following
table.
Factor division
Factor
Mechanical defect Worn rotary section
Electrical defect Worn brush
Defective board (unit)

Defective wiring
Electrical defect
Defective power supply
Electrical defect
Defective ECU board

Defective ignition coil
Electrical defect
Electrical defect
Checking method
Disassembly inspection
Operation check
Broken wiring
Poor connector contact
Defective breaker
Defective transformer
Broken diode
Primary coil defect

Secondary coil defect
Defective wiring
Electrical defect Wire breakage
Defective relay (G1~3)
Electrical defect Defective coil
Poor contact
Electrical defect Poor contact
Defective distributor
Mechanical defect Worn rotary area
Electrical defect Voltage drop
Poor contact
Poor adjustment
Electrical defect Poor connector contact
Stepping motor trouble
Defective motor
Wire breakage
Poor pin contact
Defective high tension cord Electrical defect Degraded high tension cord
Distributor contact defect
Drooped cap area
Dirty cap area
Defective ignition plug
Defective part Large cap
Dirtiness
Wetness (Defective cylinder head gasket)
Different gas
Electrical defect Defective coil
Harness wire breakage
Mechanical defect Defective valve main body
Pressure drop
Supply pressure defect
Pressure drop during start
Mechanical defect Clogged valve
Defective main valve
Valve closing
Mechanical defect Wire get-off
Defective mixer
Full opening seizure
Defective microcomputer meter Mechanical defect Trouble
Microcomputer meter operation Defective gas system Slow leak
Rupture
Defective zero governor
Mechanical defect Improper bypass hole diameter
Bypass hole clogged
A/F unsuitability
Poor adjustment Poor adjustment of idling adjusting screw
Poor adjustment of main screw
Air column resonance
Mechanical defect Clogging
Gasket
Defective part Defective gasket
Increase of load
Mechanical defect Possible compression block
Increase of load
Mechanical defect Possible thermal seizure (bearing, piston)
Oil pressure drop
Mechanical defect Defective oil pump
Oil pillar defect Different quality (large
viscosity) Water, foreign material (dirtiness)
Poor compression pressure Mechanical defect Worn piston ring
Deposit caught by intake valve
Deposit caught by exhaust valve
215 -
Voltage check
Operation check
Resistance measurement 1.2 ~1.5
Resistance measurement 7.7 ~10.4K
Continuity check
Operation check
Continuity check
Voltage measurement
Continuity check
Timing light check (BTDC20/1200min-1 or less)
Continuity check
Resistance check of 25K or less

Contact area check
Visual check
Visual check
Measurement (0.4 ~ 0.9mm)
Visual check
Visual check
Check of gas kind
Resistance check
Continuity check
Operation check
Pressure measurement
Pressure measurement of governor of hereafter
Check with gas blow
Check valve opening
Adjust the wire length
Slot operation check
Rotation check of meter needle
Visual check
Visual check
Visual check of water amount of reservoir tank
Revolution variation, compressor interference, abnormal noise of engine
Revolution variation, interference, abnormal noise of engine
Oil pressure drop (0.03MPa or less)
Sampling analysis
Compression pressure measurement (0.9 ~ 12.5MPa)
25
[Engine oil level error 2]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
YES
Is specified oil a
mount filled?
NO
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
YES
Is oil level switch proper?
Defective control P.C.B or

engine P.C.B
Replace.
NO
Inspection or refill.
26
Red LED
Note (1) For the display conditions of the engine

oil level error. refer to Page 121.
Inspect repair.
[Inspection engine oil]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Has the
cumulative operating
time of the engine
exceeded 8000
hours?
YES
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Change the engine oil

and reset using SW5.
NO
Defective control P.C.B or
engine P.C.B
Replace.
[Machine-compartment temp. error]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Outdoor unit
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Are the
characteristics of
the machine-compartment
thermistor
normal?
YES
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Please carry out and inspection on the unit side.
Is the temperature in
the machine compartment
abnormal
(for heating and cooling)?
Defective fan
characteristics of machinecompartment thermistor (Tho-ET)
NO
Replacement of the machinecompartment thermistor
100
Has the unit returned

to normal?
NO
(Defective input circuit in
machine-compartment thermistor)
Replacement
216 -
10
T>
= 80C
T<
=80C
50
0
0
20
50
80 100 120
Temperature [T] (C)
Thermistor resistance (k) [T>

= 80C]
Indoor unit
Thermistor resistance (k) [T <

= 80C]
27
28
[Communication error between outdoor P.C.B and engine controller]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Does voltage
stand between CnR3 and
Cn3 or CnR2 and Cn2
(engine communication)?
YES
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Defective engine P.C.B or

control P.C.B
Replace.
NO
Note (1) Voltage 0 to 5V between the terminals 1 and 2. (Terminal 1 is

grounded.)
(2) For the display conditions of the communication error, refer to
Page 122.
Broken wiring
Inspect repair
29
[Machine-compartment thermistor error]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Outdoor unit
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Are the
machine-compartment
thermistor
acceptable?
Is the
connection condition
YES
for the machine-compartment
thermistor
acceptable?
Replace
7-segment display:
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Green LED
10
T>
= 80C
T<
=80C
50
0
0
20
50
80 100 120
Temperature [T] (C)
[Abnormality in data transmission from engine accumulator timer]
Error display:
Red LED
characteristics of machinecompartment thermistor (Tho-ET)
100
Defective machinecompartment thermistor
Repair
30
YES
NO
NO

(Defective input circuit in machine-compartment
thermistor)
Stays OFF
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Defective control PCB
Replacement
217 -
Thremistor resistance (k) [T>

= 80C]
Red LED

= 80C]
Indoor unit
31
[Engine stepping motor error]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Does voltage 0 to 5V
stand at Cn6 connector?
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
YES
Defective stepping motor

Replace.
YES
Defective engine controller

P.C.B Replace.
NO
Is wiring
proper between engine
control P.C.B and Cn6
connector?
NO
Inspect repair broken wiring.
32
[Engine water temperature thermistor wire breakage]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Is water thermistor
connector properly
connected?
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Are characteristics of
water thermistor proper?
YES
NO
YES
Defective engine control

P.C.B Replace.
NO
Inspect repair
33
Temperature-resistance characteristics
of water temperature sensor (Tho-W)
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Defective thermistor
Replace.
[Engine oil level switch wire breakage]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Indoor unit
Red LED
Outdoor unit
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Are connectors
of oil level switches (OL1, 2)
properly connected?
NO
Wire breakage of oil level switch
Replace.
YES
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Is engine oil amount proper?
YES
NO
Inspect repair
218 -
Defective engine control

P.C.B Replace.
Temperature (C)
30
20
10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
Resistance (K)
28.60
16.20
9.56
5.88
3.73
2.45
1.65
1.14
0.81
0.58
0.43
0.32
0.25
0.19
0.15
0.12
34
[Engine full-open full-close switch error]
Error display:
7-segment display:
Indoor unit
Red LED
Outdoor unit
OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Full-close
switch is not pushed even
when throttle switch (TS1,2) is
below standard value.
YES
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Is the engine stepping

motor good?
YES
Engine controller circuit

P.C.B defective Replace.
YES

YES

YES

NO
NO
(Refer to previous page)
Broken wire for full-closed

switch Replace.
Full-open switch
is not pushed even when throttle
switch (TS1,2) is below
standard value.
YES

motor good?
NO
NO
Broken wire for full-open

switch Replace.
Full-close
switch does not go to off
even when throttle switch (TS1,2)
is below standard
value.
YES
NO
NO
Short circuit of full-closed
switch Replace.
Full-open
switch does not go to off even
when throttle switch (TS1,2) is
below standard
value.
NO
Short circuit of full-open
switch Replace.

motor good?

YES

motor good?
NO

219 -
35
Error display:
[IIA signal / oil pressure switch error]
7-segment display:
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Red LED
Stays OFF
Green LED
Keeps flashing
Is wire of oil pressure

switch broken?
Red LED
Keeps flashing
Green LED
Keeps flashing
YES
Is IIA connector
properly connected?
NO
Repair
Replace
YES
Defective engine controller P.C.B

Replace.
NO
Wire breakage
Replace
Notes (1) If oil pressure is higher than set when engine stops [Set
value:0.03KPa] the error will be displayed approx. 5
seconds after power is turned on?
(2) When engine stops and oil pressure switch is off, the
error will be displayed approx. 120 seconds after
power is turned on.
(9) Protection against wrong connection of signal line/power line

If 230V is wrongly supplied to the signal lines (terminals A B , indoor board), the display of the remote control will not come on
or the address will not be checked with "inspection" switch.
Remedy
After the wrongly connected area is repaired, replace CnK

(yellow) on the indoor printed-circuit board with CnK2
connector (black for space), and cut the jumper line J10.
It is valid for the first time alone. In addition, it is clearly
written on the indoor wiring nameplate as follows.
Even if 230V is wrongly connected to A-B signal
line, it will be protected for the first time alone. If
the unit No. can not be checked with the inspection
switch of the remote control 5 minutes after power
is supplied, check all signal lines. If any wrong
Jumper line
(J10)
connection is found, correct it referring to the

installation manual. (Cut the jumper line J10 on
the burned board, and replace the connector CnK
(yellow) with CnK2 (black).
Cnk2 connector
(2P, black)
220 -
Cnk connector
(2P, yellow)
(10) How to advance checks for each faulty symptom

(a) Inspection method when there is no error display
1)
Four way valve does not switch during heating operation

Defective 20S
Replacement
YES
Is the power
supplied to 20S?
NO
Replacement
Louver motor does not operate

Inspect at the indoor unit side.
2)
Does the
louver operate at
power on?
Operate more than
1 min. later
NO
NO
Is LM wire
broken?
YES
YES
YES
Repair the wire

Is the louver
operated with the remote
controller
YES
Replace LM
Normal
NO
It is normal
if it stops with
2 pushes on LS
Note(1) LM: Louver motor

LS: Limit switch
Turn off and back on again

the power and check the
motion of LS
Does the louver

link push the LS till
a click sound is
heard?
Is LM
locked?
NO
Adjust LS lever and

check again
YES
Defective LS
Replacement
Defective indoor unit PCB
Replacement
When the indoor unit blower does not operate

Inspect at the indoor unit side.
3)
When some modes only operate.

All of cooling,
blower heating, thermal dry
do not operate
NO
Replacement
YES
Check with the Hi, Me, Lo of blower
mode.
Check FM1
Is Voltage detected
between CNF
terminals?
(1)
NO

Replacement
YES
Defective FM1, capacitor
(CF1) Replacement
221 -
NO
Defective indoor
unit PCB
Method judging miss wiring between the signal wire and the power supply wire in the super
lynk system
Example of wiring
L N : Power Terminal
A B : Signal Terminal
(Unit in mis wiring)

(Indoor unit)
LN
(Indoor unit)
AB
LN
(Indoor unit)
AB
LN
AB
Power supply wires

Signal wires
Check the wiring beforehand as follows to prevent above mis wiring.

Note (1) If the unit is operated in mis wiring, the control substrate will be damaged.
(a) Procedures
1)
Perform the checking before power is turned on.
2)
Confirm the total number of indoor/outdoor controllers (control printed circuit board) on the network.
Note (1) SLA-1-E and SLA-2A-E include control value.
3)
Measure the resistance between signal terminals (terminal A and B)(1) on the network.
Note (1) It does not matter whether the measuring points are inside or outside room so long as they are between terminal A
and B.
(b) Judging method

1)
When the resistance is the normal value for the corresponding number of controllers shown in the below table, there is no
mis wiring.
2)
When the resistance is less than 80, more than one unit is in mis wiring.
(The lower the resistance is, the more units are in mis wiring.)
3)
When the signal wire is open on the route, the resistance shows larger value than the normal.
Note (1) It is difficult to count the accurate number of contacting units from the result of resistance measurement.
4)
The number of controllers and the resistance between terminal A and B.
Total number of
controllers
Resistance between
A and B () when the
wiring is normal
Resistance between
A and B () when
one unit is mis wiring
Resistance between
A and B () when
two unit are mis wiring
Resistance between
A and B () when
three unit are mis wiring
4550
74
3033
73
37
2275
73
37
25
1820
72
37
25
1517
71
37
25
1300
71
36
25
1138
70
36
24
1011
70
36
24
10
910
69
36
24
20
455
64
35
24
40
228
56
32
23
60
152
50
30
22
80
114
45
28
21
97
94
42
27
20
222 -
7. PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
(1) Periodic inspection content list
In order to use the gas heat pump air conditioner for a long time, periodic maintenance/inspection and part replacement are
necessary.
The following table describes the maintenance/inspection and part replacement (once) items for every 8,000 working hours.
After 20,000 working hours, replace engine oil and the oil filter and apply the inspection of specified parts every 4,000hours.
Before maintenance/inspection, be sure to carry out the following.

3 minutes after the operation is stopped, turn off the earth leakage breaker.
Close the main plug of the fuel.
Code
Periodically inspected item
Engine oil replacement, leakage inspection (level, dirtiness, leakage)
Oil filter replacement
Spark plug inspection and replacement
Drain filter
Working hours
8
16
20
24
28
32
Inspection, refilling
Filter and sheet replacement
e
Cooling water inspection (cooling water amount)
Inspection of cooling water hose (looseness, scractch, leakage)
Inspection of fuel gas hose (looseness, scractch, leakage)
Air cleaner element replacement (dirtiness)
i
j
k
l
Exhaust gas hose (looseness, scractch, leakage)

Inspection and
replacement
of hoses
Exhaust gas drain hose (looseness, scractch, leakage)

Intake air hose (looseness, scractch, leakage)
Oil tank hose (looseness, scractch, leakage)
High tension cord inspection (dirtiness, scractch)
Compression pressure inspection
Compressor inspection* (oil level, color, leakage)
Refrigerant leakage inspection
Inspection for abnormal operation sound*
Engine cylinder head replacement
Compressor replacement
Engine replacement
Coupling rubber (Connecting section of engine and compressor)
Notes (1)
mark indicates replacement, and mark indicates inspection (adjustment). * marked inspection is dependent on the operational state.
(2) If any item is subject to "inspection" alone of all years, replace the part when an abnormality is found during inspection.
(3) Use Mitsubishi Heavy Industries brand genuine oil (MGO-X oil) for the engine oil.
(4) When adding the cooling water, use Mitsubishi Heavy Industries GHP genuine coolant.
Use the added concentration of 50%. (Select the optimal concentration for the cold district.)
(5) When the compression pressure is less than the specified value, clean the valves with valve cleaner.
223 -
36
40
(2) Periodic inspection procedure and methods
Oil filter
Engine coolanttemperature sensor
Oil cooler
Starter motor
Stepping motor
Oil-pressure
sensor
View A
(a) Changing engine oil and inspecting for leakage
(i) Inspect for engine oil leakage
Inspect the engine for signs of oil leakage. Pay special attention to the cylinder head cover gasket and the oil pan gasket.
(ii) Changing engine oil
1) Oil removal.
a) Confirm that the oil pan has been warmed up sufficiently. If this is not the case, open the fuel-gas stopcock and turn on
the trial-operation switch (SW3-5). Following this, allow the engine to operate for approximately 5 minutes, and then
close the fuel-gas stopcock.
b) After the engine has been stopped, remove oil from the oil-drain hose which is located at the bottom of the oil pan on
the front of the unit. When removal has been completed, tightly secure the drain-hose cap.
2) Addition of new oil
a) Charging of oil from the oil-reserve tank (upper side):
1 Turn ON SW3-4 and then operate and hold SW6 for a period of 2 seconds. Following this, pour the oil from the
reserve tank into the sub-tank (lower side).
2 Remove the sub-tank's cap and pour in new oil until it reaches the "F" level as shown on the level gauge.
3 Remove the reserve tank's cap and pour in new oil until it reaches the "F" level as shown on the side of the tank.
b) No oil in the reserve-tank:
1 Remove the sub-tank's cap and pour in new oil until it reaches the "F" level as shown on the level gauge.
2 Remove the reserve tank's cap and pour in new oil until it reaches the "F" level as shown on the side of the tank.
Notes (1) Only use recommended engine oil
(2) Use care not to spill engine oil on the belts or hoses.
(3) Wipe up all spills.
Oil change interval Every 8,000 hours or every 4 years

Standard amount
F +0
5 mm
(Tools) Oil pump, oil can
224 -
(b) Oil filter replacement

(i)
Oil filter
Remove the oil filter with the oil filter wrench. Since
oil drips at the time, protect the oil pressure switch
and starter motor with waste cloth or similar.
(ii) Clean the installation surface of the oil filter, and coat
clean engine oil on the gasket area of the new oil
filter.
(iii) Lightly screw in the oil filter as far as its gasket comes
into contact with the bracket, and retighten the oil
filter 3/4 turns farther with the oil filter wrench.
Replacement interval
Every 8,000 hours or 4 years
(c) Spark plug replacement

(i)
Remove the cap of the high tension cord, and remove

the spark plug with the plug wrench.
(ii) When installing the new spark plug, be sure to tighten

it with hand and finally with the plug wrench.
Spark plug
(iii) Verifying the No. of each high tension cord, securely
Plug wrench
fit it into the cap.

(d) Drain filter inspection/refilling

(i)
Removal
1 Remove the clip from each hose (4 places), and
disconnect the hose from the drain filter.
2 Remove the screw (2 places) under the front face
of the drain filter.
3 Remove the screws (14 places of the upper lid of
the drain filter, and remove the upper lid.
(ii) Inspection and refilling

1 If it is dirty or clogged, clean the drain filter.
Exhaust-gas drain filter
2 If the filling pebbles are reduced to approx. 70%

or less, refill the pebbles (CaCO3).
For the filling amount, refer to the right figure.
Filling pebbles
filling pebbles.
(iii) Replacement of filter element
Drain outlet
Renew the filter element (nonwoven cloth).

(e) check of cooling water
Check whether the cooling water stands at "F" level
in the reservoir tank or not. If it is lower than "F"
level, refill the coolant (specified by our company).
(ii) Measure the concentration of the cooling water with
the coolant tester.
Specified amount F
Reference value
Concentration:50% or more
-
Sheet
47.5mm
3 If it is excessively dirty or clogged, replace the
(i)
Drain inlet
Filter element
225 -
(f)
Inspection of cooling water hose

(i)
Cooling water hose
Check the cooling water hose for crack and

Hose clip
degradation, the hose clip for looseness and the

cooling water for leakage. (Manifold out side,
between manifold and water inlet, engine inlet.)
(g) Inspection of fuel gas hose

(i)
Fuel-gas hose
Check the fuel gas hose for crack, degradation, gas

leakage, etc., and the hose clip for looseness.
Hose clip
(h) Replacement of air cleaner element

(i)
Air cleaner
Remove the air cleaner cover (clamped at 3 places),

and renew the air cleaner element.
(ii) During replacement, clean the inside and outside of

the case with waste cloth, etc.
(i)
Exhaust gas hose

(i)
Exhaust gas hose
Check the exhaust gas hose for crack, degradation

and leakage, and the hose clip for looseness. (Between
Hose clip
engine and exhaust gas heat exchanger)

(ii) Securely fit the new hose, and tighten the hose clip.
Exhaust muffler
(j)
Exhaust drain hose

(i)
Inspect the exhaust drain hose for crack, degradation

and leakage.
Exhaust gas
heat exchanger
Exhaust drain
hose
226 -
(k) Intake hose and intake port

(i)
Inspect the intake hose for crack, degradation and
Air cleaner
Intake-air hose
leakage.
(ii) Check whether the intake port is clogged with vinyl,
etc. or not.
(l)
Oil tank hose

(i)
Oil sub-tank 2
Inspect the oil tank hose for crack, degradation and

Oil tank hose
leakage.
Hose clip
Oil sub-tank 1
(m) Inspection of high tension cord

(i)
Check for crack, damage and so on the high tension cord
High-pressure cord
Distributor
(n) Compression pressure inspection

(i) Compression pressure measurement
Measure compression pressure of each cylinder using a compression gauge.
1 Close the gas supply valve.
2 Disconnect the CnS connector on the outdoor board. (Operation from the remote controller is forbidden.)
3 Remove the throttle rod of mixer.
4 Remove all plugs.
5 Set the compression gauge on the first cylinder.
6 Open the throttle to nearly full open state by hand. (Be careful not to press the full open switch.)
7 Turn ON the starter by the actuator operation screen of the personal computer checker or by the test run switch.
8 The needle of the compression gauge will rise up at a stretch at first then rise gradually for 2 to 3 times and stop.
Read the indication at that time (maximum pressure) and record.
9 Measure and record the pressure for the second through fourth cylinders with the same manner described in 5 through 8.
0 Attach the CnS connector.
(ii) Judgment of necessity of cleaning
Compression pressure
Pressure is 9 kg/cm2 and less for more than one cylinder.
Cleaning is necessary.
Pressure is between 9 kg/cm2 and 10 kg/cm2 for all cylinders
but the plug is dirty for at least one cylinder.
Cleaning is necessary.
Pressure is 10 kg/cm2 and over for all cylinders.
Cleaning is not necessary.
227 -
(iii) Cleaning method

1) Preliminary preparation
1 Disconnect the CnS connector on the outdoor
board. (Operation from the remote controller
is forbidden.)
2 Execute warming-up operation for 5 to 6
minutes by pressing the test run switch.
When the engine oil pan temperature is outside
air temperature +10C and higher, the warmingup operation is unnecessary.
3 Stop the warming-up operation and turn OFF
the power switch after the cooling water pump
stops.
4 Disconnect the air connector.
2)
Vacuum hose
Acceleration rod
Stepping motor
fastening bolt
Mixer
Cleaning procedures
1 Connect the attached nozzle to the engine
conditioner.
2 Confirm that the power source of the outdoor
unit is OFF.
Stepping motor
Throttle lever
fastening bolt
3 Turn the mixer throttle lever clockwise by hand
Mixer gasket
(bolt A)
to open the throttle valve.
Insert the engine conditioner nozzle to the inside of the mixer and jet for approx. 20 seconds. (Take care of burn.)
4 When jet is completed, turn ON the power switch on the outdoor unit. Wait for 2 to 3 minutes and operate the unit
by pressing the test run switch.
5 Operate the unit for 2 minutes and stop.
6 Repeat the procedures shown in 2 through 5.
7 When the cleaning work is completed, continue the operation until the exhaust gas color becomes colorless.
(iv) Confirmation of compression pressure

Compression pressure
Pressure is 10 kg/cm2 and over for all cylinders.

Pressure is less than 10 kg/cm2 for some cylinders.
Cleaning is ineffective.
OK
Clean again.
(maximum 3 times)
Replace defective cylinder head (s).
(o) Inspection of compressor

(i) During running, inspect whether any abnormal noise generates from the main body of the compressor or not.
(ii) Refrigerator oil
When replacing the compressor, check the refrigerator oil. Replace the refrigerator oil if the following reference is not satisfied.
Sample a small amount of refrigerator oil into the vinyl bag (transparent), and check the dirtiness and odor.
Refrigerator oil reference
Dirtiness 2.5 or less (Standard colorimeter)
Odor
There is no odor which stimulates the nose.
Since the refrigerator oil is consumed a little by a little due to the smooth mechanical seal, check the oil level through the sight
glass on the side of the compressor every week. If the oil level drops beyond the reference, refill it with the oil pump.
(p) Inspection of refrigerant leakage
(i) Using the gas leak tester, check the condenser's copper pipe (brazed area, etc.), refrigerant inlet/outlet areas (refrigerant pipe
connection area), etc.. If it leaks, correct or replace the troubled area.
(q) Inspection of abnormal noise operation
(i) Check for abnormal noise from the outdoor unit in operation.
(ii) Take special care to check the cylinder head area for rattling and creaking sounds and the engine and its soundings for rotary
interference sound.
228 -
8. REPLACING PROCEDURE OF MAJOR ENGINE PARTS

(b)
(1) Distributor
[Removal]
(a) Turn off the earth leakage breaker (ELB), and
disconnect four high tension cords and connector.
Note (1) When disconnecting the high tension cord, never
pull the cord.
Viewing from the top, set the cut groove of the oil
pump drive shaft at approx. 30.
30
Cut groove
of oil drive
(b)
Pump
shaft
(c) Install the distributor in the following procedure.

1) Align the groove of the distributor housing to the
drilled mark of the spiral gear. (It does not align to
the straight pin of the spiral gear.
2) Insert the distributor to be parallel to the engine,
and temporarily tighten the setting bolt.
Note (1) When inserting it, align the block installing
threaded hole to near the center of the installing
flange groove.
Remove the hose and setting bolts of the vacuum

advancer, and remove the distributor.
Ditch
[Installation]
(a) Set the top dead point of compression of No. 1
cylinder in the following procedure.
1) Remove No. 1 Ignition plug.
2) Close the hole of No.1 ignition plug, and turn the
crankshaft clockwise. When the pressure is felt at
the finger tip, it is the top dead point of compression.
3) Align the notch groove of the crank pulley to the
timing "0".
4) Install No. 1 ignition plug.
Straight pin
(d)
Insert the high tension cord until it "clicks", and

connect the connector and vacuum hose.
Then turn on the earth leakage (ELB).
(e) Adjustment of ignition timing
Firing order : 1-3-4-2
Reference value : Cooling water temperature 75 to 85C
1) Installation of tachometer and timing light.
Fit the measurement cord of the tachometer to
No. 1 high tension cord.
Timing 0
No.1
plug
Ignition
hole
Drill mark
Timing light
Adjust the ignition timing
to align the notch of the crank
pulley to the 4th (12) position
from 0.
Notch groove
of pulley.
229 -
2)
Inspection of idling speed

Reference value: 1200 25min-1
3) Inspection and adjustment of ignition timing
a) Inspect the ignition timing with the timing light.
Reference value:BTDC 12/1200min-1
b) if it is out of the reference value, loosen the setting
bolt of the distributor, turn and adjust the distributor,
and inspect it again.
4)
5)
To easily remove the mixer, loosen one of the two

setting bolts of the stepping motor, and remove the
bolt A.
Remove two setting nuts, and remove the mixer.
(2) Mixer
(a) Removal of acceleration rod
1) Remove the acceleration rod from the throttle lever
of the mixer.
Acceleration rod
Stepping motor
fastening bolt
Mixer
6)
Remove the mixer gasket with the scraper. At this

time, take care to prevent foreign materials from
being mixed into the port area.
(c) Installation of mixer
1) Attach new mixer gasket, and install the mixer with
two set screws.
Tightening torque: 12.75(1.3)Nm(kgfm)
Stepping motor
fastening bolt
Throttle lever
Mixer gasket
(bolt A)
(b) Removal of mixer

1) Remove two setting nuts, and remove the air
connector.
2)
Vacuum hose
2)
3)
3)
4)
Remove two vacuum hoses. At this time, scribe

the identification mark or similar on each hose.
Loosen the gas hose nipple and disconnect the fuel
hose.
5)
(d)
1)
Fuel hose
2)
Gas hose nipple
Mixer
230 -
Install the stepping motor with two setting bolts.

Insert two vacuum hoses as far as the root.
Insert the fuel hose as far as the root, and fasten it
with the clip.
Install the air connector with two setting nuts.
Installation and adjustment of acceleration rod
Disconnect the harness connector of the full
closing/opening switch.
Connect the throttle position checking jig to the
full closing/opening switch connector.
3)
Fully open the throttle lever of the mixer with hand.

Then, adjust the full opening adjustment screw of
the mixer to turn on the full opening switch in this
state.
(b)
Remove the stator

Remove the 2 set nuts and cut away the bond cable.
The stator can then be reduced.
(c) Mount by performing the above procedure in reverse.
Note (1) Use can not to mis-connect or forget to connect
the wires.
Stepping motor lever

Full opening
adjustment screw
Acceleration rod
Full opening
switch
(4) Stepping motor

(a)
(b)
Remove the throttle lever of the mixer from the

acceleration rod.
Remove two setting bolts, and remove the stepping
motor (with bracket).
Throttle lever
Full opening switch
Turn buckle
4)
5)
Install the acceleration rod on the throttle lever of

the mixer.
Turn the turnbuckle of the acceleration rod, and
adjust the length up to the stepping motor lever.
Adjusting method
Turn the stepping motor lever side to verify that the
throttle full opening switch is turned on. Then, turn
the throttle lever of the mixer to the full closing
position. Verify that the throttle full closing switch is
turned on when the stepping motor lever is turned
several mm farther toward the closed side.
Notes (1) Set the throttle lever position on the mixer side
at the full closing position.
(2) Slowly operate the stepping motor lever and the
throttle lever, and securely check the timing of
the switch activation.
6) After verifying again that the turnbuckle fastening
nut of the acceleration rod is tightened, remove the
throttle position checking jig.
7) Connect the harness connector of the full clos/opening switch.
(c)
Install the stepping motor (with the bracket) with two

setting bolts.
Tightening torque = 18.14 (1.85) Nm (kgfm)
(d) Install the acceleration rod on the throttle lever of the
mixer.
(e) Adjustment of acceleration rod
1) For the procedure, refer to Item (d)-5 adjusting
method of the mixer.
(5) Cylinder head
(a)
1)
2)
Removal of cylinder head

Remove 3 cap nuts and 3 seal washers, and remove
the cylinder head cover.
Remove the cylinder head cover gasket.
(3) Starter motor

(a)
Disconnect the connector from the starter motor,

remove the nut of the ground harness, and remove it
from the starter motor.
(b) Remove of valve locker shaft assembly

1) In the shown order, evenly loosen several times 3
bolts and 2 nuts which install the valve rocker shaft,
and remove it.
231 -
2)
Remove the valve rocker shaft assembly.
b) Remove the spring retainer, spring, seat, valve and

oil seal.
Note (1) Store the removed parts in order for the respective
cylinder.
Special tool
(c) Remove the valve push rod.

Note (1) Store the removed bush rods in order for the
respective cylinders.
(d) Removal of heat exchanger pipe
1) Remove 4 setting nuts, and remove the heat
exchanger pipe.
2) Remove 2 gaskets.
(e) Removal of manifold
1) Remove 2 setting nuts and 6 setting bolts, and
remove the manifold.
2) Remove the gasket.
(f) Removal of cylinder head
1) In the shown order, evenly loosen 13 cylinder head
bolts several times.
2) Remove the setting bolts, and remove the rear
engine hanger.
3) Remove the cylinder head from the cylinder block.
Note (1) Take care to prevent injuring the installation
surface of the cylinder head.
Intake
Exhaust
(h)
Inspection and cleaning of components of cylinder

head
1) Cleaning of upper surfaces of piston and cylinder
block
a) Turn the crank shaft to bring each piston to the top
dead point. Using the gasket scraper, remove the
carbon from the upper surface of the piston.
b) Using the scraper, remove the head gasket which
sticks to the upper surface of the cylinder block.
c) Blow the bolt hole off oil, etc. with the air gun.
Note (1) Since oil, etc. flies out, use waste cloth or similar
to prevent it from flying out.
2) Removal of gasket from cylinder head
Using the scraper, clean the bottom surface of the
cylinder head and the installation surface of the
manifold.
Note (1) During cleaning, take dare to prevent scratching
the cylinder head.
3) Cleaning of combustion room of cylinder head
Using the wire brush, clean the combustion room
off carbon.
Note (1) Dont scratch the contact surface of the head
gasket.
Front
(g) Disassembly of cylinder head

1) Removal of valve
a) Set up the compressor (special tool) on the valve,
compress the valve spring, and remove two retainer
locks.
232 -
4)
Cleaning of valve guide bush

Clean the inside of the valve guide bush with
washing liquid or similar.
5)
Cylinder washing
Use the washing liquid or similar.
7)
Crack inspection of cylinder head

Using the color check (color penetrant flaw
detection), inspect the combustion chamber, intake
port, exhaust port, and heads bottom and top
surfaces.
8)
Valve cleaning
Using the scraper, remove carbon. Then, completely remove carbon with the wire brush.
9) Valve rocker arm inspection
a) Check for wear and damage on the contact surface
of the rocker arm with the valve stem.
b) If it is slightly damaged, recondition it with oil
stone. If it is excessively worn or damaged, replace
the rocker arm.
6)
Deflection inspection of cylinder head

Using the straight scale and thickness gauge,
measure the shown area.
Limit: Bottom surface of cylinder head: 0.15mm
Installation surface of manifold: 0.10mm
Grind or replace if the limit is exceeded.
Contact surface
10) Cylinder head assembly

Sufficiently clean the assembled parts.
Coat engine oil on the slide and rotary areas.
Replace the gaskets, oil seals and so on with new
ones.
a) Valve assembly
(i) Insert the valve into the valve guide bush.
(ii) Install the valve spring sheet and oil seal.
Coat engine oil on the valve stem area and oil
seal lip area.
233 -
(iii) Install the valve spring and spring retainer.
(ii) Using the compressor (special tool), position the

push rod as shown.
Spring retainer
lock
Vakve spring
Spring
retainer
Upward
Oil seal
Spring seat
Special tool
Push rod
Push rod
Print
mark
Valve
Note (1) Install the spring, direction the paint mark toward
the head side.
(iv) Using the compressor (special tool), compress
the valve spring, and install the spring retainer
lock.
(v) Lightly hit the top of the valve stem with the
plastic hammer to bring the spring into position.
Note (1) Verify that the push rod is securely engaged in the
push rod seat area of the lifter.
c) Install the valve rocker shaft assembly on the
cylinder head.
d) In the shown order, evenly tighten 3 bolts and 2
nuts a little by a little several times.
Tightening torque : 2.35(2.4) Nm(kgfm)
11) Installation of cylinder head

a) Installation of cylinder head
(i) Taking care for the direction of the cylinder
head gasket, install the new gasket on the
cylinder block.
(ii) Install the cylinder head.
(iii) Coat the engine oil on the cylinder head bolt.
New gasket
Front
Note (1) Preventing it from being separated from the push

rod and rocker arm, tighten the bolts and nuts.
12) Installation of manifold
a) Install the new gasket.
b) Install the manifold.
13) Installation of heat exchanger pipe
a) Install 2 new gaskets.
b) Install 4 new setting nuts.
14) Install the cylinder head cover and gasket.
(i) Install the gasket and cylinder head cover
subassembly.
(ii) Install 3 seal washer and 3 sap nuts.
(iv) In the shown order, evenly tighten 13 cylinder

head bolts a little by a little several times.
Tightening torque :
M12 : 81.6(9.0)Nm(kgfm)
M8 : 19.12(1.95)Nm(kgfm)
Front
b) Install the push rod and valve rocker shaft assembly.

(i) Install the push rod in the original position.
-
234 -
(6) Crank shaft front oil seal

(a) Removal of clamp pulley
1) Using the pulley holding tool (special tool) and
flange holding tool (special tool), remove the crank
shaft pulley bolt.
(c) Replacement of crank shaft front oil seal

1) Removal of oil seal
Use - screwdriver.
Special tool
2)
Using the puller (special tool), remove the crank

shaft pulley.
2)
Special tool
(b) Remove the timing chain cover.

1) Remove 11 screws.
Assembly of oil seal

Using the handle (special tool) and replacer (special
tool), install the oil seal from the front side of the
timing chain cover.
Make the oil seal as high as the face of the cover.
Special tool
(7) Crank shaft rear oil seal

2)
Using two screwdrivers together with waste cloth,

remove the timing chain cover and gasket.
Note (1) Dont injure the timing chain cover and case.
(When the rear oil seal retainer is installed on the

cylinder block.)
(a) Using the knife, cut off the lip area of the oil
seal.
(b) Wrap vinyl tape on the driver, bring waste cloth
into contact with the crank shaft, and pry off the
oil seal.
Note (1) After removing the oil seal, verify that there is no
damage on the chamfered area of the crank shaft.
If any damage is found, correct it with sand paper
(#400).
235 -
(b)
Removal of plate (for fastening the valve plate

assembly)
1) Remove the plate fastening bolts, and remove the
plate. (2 places)
Plate
Cutting-off position
(c)
(d)
Before installation, coat MP grease on the lip area of

the oil seal.
Using the replacer for rear oil seal (special tool) and
hammer, hit the oil seal to become flush with the face
of the rear oil seal retainer.
2)
Remove the gasket. (2 places)
Gasket
Special tool
(8) Compressor
(a) Removal of cylinder head cover
1) Remove the cylinder head cover installing bolts,
and remove the cylinder head cover.
2) If it can not be removed, lightly hit the side of the
cylinder head cover with plastic hammer of similar
for removal.
3) * Since the check valve is present in the cylinder
head cover on the * marked side, remove the check
valve.
(c) Removal of valve plate assembly

1) Remove the discharger gasket, valve plate
assembly, suction valve and valve sheet from the
cylinder area with the hand with the hand. (4
places)
Valve plate assembly
Discharge gasket
Cylinder
head cover
Suction valve
Cylinder
head cover
Valve seat
236 -
2)
Components of valve plate assembly
3)
Discharge gasket
Tighten the plate to the specified torque of 9.8 Nm

(1.0kgfm). <20 bolts per unit>
Impossible
disassembly
Nut
Leaf spring
Discharge valve
Valve sheet
Head of rivet is staked.
(3 places)
Retainer
Cylinder gasket
Plate
Valve plate
assembly
Volt
Valve plate
(e) Installation of cylinder head cover

1) Taking dare against misalignment of the cylinder
head gasket, tighten the cylinder head cover to the
specified torque of 22.6 Nm (2.3kgfm).
Suction valve
Valve seat
Rivet
(d) Install of valve plate assembly

1) Install the valve seat, suction valve, valve plate
assembly and discharge gasket in order on the
cylinder head. (4 places)
*mark
(4 places)
Cylinder
head cover
(f) Intake side

1) Remove two bolts of the intake side flange.
2) Remove the intake strainer. Against entry of dust,
etc., close the hole of the crank case with tape.
3) Install the intake side flange together with the intake
strainer and new gasket (coated with oil) with two
bolts.
Tightening torque = 22.62 (2.3) Nm (kgfm)
Valve seat
Suction valve
Valve plate assembly
2)
Discharge gasket
Coat the sticking oil on the cylinder head gasket,

and place it on the surface of the cylinder head. (2
places)
Cylinder head gasket

Intake strainer
237 -
(d) Install of front case

1) Coat the sticking oil on the inside of the front case,
and slowly press-fit the shaft seal (matching ring)
with the pressing-in rod of the shaft seal (matching
ring) as far as the stopper by pressing it with hand
or hitting it.
Note (1) When inserting the shaft seal (matching ring), take
care to prevent injuring the seal surface.
(9) Replacement of shaft seal

(a) Removal of front case
1) Remove the fastening bolts of the front case, and
remove the front case.
Front case
Pressing-in rod of shaft seal

(matching ring)
Front case
Shaft seal
(matching ring)
Stopper
area
(b) Removal of shaft seal

1) Pull out the shaft seal and spacer with hand.
Shaft seal assembly
2)
Insert the oil-coated O ring into the front case.
Front case
Spacer
O ring
(c) Installation of shaft seal

1) Insert the spacer on the shaft, coat the sticking oil
on the shaft seal, and insert it.
2) Securely align two flat area between the crank shaft
and shaft seal, and assemble them.
3)
Pressing the shaft seal, tighten the front case to the

specified torque of 22.6 Nm (2.3 kgfm). (6 bolts)
Two flat ares

Crank
shaft
Front case
Spacer
Shaft seal
assembly
Spacer
Shaft seal
assembly
Crank case
4)
238 -
Turn the crank shaft to verify that it can be lightly

turned.
Tightening-torque list for principle components

Location
Engine related
Tightening points
1. Cylinder block
Cylinder head
Tightening torque (Nm) (kgfm)

For M12: 88.6 (9.0)
For M8:19.11 (1.95)
18.14 (1.85)
18.14 (1.85)
44.1 (4.5)
12.7 (1.3)
For bolts and nuts: 37.24 (3.8)
37.24 (3.8)
Distributor
Oil filter
Drain plug
Oil pan
Heat exchanger
Engine-mount bracket
2. Cylinder head
Cylinder-head cover
Plug
Manifold
Valve-rocker shaft
3. Mixer
Air connector
4. Stepping motor
Compressor related
4.9 (0.5)
17.7 (1.8)
49 (5.0)
23.5 (2.4)
12.74 (1.3)
4.9 (0.5)
18.14 (1.85)
22.6 (2.3)
9.8 (1.0)
22.6 (2.3)
22.6 (2.3)
22.6 (2.3)
22.6 (2.3)
1. Cylinder-head cover
2. Plate (for valve-plate fixing)
3. Intake strainer
4. Front case
5. Bottom cover
6. Pump cover
239 -
GAS ENGINE DRIVEN MULTI-INDOOR-UNIT

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Systems Headquarters

3-1, Asahimachi, Nishibiwajima-cho, Nishikasugai-gun, Aichi-pref., 452-8561, Japan
Fax : (052) 503-9237
No.030(1A) R

Mitsubishi Heavy Industries 00-GHP-T-055A GHP

Cargado por

Información del documento

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Mitsubishi Heavy Industries 00-GHP-T-055A GHP

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Manual No.

'00 GHP -T-055A

GAS ENGINE DRIVEN

1.1 Specific features ....................................................................................

1.2 How to read the model name ................................................................

1.3 Table of models ......................................................................................

1.4 Table of indoor units panel (Optional) .................................................

2. SELECTION DATA .......................................................................................

2.1 Specifications ........................................................................................

2.2 Range of usage & limitations ............................................................... 28

1.2 How to read the model name

: FDT, FDTW, FDTS, FDR, FDUM

Outdoor unit : GHC

1.3 Table of models

Ceiling recessed type

1.4 Table of indoor units panel (Optional)

Nominal cooling capacity*1

Nominal heating capacity*2

1 Phase 220/240V 50Hz

Hi: 36 Me: 34 Lo: 32

Louver fine & inner grooved tubing

Electronic Expansion Valve +Capillary tube

Air handling equipment

Hi: 12 Me: 10 Lo: 9

Fresh air intake

Air filter, Q'ty

Long life filter

Shock & vibration absorber

Rubber sleeve(for fan motor)

Insulation (noise & heat)

Remote control switch (Optional:RCD-HKX-S-E2)

Room temperature control

Liquid line: 6.35(1/4"), Gas line: 12.7(1/2")

Connectable with VP25

Necessary (both Liquid & Gas line)

Insulation for piping

Outdoor units to be combined

Indoor air temperature

Outdoor air temperature

Panel Part No.

Models FDTJ45HKXE2, 56HKXE2, 71HKXE2

Nominal cooling capacity*

Nominal heating capacity*2

1 Phase 220/240V 50Hz

Hi: 37 Me: 35 Lo: 34

Hi: 38 Me: 36 Lo: 34

Louver fine & inner grooved tubing

Electronic Expansion Valve +Capillary tube

Air handling equipment

Hi: 15 Me: 12 Lo: 10

Hi: 16 Me: 13 Lo: 11

Air filter, Q'ty

Long life filter

Shock & vibration absorber

Rubber sleeve(for fan motor)

Insulation (noise & heat)

Remote control switch (Optional:RCD-HKX-S-E2)

Room temperature control

Liquid line: 6.35(1/4")

Liquid line: 9.52(3/8")

Connectable with VP25

Necessary (both Liquid & Gas lines)

Insulation for piping

Outdoor units to be combined